Service Guide. Agilent Technologies PSA Series Spectrum Analyzer. This manual provides documentation for the following instruments:

Transcription

1 Service Guide Agilent Technologies PSA Series Spectrum Analyzer This manual provides documentation for the following instruments: E4440A (3 Hz 26.5 GHz) E4443A (3 Hz 6.7 GHz) E4445A (3 Hz 13.2 GHz) E4446A (3 Hz 40 GHz) E4447A (3 Hz GHz) E4448A (3 Hz 50 GHz) Manufacturing Part Number: E Supersedes: E Printed in USA June 2008 Copyright Agilent Technologies, Inc.

2 Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Agilent Technologies makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material, including but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. Safety Information The following safety notes are used throughout this manual. Familiarize yourself with each of the notes and it s meaning before operating this instrument. WARNING Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in injury or loss of life. Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met. CAUTION Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to or destruction of the instrument. Do not proceed beyond a caution sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met. WARNING This is a Safety Class 1 Product (provided with a protective earthing ground incorporated in the power cord). The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protected earth contact. Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside of the product is likely to make the product dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited. 2

3 WARNING The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that may remain live for 5 seconds after disconnecting the plug from it s power supply. WARNING The detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device. It disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply before other parts of the instrument. The front panel switch is only a standby switch and is not a LINE switch (disconnecting device). WARNING The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages. Disconnect the product from all voltage sources before starting to open. WARNING These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To avoid electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so. 3

4 Warranty This Agilent Technologies instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment. During the warranty period, Agilent Technologies Company will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Agilent Technologies. Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Agilent Technologies and Agilent Technologies shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall pay all shipping charges, duties, and taxes for products returned to Agilent Technologies from another country. Agilent Technologies warrants that its software and firmware designated by Agilent Technologies for use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument. Agilent Technologies does not warrant that the operation of the instrument, or software, or firmware will be uninterrupted or error-free. LIMITATION OF WARRANTY The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer, Buyer-supplied software or interfacing, unauthorized modification or misuse, operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product, or improper site preparation or maintenance. NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY. 4

5 Contents 1. Overview What You Will Find in This Chapter Agilent PSA Series Spectrum Analyzer Overview Instrument Hardware Option Descriptions Before Troubleshooting a Failure ESD Information Service Equipment You Will Need Service Kit Parts List Required Test Equipment List Replacement Assemblies Battery Information After an Instrument Repair Contacting Agilent Technologies Instrument Serial Numbers How to Return Your Instrument for Service Overall Troubleshooting What You Will Find in This Chapter Check the Basics Troubleshooting Power-up Problems Troubleshooting an Inoperative Instrument Check the Instrument Setup Initial Checks Troubleshooting Using Auto-Align Tests Quick Cals Isolating the faulty assembly when the displayed amplitude is incorrect or the instrument fails a gain related Auto Align test Troubleshooting Using Front Panel Keys Error Messages Using Service Features Using Alignment Features Selecting the Frequency Reference User Diagnostics Restore System Defaults Troubleshooting Performance Test Failures Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) What You Will Find in This Chapter RF Section Description (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) RF Assembly Quick Check - E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Verifying a Faulty Front End Assembly E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) What You Will Find in This Chapter

6 Contents RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Assembly Quick Check - E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Verifying a Faulty Front End Assembly E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Troubleshooting the Synthesizer Section What You Will Find in This Chapter A12 Synthesizer Assembly Description Verifying the A12 Synthesizer Board Troubleshooting LO and Sampling Oscillator Unlock Conditions: E Extender Board A11 Reference Assembly Description MHz VCXO MHz Outputs MHz Outputs Reference Unlock Detector MHz Calibrator Output MHz Outputs Interconnections to other assemblies Verifying the A11 Reference Board Reference Assembly Quick Check Reference Assembly Detailed Troubleshooting A9 Second LO/Fan Control Assembly Description Second LO Circuitry Fan Control Circuitry Verifying the A9 2nd LO/ Fan Control Board If the Fans Are Not Operating Troubleshooting the IF Section What You Will Find in This Chapter A10 Third Converter Assembly Description Step Attenuator System Variable Gain Compensation Circuitry Linearization Circuit MHz Calibrator ALC MHz Filter MHz Cal Signal Mixer rd Mixer Interconnections to other assemblies Verifying the A10 Third Converter Board E4440A, E4443A, E4445A, E4446A, E4448A) Third Converter Troubleshooting Verifying the A10 Third Converter Board (E4447A) Third Converter Troubleshooting A8 Analog IF Assembly Description

7 Contents Pre-filters Main Gain Amplifier MHz Anti-Alias Filter Mixer Fourth L.O Post Down Conversion Filtering Calibration Generator Clock Generator Triggering Power Supply Switching Reference Interconnections to other assemblies Verifying the A8 Analog IF Assembly Signal Path Analog IF Assembly Quick Check Analog IF Assembly Detailed Troubleshooting A7 Digital IF Assembly Descriptions MHz IF Gain Range Select/Rules Offset Adjust and Dither Interconnections to other assemblies Verifying the A7 Digital IF Board Digital IF Assembly Quick Check Digital IF Assembly Detailed Troubleshooting Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display What You Will Find in This Chapter A25 Motherboard Description A26 CPU Assembly Description Verifying the A26 CPU Assembly CPU Assembly Quick Check CPU Assembly Detailed Troubleshooting Battery Information A5 Power Supply Assembly Description Isolating an A5 Power Supply Problem Verifying the Individual Voltage Supplies A6 SCSI Interface Board Description Front Frame Description A1 LCD Display A3 Keyboard A2 Front Panel Interface Assembly A23 Disk Drive Isolating a Display Problem Verifying the Inverter Boards Verifying HSYNC, VSYNC, and LCD Clock Rear Panel Description Hardware Options What You Will Find in This Chapter Verifying Option 107 Audio Input

8 Contents Verification of Option Verifying Option Verification of Option Overview of Option 115 Extended Memory (all PSA Series) Verification of Option Verifying Option 122 or 140, Wide Bandwidth Digitizer Setting up the instrument in wideband mode: Setting up the instrument in narrow band mode: If the problem only exists in the wideband path: Viewing the wide band response to a comb signal (inner loop test): Viewing the wide band response to a comb signal (outer loop test): Wide Band Analog IF Assembly Filter Path Test Option 122 or 140 Lowband Filters Overview and Verification of Option 123, Microwave and Millimeter Preselector Bypass Overview of Option 123 in the E4440A, E4443A, or E4445A Overview of Option 123 in the E4446A, E4447A, or E4448A Verifying Option 124, Y-Axis Video Out Procedure 1 - Quick check of video out level Procedure 2 - Detailed view of the video signal Block Diagrams What You Will Find in This Chapter Signal Mnemonics Overall Block Diagrams Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations What You Will Find in This Chapter Replaceable Parts Hardware Assembly Replacement Procedures What You Will Find in This Chapter Before Starting Safety Tools you will need Adjustments after an instrument repair Major Assembly Locations Instrument Outer Case Removal Replacement Top Brace Removal Replacement Front Frame Drop the Front Frame

9 Contents Removal Replacement RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Complete RF Section RF Assemblies E4440A, E4443A, E4445A A18 YTO and A19 RYTHM A21 SLODA FL1 Low Pass Filter FL2 Band Pass Filter A20 Lowband RF Section Option Assemblies E4440A, E4443A, E4445A A22 Preamplifier A27 Electronic Attenuator Option 110 Assemblies (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) Option 123 Assemblies RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Complete RF Section RF Assemblies E4446A, E4447A, E4448A A18 YTO and A19 SBTX/RYTHM A21 FELOMA FL1 Low Pass Filter FL2 Band Pass Filter A20 Lowband (E4446A, E4448A) A20 Lowband (E4447A only) A29 SBTX Driver Board A30 FIFA RF Section Option Assemblies E4446A, E4447A, E4448A A22 Preamplifier A27 Electronic Attenuator Option 110 Assemblies E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Option 123 Assemblies E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Attenuator Assembly E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Removal Replacement Attenuator Assembly E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Removal Replacement A5 Power Supply

10 Contents Removal Replacement A39 USB/Memory Board Removal Replacement A6 SCSI Board Removal Replacement Vertical Board Assemblies (Standard Instrument) Removal A10 Third Converter Removal Procedure (E4447A only) Replacement Fans/Mid Web Fans Mid Web A23 Disk Drive Removal Replacement A25 Motherboard Removal Replacement A26 CPU Assembly Removal Replacement Battery Replacement A26A1 DRAM and A26A2 Flash Boards Removal Replacement Rear Frame Removal Replacement RF Input Connector Removal Replacement Front Frame Subassemblies Front Frame Exploded View A1 Display and Filter A2 Front Panel Interface Board Bezel and Keypad RPG External Trigger Cable Post-Repair Procedures What You Will Find in This Chapter Before Starting Test equipment you will need Post-Repair Procedures

11 Contents Burst Trigger Check Internal Front Panel Test V Rear Panel Output Check Configuring a Replacement CPU Assembly Description Procedure Configuring a Replacement Flash Memory Assembly Description Equipment Required Procedure Firmware Upgrades Firmware Upgrades Including Measurement Personality Upgrades

12 Contents 12

13 1 Overview 13

14 Overview What You Will Find in This Chapter What You Will Find in This Chapter This chapter provides overview information on your spectrum analyzer. The following sections are found in this chapter: PSA Overview...page 15 Hardware Option Descriptions...page 15 Before Troubleshooting a Failure...page 19 Service Equipment You Will Need...page 22 Contacting Agilent Technologies...page Chapter 1

15 Overview Agilent PSA Series Spectrum Analyzer Overview Agilent PSA Series Spectrum Analyzer Overview The Agilent PSA Series Performance Spectrum Analyzers measure and monitor complex RF and microwave signals. The analyzers integrate traditional spectrum measurements with advanced vector signal analysis, optimizing speed, accuracy, and dynamic range. The Agilent PSA Series spectrum analyzers are readily adaptable to meet changing measurement needs. Optional features enable the analyzer to be configured as a comprehensive analytical tool for communications systems and components. Refer to the Getting Started Guide for your analyzer for more information about options. Chapter 1 15

16 Overview Instrument Hardware Option Descriptions Instrument Hardware Option Descriptions The following list documents hardware options that are orderable on new instruments. Hardware upgrade option numbers for field installable retrofits kits may not be covered in this list. Option AYZ (E4440A, E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) Adds external mixing capability in the form of front panel LO Out and IF Input connectors. Option AYZ supports both preselected and unpreselected harmonic mixers. The front panel LO Out cable is connected to a spare port on the instrument s LO distribution amp. Other options that also require connections to the LO distribution amp will be incompatible with Option AYZ. Option BAB (E4440A) Replaces the front panel Type-N input connector with a 3.5 mm male connector. Option B7J (All PSA Series) Adds an electronic attenuator to the lowband path (< 3.05 GHz). Sometimes this option is referred to as the digital demod hardware since the attenuator is required for the optional digital communications applications. Option 1DS (All PSA Series) Adds a 100 khz to 3.05 GHz Preamp to the lowband path. Option 107 (All PSA Series) Audio Input (for use with Option 223, Measuring Receiver Personality only). Option 107 consists of an Audio board and a front panel BNC connector. The audio signal path is in addition to, and completely bypasses the normal RF/IF signal chain. The frequency range is 20 Hz to 250 khz. Usable amplitude range is 0.1 Vrms to 3 Vrms. The audio signal comes from the front panel BNC connector, goes to the Audio board where the signal is buffered, level shifted (ADC ranging circuit provided best signal to ADC), then run through an ADC followed by an FPGA that provides filtering and decimation to the ADC bits. The time domain FPGA bits are sent to the PSA CPU assembly via the PCI bus. Option 110 (All PSA Series) 10 MHz to 26.5 or 50 GHz preamplifier. Provides approximately 30 db of gain from 10 MHz to the upper frequency range of the analyzer. The preamplifier can be switched in or out of the signal path. Option 110 and Option 1DS cannot be installed together. Option 111 (All PSA Series) USB Device side I/O. Allows a link for controlling the instrument and extracting data from it through a standard SCPI programming interface. This feature does not provide USB host side support. It will not enable control of USB mass storage devices or printers. In its simplest form, it can be thought of as a faster 16 Chapter 1

17 Overview Instrument Hardware Option Descriptions version of GPIB. Requires USB/Memory board assembly. USB/Memory board contains both USB and extended memory circuitry although a license keyword is required for each option. Option 115 (All PSA Series) Extended Memory. Provides 512 MB of additional memory for optional measurement personality or user files such as state or trace files. Requires USB/Memory board assembly. USB/Memory board contains both USB and extended memory circuitry although a license keyword is required for each option. See Option 117 Secure Memory description for additional information. Option 117 (All PSA Series) Secure Memory Erase. Forces all user files such as trace, state and screen data to be stored only on the extended memory board. Prohibits the storage of instrument measurement personalities or any other non-user data. Two levels of security are provided. Provides a means to thoroughly erase only user data by erasing the contents of the extended memory board. This level of security allows the core analyzer and measurement personalities to remain intact so the analyzer will still function. The second level is an erase all routine that clears all instrument memory including memory on the CPU assembly resulting in a non-functional instrument. See Managing Security under the Systems section of the PSA User's Guide (Volume 1) and the firmware upgrade chapter in this manual for important information. Requires USB/Memory board assembly and license keyword for Option 117. Option 115 is incompatible with Option 117 since Option 115 also provides storage of measurement personalities to the extended memory board. Option 122 (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A, E4446A, E4448A) 80 MHz Bandwidth Digitizer. Provides 80 MHz wideband IF from 10 MHz to the upper frequency range of the analyzer. This option adds the A31 Wideband Analog IF and A32 Wideband Digital IF assemblies and associated filtering and cabling. Option 123 (All PSA Series) Switchable Microwave and Millimeter Wave Preselector Bypass. Provides a switchable signal path that bypasses both the microwave 3 to 26.5 GHz preselector in RHYTHM, and the 26.5 to 50 GHz preselector in the SBTX. The option adds a microwave mixer and switches. If this option is installed, Option AYZ external mixing cannot be installed due to limited LO ports. Chapter 1 17

18 Overview Instrument Hardware Option Descriptions Option 124 (All PSA Series) Adds a 0 to 1 V Video output on the rear panel. This video out has run through the normal IF paths and is envelope detected after it has been conditioned by the resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth reference level and scale settings. The video out is always active even when the instrument is in zero span and not being swept. Updating early instruments requires changing the A7 Digital IF assembly. Option 140 (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A, E4446A, E4448A) 40 MHz Bandwidth Digitizer. Provides 40 MHz wideband IF from 10 MHz to the upper frequency range of the analyzer. This option adds the A31 Wideband Analog IF and A32 Wideband Digital IF assemblies and associated filtering and cabling. 18 Chapter 1

19 Overview Before Troubleshooting a Failure Before Troubleshooting a Failure Before troubleshooting, complete the following three tasks: 1. Familiarize yourself with the safety symbols marked on the instrument and read the safety information provided on page 2 of this guide. 2. Read the ESD Information below. 3. Familiarize yourself with the troubleshooting information in the Overall Troubleshooting chapter, and how it relates to information on troubleshooting the RF, IF, Synthesizer, and Controller in this guide. ESD Information Protection from Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage or destroy electronic components. All work on electronic assemblies should be performed at a static-safe workstation. Figure 1-1 shows an example of a static-safe workstation using two types of ESD protection: Conductive table-mat and wrist-strap combination. Conductive floor-mat and heel-strap combination. Both types (when used together) provide a significant level of ESD protection. Only the table-mat and wrist-strap combination provide adequate ESD protection when used alone. To ensure user safety, the static-safe accessories must provide at least 1 MΩ of isolation from ground. Refer to Table 1-1 for information on ordering static-safe accessories. WARNING These techniques for a static-safe workstation should not be used when working on circuitry with a voltage potential greater than 500 volts. Chapter 1 19

20 Overview Before Troubleshooting a Failure Figure 1-1 Example of a Static-Safe Workstation Table 1-1 Agilent Part Number Static Safe Accessories Description Set includes: 3M static control mat 0.6 m 1.2 m (2 ft. 4 ft.) and 4.6 cm (15 ft.) ground wire. (The wrist-strap and wrist-strap cord are not included. They must be ordered separately.) Wrist-strap cord 1.5 m (5 ft.) Wrist-strap, color black, stainless steel, without cord, has four adjustable links and a 7 mm post-type connection ESD heel-strap (reusable 6 to 12 months) 20 Chapter 1

21 Overview Before Troubleshooting a Failure Handling Electronic Components and ESD The possibility of unseen damage caused by ESD is present whenever components are transported, stored, or used. The risk of ESD damage can be greatly reduced by close attention to how all components are handled. Refer to the following guidelines when handling components: Perform work on all components at a static-safe workstation. Keep static-generating materials at least one meter away from all components. Store or transport components in static-shielding containers. CAUTION Always handle printed circuit board assemblies by the edges. This will reduce the possibility of ESD damage to components and prevent contamination of exposed plating. Test Equipment Usage and ESD Before connecting any coaxial cable to an instrument connector for the first time each day, momentarily short the center and outer conductors of the cable together. Personnel should be grounded with a 1 MΩ resistor-isolated wrist-strap before touching the center pin of any connector and before removing any assembly from the instrument. Be sure that all instruments are properly earth-grounded to prevent build-up of static charge. Additional Information about ESD For more information about preventing ESD damage, contact the Electrical Over Stress/Electrostatic Discharge (EOS/ESD) Association, Inc. The ESD standards developed by this agency are sanctioned by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI). Chapter 1 21

22 Overview Service Equipment You Will Need Service Equipment You Will Need The service kit facilitates making measurements on various assemblies within the instrument. Refer to Table 1-3 for a list of recommended Agilent test equipment used for making measurements. Alternative equipment model numbers are given in case the recommended equipment is not available. NOTE If neither the recommended nor the alternative test equipment are available, you may use substitute equipment that meets or exceeds the critical specifications required to perform measurements. Service Kit Parts List Table 1-2 The service kit contains extender boards that enable access to measurement points that cannot otherwise be accessed when the instrument is operational. Agilent Service Kit (Agilent part number E ) Agilent Part Agilent Part Number Specifications Extender Boards A7 DIF Extender Board E A8 AIF, A9 2 nd LO Extender Board A10, A11, A12, A13 Extender Board E E A13J12 Bias Adjustment Board E Synthesizer Extender Board Guides (2 ea.) E Synthesizer Board Support (2 ea.) E Synthesizer Board Support (2 ea.) E Cables 20-Conductor Ribbon Cable (3 ea.) E Specific to preamp, electronic attenuator, FIFA. 10-Conductor Ribbon Cable E Specific to SLODA. 8-Conductor Ribbon Cable E Specific to YTO. 22 Chapter 1

23 Overview Service Equipment You Will Need Table 1-2 Agilent Service Kit (Agilent part number E ) Agilent Part Agilent Part Number Specifications 10-Conductor Ribbon Cable (3 ea.) E To extend front end driver board (Atten A, Atten B, YTO). 26-Conductor Ribbon Cable E To extend front end driver board (Lowband). 14-Conductor Ribbon Cable E To extend front end driver board (RYTHM). SMA Cable (Flexible) To extend 2 nd LO and Sampler LO semi-rigid cables when boards are on extender boards. SMB Gray Cable (2 ea.) To extend SMB cables. MMCX Cable To measure output jacks on the A12 synthesizer assembly. Miscellaneous Items SMA Barrel To extend semi-rigid cables SMB Barrel (2 ea.) To extend SMBs SMB Cable Puller Chapter 1 23

24 Overview Service Equipment You Will Need Required Test Equipment List The following table identifies the equipment recommended for troubleshooting, adjusting, and verifying the performance of the instrument. Only the recommended and alternate equipment is compatible with the performance verification testing. Some tests can use various models of a particular equipment type. The Recommended Agilent Model is the preferred equipment. However, the Alternative Agilent Model is an acceptable substitute. Table 1-3 Required Test Equipment for PSA Series Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Agilent Model Number Alternative Agilent Model Number Use a Signal Sources RF Source 1 (for Option B7J) Not required for Agilent Recommended test plan variant) Ability to create 64 tones across a 5 MHz span synchronously, 5 MHz to 10 MHz Resolution: 0.02 E4433B (Option UND) E4437B (Option UND FW datecode B.02.24) P RF Source 2 Frequency: 50 MHz to 1.0 GHz Harmonics: < -30 dbc +13 dbm Spectral Purity SSB Phase 1 GHz: 112 dbc at 100 Hz offset 121 dbc at 1 khz offset 131 dbc at 10 khz offset VSWR: < 1.5:1 E8257D b PSG cd 8663A A, P, T RF Source 3 Frequency: 100 khz to 3.0 GHz Spectral Purity: SSB Phase 1 GHz: 145 dbc at 100 khz offset 158 dbc at 1 MHz offset 160 dbc at 6 MHz offset 160 dbc at 10 MHz offset Harmonics: dbm output E8257D b PSG cd 8665A/B (Option 004) (for Freq Resp below 3.6 GHz test and Phase Noise > 30 khz test only) P 8665A/B (std) Microwave Source 1 (for E4440A, 43A, 45A) Frequency: 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz Frequency Resolution: 1 Hz Harmonic level: < -30 dbc Amplitude range: -20dBm to +13 Amplitude resolution: 0.02 VSWR: < 20 GHz: 1.6:1 31 GHz: 1.8:1 E8257D b 83630A/B 83640A/B 83650A/B (Option 001, 008) (One sweeper requires Option 001 for PSA Option 110 testing) A, P, T PSG cd 24 Chapter 1

25 Overview Service Equipment You Will Need Table 1-3 Required Test Equipment for PSA Series (Continued) Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Agilent Model Number Alternative Agilent Model Number Use a Microwave Source 1 (for E4446A, 47A, 48A) Frequency: 10 MHz to 50 GHz Frequency Resolution: 1 Hz Harmonic level: < -30 dbc Amplitude range: -20dBm to +13 Amplitude resolution: 0.02 VSWR: < 20 GHz: 1.6:1 40 GHz: 1.8:1 50 GHz: 2.0:1 E8257D b 83650A/B (Option 001, 008) PSG cd A, P, T Microwave Source 2 (only required for Third Order Intermodulation and Gain Compression) Frequency: 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz Frequency Resolution: 1 Hz Harmonic level: < -30 dbc Amplitude range: -20dBm to +13 Amplitude resolution: 0.02 VSWR: < 20 GHz: 1.6:1 31 GHz: 1.8:1 PSG c 83630A/B 83640A/B 83650A/B (Option 001, 008) (One sweeper requires Option 001 for PSA Option 110 testing) A, P, T Function Generator 1 Frequency: 10 Hz to 300 khz Amplitude Resolution: 0.1 mv Harmonic Distortion: -35 dbc 33250A 33120A 33120A (Option 001) A, P Audio Source 1 (for Option 107) THD: 20 Hz to 125 khz < -68 db Stanford Research DS360 Stanford Research Systems, Sunnyvale, CA P Counters Universal Counter Meters Frequency: 10 MHz Gate time: 10 to 100 seconds Must be capable of measuring signal at +7 dbm (0.5 Vrms) 53132A 53131A P, T Digital Multimeter AC Accuracy: ± 0.31% of reading 3458A A, T Power Meter Dual Channel Absolute Accuracy: ± 0.5% Resolution: 0.01 db Power Reference Accuracy: 1.2% (± 0.9% rss) Compatible with 8480 series power sensors db relative mode E4419B E4419A N1912A A, P Chapter 1 25

26 Overview Service Equipment You Will Need Table 1-3 Required Test Equipment for PSA Series (Continued) Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Agilent Model Number Alternative Agilent Model Number Use a RF Power Sensor (2 required) Frequency Range: 100 khz to 3 GHz Amplitude Range: 30 to +20 dbm Zero Set: ± 50nW Zero Drift: < ± 10 nw Measurement Noise: < 110 nw Cal Factor Uncertainty (std): < 1.6% VSWR 50 MHz: khz to 1 MHz: 1.20:1 1 MHz to 2 GHz: 1.10:1 2 GHz to 3 GHz: 1.30:1 Option H84 Cal Factor: Characterized by standards lab to: ± 0.6% e Input Connector: Type-N (m) 8482A (Option H84) 8482A STD (Will increase measurement uncertainty) A, P Power Sensor (for Option B7J) Frequency Range: 10 MHz to 3 GHz Amplitude Range: 30 to +20 dbm Zero Set: ± 50nW Zero Drift: < ± 10 nw Measurement Noise: < 110 nw Cal Factor Uncertainty (std): < 1.6% VSWR: 50 MHz: 1.10:1 50 MHz to 3 GHz: 1.18:1 Option H84 Cal Factor: Characterized by standards lab to: ± 0.6% e Input Connector: Type-N (m) 8481A (Option H84) 8481A, STD (Will increase measurement uncertainty) P Microwave Power Sensor (for E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) Millimeter Power Sensor (for E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) Frequency Range: 50 MHz to 26.5 GHz Amplitude Range: -30 to +20 db Zero Set: ± 50nW Zero Drift: < ± 10 nw Measurement Noise: < 110 nw Cal Factor Uncertainty (std): < 2.3% VSWR: 50 MHz to 100 MHz: 1.15:1 100 MHz to 2 GHz: 1.10:1 2 GHz to 12.4 GHz: 1.15: GHz to 18 GHz: 1.20:1 18 GHz to 26.5 GHz: 1.25:1 Input Connector: 3.5 mm (m) Frequency Range: 50 MHz to 50 GHz Amplitude Range: -30 to +20 dbm Zero Set: ± 50nW Zero Drift: < ± 10 nw Measurement Noise: < 110 nw Cal Factor Uncertainty (std): < 4.5% VSWR: 50 MHz to 100 MHz: 1.15:1 100 MHz to 2 GHz: 1.10:1 2 GHz to 12.4 GHz: 1.15: GHz to 18 GHz: 1.20:1 18 GHz to 26.5 GHz: 1.25: GHz to 40 GHz: 1.30:1 40 GHz to 50 GHz: 1.50:1 Input Connector: 2.4 mm coaxial (m) 8485A 8487A A, P 8487A A, P 26 Chapter 1

27 Overview Service Equipment You Will Need Table 1-3 Required Test Equipment for PSA Series (Continued) Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Agilent Model Number Alternative Agilent Model Number Use a High Sensitivity Microwave Power Sensor (for Option 110 on E4440A, 43A, 45A) High Sensitivity Microwave Power Sensor (for Option 110 on E4446A, 47A, 48A) Frequency Range: 50 MHz to 26.5 GHz Amplitude Range: -70 to -20 db Zero Set: ± 20 pw Zero Drift: < ± 4 pw Measurement Noise: < 4 pw Cal Factor Uncertainty (std): < 2.6% VSWR: 50 MHz to 100 MHz: 1.19:1 100 MHz to 4 GHz: 1.15:1 4 GHz to 12 GHz: 1.19:1 12 GHz to 18 GHz: 1.25:1 18 GHz to 26.5 GHz: 1.29:1 Input Connector: 3.5 mm (m) Frequency Range: 50 MHz to 50 GHz Amplitude Range: -70 to -20 db Zero Set: ± 20 pw Zero Drift: < ± 4 pw Measurement Noise: < 4 pw Cal Factor Uncertainty (std): < 4.5% VSWR: 50 MHz to 100 MHz: 1.19:1 100 MHz to 4 GHz: 1.15:1 4 GHz to 12.4 GHz: 1.20: GHz to 18 GHz: 1.29:1 18 GHz to 34 GHz: 1.37:1 34 GHz to 40 GHz: 1.61:1 40 GHz to 50 GHz: 1.89:1 Input Connector: 2.4 mm (m) 8485D 8487D A, P 8487D A, P Standards Frequency Standard Frequency: 10 MHz Accuracy: < ±1 e10-10 Symmetricom 5071A Agilent 5061B, 5071A A, P 50 MHz, -25 dbm Calibrator Frequency Drift: < 2.5 khz Typical VSWR: 1.06:1 Output Power Variation: ±.004 db Total Harmonic Content: -45 dbc Z5602A Opt H51 for Type N Opt H35 for BAB Opt H24 for E4446A, E4448A A Attenuators 10 db Step Attenuator 1dB Step Attenuator Range: 0 to 110 db Accuracy: Characterized by standards lab to: ± /10 db step f Calibrated at 50 MHz VSWR: at 50 MHz: 1.05:1 Range: 0 to 11 db Accuracy: Characterized by standards lab to: ±0.005 db f Calibrated at 50 MHz VSWR: at 50 MHz: 1.05:1 8496G 8496H P 8494G 8494H P Attenuator Interconnect Kit Type N connector kit to connect 8496G to 8494G 11716A P Chapter 1 27

28 Overview Service Equipment You Will Need Table 1-3 Required Test Equipment for PSA Series (Continued) Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Agilent Model Number Alternative Agilent Model Number Use a Attenuator Driver Compatible with the 8496G and 8494G step attenuators B 11713A P 3dB Fixed Attenuator 3 db Type-N (m, f) Frequency: 50 MHz VSWR: at 50 MHz: 1.05:1 8491A (Option 003) 8491B/C (Option 003) P 6dB Fixed Attenuator 6 db Type-N (m, f) VSWR: at 50 MHz: 1.05:1 8491A (Option 006) 8491B/C (Option 006) P 10 db Fixed Attenuator 10 db Type N (m, f) Frequency: 50 MHz VSWR: at 50 MHz: 1.05:1 8491A (Option 010) 8491B/C (Option 010) P 10 db Fixed Attenuator 10 db 3.5 mm (m, f) VSWR: MHz to 19.5 GHz: 1.1:1 8493C (Option 010) A, P 20 db Fixed Attenuator 20 db Type-N (m, f) Accuracy: ± 0.5 db VSWR: 100 khz to 3 GHz: 1.20:1 8491A (Option 020) 8491B/C (Option 020) A 20 db Fixed Attenuator 20 db 3.5 mm (m, f) Accuracy: ± 0.5 db VSWR: DC to 7.1 GHz: 1.20:1 8493C (Option 020) A, P 30 db Fixed Attenuator 30 db Accuracy: ± 0.05 db VSWR: 50 MHz (for use with Low Power Sensors) 11708A A, P Terminations Type-N (m) 50 Ω Frequency: 10 khz to 18 GHz VSWR: 4 GHz: 1.05:1 909A (Option 012) P, T 3.5 mm (f) 50 Ω VSWR: 26.5 GHz: 1.12:1 909D P 2.4 mm (f) (for E4446A, 47A, 48A) 50 Ω Frequency: 10 khz to 50 GHz 85138B P BNC (m) Miscellaneous Devices 50 Ω Frequency: 10 khz to 50 GHz P RF Power Splitter Frequency: 9 khz to 3 GHz VSWR: 1.10:1 Connector: Type-N (f) 11667A P Microwave Power Splitter (for E4440A, 43A, 45A) Frequency: 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz VSWR: 10 MHz to 3 GHz: < 1.06:1 3 GHz to 26.5 GHz: < 1.22:1 Tracking Error: < ± 0.25 db Connector: 3.5 mm (f) 11667B (Option H30) 11667B (std.) P 28 Chapter 1

29 Overview Service Equipment You Will Need Table 1-3 Required Test Equipment for PSA Series (Continued) Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Agilent Model Number Alternative Agilent Model Number Use a Millimeter Power Splitter (for E4446A, 47A, 48A) Frequency: 10 MHz to 50 GHz VSWR: 10 MHz to 18 GHz: < 1.29:1 18 GHz to 26.5 GHz: < 1.20: to 40 GHz: < 1.50:1 40 GHz to 50 GHz: < 1.65:1 Tracking Error: < ± 0.40 db Connector: 2.4 mm (f) 11667C P Directional Bridge Frequency Range: 5 MHz to 3 GHz Directivity: 5 MHz: 30 db 5 MHz to 2 GHz:40 db 2 GHz to 3 GHz: 30 db VSWR: 2 GHz: 1.15:1 3 GHz: 1.22:1 Insertion Loss: 1.5, +0.1 db/ghz Coupling (nominal): 16 db Connector: Type N (f) 86205A P Directional Coupler 2 GHz to 20 GHz Directivity > 16 db Transmission arm loss: < 1.5 db (nominal) Coupled Arm Loss: ~10 db (nominal) VSWR: 1.35:1 Connector: SMA (f) 87300B P DC Probe 11002A 11003A A High Frequency Probe Frequency Range: 300 khz to 3 GHz Input Resistance: 1 M Ω (nominal) 85024A T Negative Detector 50 MHz to 26.5 GHz ± 0.6 db to 18 GHz 33330C A Bias Adjustment Board E A Cables 3.5 mm (m) to 3.5 mm (m) (2 required) 2.4 mm (f) to 2.4 mm (m) (for E4446A, 47A, 48A) Frequency: DC to 26.5 GHz Length: 92 cm (36 in) Insertion Loss: ~2 db VSWR: DC to 18 GHz: 1.25:1 18 GHz to 26.5 GHz: 1.35:1 Frequency: DC to 50 GHz Length: 24.9 cm (9.8 in) Insertion Loss: 26 GHz, ~4 db Insertion Loss: 40 GHz, ~5 db Insertion Loss: 50 GHz, ~6 db VSWR: 26.5 GHz: 1.30:1 40 GHz: 1.40:1 50 GHz: 1.55: A, P A, P Type-N (2 required) Frequency: 10 MHz to 8 GHz Precision Type-N (m), both ends 62 cm (24 in.) VSWR: 18 GHz: 1.4:1 Insertion Loss: 1.5 db 11500C A, P, T Chapter 1 29

30 Overview Service Equipment You Will Need Table 1-3 Required Test Equipment for PSA Series (Continued) Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Agilent Model Number Alternative Agilent Model Number Use a BNC (3 required) Frequency: DC to 10 MHz 50 Ω Coax BNC (m), both ends 120 cm (48 in.) 10503A A, P, T Filters 50 MHz Low Pass Cutoff Frequency: 50 MHz Rejection at 65 MHz: > 40 db Rejection at 75 MHz: > 60 db Insertion Loss: ~1 db VSWR: 1.5:1 BNC (m) to BNC (f) Telonic Berkeley TLA 50-5AB2 P, T 300 MHz Low Pass (2 Required) Cutoff Frequency: 300 MHz Rejection at > 435 MHz: > 45 db VSWR: 1.5:1 BNC (m, f) Telonic Berkeley TLP 300-4AB4 P 1.8 GHz Low Pass (2 Required) Cutoff frequency: 1.8 GHz Rejection at > 3 GHz: > 45 db Insertion Loss: ~0.25 db VSWR: 1.35:1 SMA (f) RLC Electronics L-1636 P 4.4 GHz Low Pass (2 Required) Cutoff frequency: 4.4 GHz Rejection at > 5.5 GHz: > 42 db K + L Microwave ML / XU-N/NP P 1 GHz Low Pass Center frequency: 1 GHz Rejection at 2 GHz: > 60 db GHz Notch Center frequency: 1 GHz BW: 6 MHz Rejection at 13 MHz from CF: > 50 db 1 GHz Band Pass Center frequency: 1 GHz BW: 6 MHz Rejection at 13 MHz from CF: > 50 db Adapters RLC Electronics L-1621 Trilithic CFN K & L Microwave 4C /X6-0/0 P P P Type-N (f) to Type-N (f) Type-N (m) to Type-N (m) Type-N (f) to BNC (m) Type-N (m) to BNC (m) Type-N (m) to 3.5 mm (m) Type-N (m) to BNC (f) Frequency: DC to 18 GHz VSWR: 1.13:1 Frequency: DC to 18 GHz VSWR: 1.13:1 Frequency: DC to 1.3 GHz VSWR: 1.13:1 Frequency: DC to 1.3 GHz VSWR: 1.13:1 Frequency: DC to 18 GHz VSWR: 1.08:1 Frequency: DC to 1.3 GHz VSWR: 1.13: P P P, T P, T P P 30 Chapter 1

31 Overview Service Equipment You Will Need Table 1-3 Required Test Equipment for PSA Series (Continued) Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Agilent Model Number Alternative Agilent Model Number Use a 3.5 mm (f) to 3.5 mm (f) (2 Required) 3.5 mm (m) to 3.5 mm (m) (2 Required) Frequency: DC to 26.5 GHz VSWR: 1.05:1 Frequency: DC to 26.5 GHz VSWR: 1.12: B P P 3.5 mm (f) to 3.5 mm (f) Frequency: DC to 34 GHz VSWR: 1.15: P 2.4 mm (f) to 3.5 mm (m) (for E4446A, 47A, 48A) Frequency: DC to 26.5 GHz VSWR: 1.05: D A, P 3.5 mm (f) to Type-N (f) Frequency: DC to 18 GHz VSWR: 1.08: A, P 3.5 mm (f) to 2.4 mm (f) (for E4446A, 47A, 48A) Frequency: DC to 26.5 GHz VSWR: 1.05: B P BNC (m) to SMA(f) Type-N (m) to 3.5 mm (f) (2 Required, Opt. BAB 3 Required) Frequency: DC to 1.3 GHz VSWR: 1.13:1 Frequency: DC to 18 GHz VSWR: 1.08: P P Type-N (f) to 2.4 mm (f) Frequency: DC to 18 GHz VSWR: 1.08: B A, P Type-N (m) to 2.4 mm (f) (for E4446A, 47A, 48A) Frequency: DC to 18 GHz VSWR: 1.08: D P Type-N (f) to 3.5 mm (m) Frequency: DC to 18 GHz VSWR: 1.14: A, P BNC Tee (BNC f,m,f) A, P SMB (f) to BNC (f) Frequency: DC to 1.3 GHz A, P BNC (f) to SMA (m) Frequency: DC to 1.3 GHz A, P BNC (f) to Dual Banana A, P 3.5 mm (f) to Type-N (m) Shipped with the 8485 for adapting to the Power Reference. Only to be used for power sensor calibration. 2.4 mm (f) to Type-N (m) Shipped with the 8487 for adapting to the Power Reference. Only to be used for power sensor calibration A, P A, P Optional Equipment 10 MHz Distribution Amplifier (only needed when using the 10 MHz Distribution Amplifier setup) Symmetricom 5087B Agilent 5087A A, P a. A = Adjustments, P = Performance Testing, T = Troubleshooting) Chapter 1 31

32 Overview Service Equipment You Will Need b. Note: One PSG with Option 567, 1EA, 1E1, 007, and UNX or UNR can be used as the Microwave Source #1, RF Source #2, and RF Source #3. (Option 007, Analog Ramp Sweep, required for Frequency Response Adjustments) c. Supported PSG models: E8244A E8254A E8257C Option H31 or 540 E8257D E8267C Option H31 or 544 E8267D (One sweeper requires Option 1E1 for PSA Option 110 testing) d. PSG requires Option UNX or UNR. e. The 8482A power sensor uses cal factors to compensate the power sensor for frequency response errors. Cal factors are stated in percentages. The 8482A factory cal factor uncertainty ranges from 2.2% to 3.1%. The cal factor uncertainty can be reduced to < 2.0% by using metrology grade calibration techniques. The power sensor cal factor uncertainty becomes one component of the Verification Test uncertainty analysis. Lower cal factor uncertainties will translate to wider test margins. f. The step attenuators should be permanently joined via the 11716A Interconnect Kit as shown in the diagram. Step Attenuator Loss Characterization The step attenuator combination should have each attenuator setting characterized by a metrology lab at 50 MHz. The following tables show which sections of the 10 db and 1 db step attenuators are utilized for each attenuator setting. The tables also list the Allowable Uncertainty for each attenuator setting. The interconnect cable should NEVER be disconnected once the loss characterization is performed. 32 Chapter 1

33 Overview Service Equipment You Will Need 1 db Step Attenuator Nominal Attenuation (db) #1 (1 db) Attenuator Section #2 (2 db) #3 (4 db) #4 (4 db) Maximum Uncertainty (db) 0 Off Off Off Off 0 (Reference) 1 On Off Off Off < Off On Off Off < On On Off Off < Off Off On Off < On Off On Off < Off On On Off < On On On Off < Off Off On On < On Off On On < Off On On On < On On On On < db Step Attenuator Nominal Attenuation (db) #1 (10 db) Attenuator Section #2 (20 db) #3 (40 db) #4 (40 db) Maximum Uncertainty (db) 0 Off Off Off Off 0 (Reference) 10 On Off Off Off < Off On Off Off < On On Off Off < Off Off On Off < On Off On Off < Off On On Off < On On On Off < Off Off On On < On Off On On < Off On On On < On On On On < Chapter 1 33

34 Overview Replacement Assemblies Replacement Assemblies The instrument assemblies are not repairable to the component level. Refer to Chapter 11 to determine how to disassemble and assemble the instrument. The following assemblies must be replaced as an assembly. A1 flat panel display A2 front panel interface assembly (includes inverter boards) A3 keyboard (does not include keypads) A5 power supply assembly A6 SCSI board A7 digital IF assembly A8 analog IF assembly A9 2nd LO/fan control assembly A10 3rd converter assembly A11 reference assembly A12 Synthesizer assembly A12A1 LO/synthesizer board A12A2 sampling oscillator board A13 Front end driver assembly A14 Input attenuator A/switch A15 Input attenuator B A18 YTO A19 RYTHM (models up to 26.5 GHz) A19 SBTX/RYTHM (43 to 50 GHz models) A20 Low band assembly A21 SLODA (models up to 26.5 GHz) A21 FELOMA (43 to 50 GHz models) A22 Preamplifier (option 1DS) A23 disk drive assembly A25 motherboard A26 CPU (processor) assembly (does not include A26A1 or A26A2) A26A1 DRAM card A26A2 Flash memory board 34 Chapter 1

35 Overview Replacement Assemblies A27 Electronic Attenuator (option B7J) A29 SBTX/FELOMA Driver Board (43 to 50 GHz models) A30 FIFA (43 to 50 GHz models) A31 Wideband Analog IF assembly (Option 122 or 140) A32 Wideband Digital IF assembly (Option 122 or 140) A33 70 MHz Output assembly (Option H70) A34 Unpreselected Mixer (Option 123) A35 Unpreselected Mixer Bias Board A36 Microwave or Millimeter Wave Preamplifier A37 Audio Digitizer Assembly A38 Option Driver Assembly A39 USB/Memory Board NOTE Procedures for replacing assemblies are located in Chapter 11, Assembly Replacement Procedures, on page 305. Chapter 1 35

36 Overview Replacement Assemblies Battery Information The analyzer uses a Lithium Polycarbon Monofloride battery to power the instrument clock. The battery is located on the CPU board. For more information, go to Battery Information on page 152. After an Instrument Repair If any instrument assemblies have been repaired or replaced, perform the related adjustments and performance verification tests. The adjustments and tests are done using the PSA Series Performance Verification and Adjustment Software. Refer to Chapter Chapter 1

37 Overview Contacting Agilent Technologies Contacting Agilent Technologies If you have a problem with your instrument, see Check the Basics on page 45. This section contains a checklist that will help identify some of the most common problems. If further troubleshooting is necessary, continue with the troubleshooting steps earlier in this chapter, or return the instrument to Agilent Technologies. There is also support on the world-wide web. The address is: FAQs, firmware upgrades, documentation, and other support information can be accessed from this site. To obtain servicing information or to order replacement parts, contact the nearest Agilent office listed in Table 1-4. In any correspondence or telephone conversations, refer to the instrument by its model number and full serial number. With this information, the Agilent representative can quickly determine whether your unit is still within its warranty period. By internet, phone, or fax, get assistance with all your test and measurement needs. Chapter 1 37

38 Overview Contacting Agilent Technologies Table 1-4 Contacting Agilent Online assistance: United States (tel) Japan (tel) (+81) (fax) (+81) New Zealand (tel) (fax) (+64) Europe (tel) (+31) (fax) (+31) Canada (tel) (fax) (905) Latin America (tel) (305) (fax) (305) Australia (tel) (fax) (+61) Asia Call Center Numbers Country Phone Number Fax Number Singapore (65) Malaysia Philippines (632) (PLDT Subscriber Only) (632) (PLDT Subscriber Only) Thailand (088) (outside Bangkok) (662) (within Bangkok) (66) Hong Kong (852) Taiwan (886) People s Republic of China (preferred) India Chapter 1

39 Overview Contacting Agilent Technologies Instrument Serial Numbers Agilent makes frequent improvements to its products enhancing performance, usability, or reliability. Agilent service personnel have access to complete records of design changes to each type of instrument, based on the instrument s serial number and option designation. Whenever you contact Agilent about your instrument, have the complete serial number available. This will ensure that you obtain accurate service information. A serial number label is attached to the rear of the instrument. This label has two instrument identification entries: the first provides the identification number for each option built into the instrument and the second provides the instrument s serial number. The serial number has two parts: the prefix (two letters and the first four numbers), and the suffix (the last four numbers). Refer to Figure 1-2. Figure 1-2 Example Serial Number The first two letters of the prefix identify the country in which the unit was manufactured. The remaining four numbers of the prefix identify the date of the last major design change incorporated in your instrument. The four digit suffix is a sequential number and, coupled with the prefix, provides a unique identification for each unit produced. Whenever you list the serial number or refer to it in obtaining information about your instrument, be sure to use the complete number, including the full prefix and the suffix. Chapter 1 39

40 Overview Contacting Agilent Technologies How to Return Your Instrument for Service Service Tag If you are returning the instrument to Agilent for servicing, fill in and attach a blue service tag. Several service tags are supplied in this manual. Please be as specific as possible about the nature of the problem. If you have recorded any error messages that appeared on the screen, or have completed a Performance Test Record, or have any other specific data on the performance of the instrument, please send a copy of this information with the unit. Original Packaging Before shipping, pack the unit in the original factory packaging materials if they are available. If the original materials were not retained, see Other Packaging on page 41. NOTE Install the transportation disk into the floppy drive to reduce the possibility of damage during shipping. If the original transportation disk is not available, a blank floppy may be substituted. 40 Chapter 1

41 Overview Contacting Agilent Technologies Other Packaging CAUTION Instrument damage can result from using packaging materials other than those specified. Never use styrene pellets in any shape as packaging materials. They do not adequately cushion the equipment or prevent it from shifting in the carton. They cause equipment damage by generating static electricity and by lodging in the instrument louvers, blocking airflow. You can repackage the instrument with commercially available materials, as follows: 1. Attach a completed service tag to the instrument. 2. Install the transportation disk or a blank floppy disk into the disk drive. This will protect the disk drive during shipping. 3. Protect the control panel with cardboard. 4. Wrap the instrument in antistatic plastic to reduce the possibility of damage caused by electrostatic discharge. 5. Use a strong shipping container. A double-walled, corrugated cardboard carton with 159 kg (350 lb) bursting strength is adequate. The carton must be both large enough and strong enough to accommodate the instrument. Allow at least 3 to 4 inches on all sides of the instrument for packing material. 6. Surround the equipment with three to four inches of packing material and prevent the equipment from moving in the carton. If packing foam is not available, the best alternative is S.D.-240 Air Cap from Sealed Air Corporation, Hayward, California, Air Cap looks like a plastic sheet filled with 1-1/4 inch air bubbles. Use the pink-colored Air Cap to reduce static electricity. Wrapping the equipment several times in this material should both protect the equipment and prevent it from moving in the carton. 7. Seal the shipping container securely with strong nylon adhesive tape. 8. Mark the shipping container FRAGILE, HANDLE WITH CARE to assure careful handling. 9. Retain copies of all shipping papers. Chapter 1 41

42 Overview Contacting Agilent Technologies 42 Chapter 1

43 2 Overall Troubleshooting 43

44 Overall Troubleshooting What You Will Find in This Chapter What You Will Find in This Chapter This chapter provides information that is useful when starting to troubleshoot a spectrum analyzer. It includes procedures for troubleshooting common failures and provides information on isolating problems in the analyzer. The following sections are found in this chapter: Initial Troubleshooting Checks...page 45 Troubleshooting Power-Up Problems...page 46 Troubleshooting Using Auto-Align Tests...page 49 Troubleshooting Using Front Panel Keys...page Chapter 2

45 Overall Troubleshooting Check the Basics Check the Basics Before calling Agilent Technologies or returning the instrument for service, please make the following checks: 1. Is there power at the power outlet? At the power receptacle on the instrument? 2. Is the instrument turned on? Check to see if the front panel LED is green, which indicates the power supply is on. 3. If other equipment, cables, and connectors are being used with the instrument, make sure they are connected properly. 4. Review the procedure for the measurement being performed when the problem appeared. Are all the settings correct? 5. If the instrument is not functioning as expected, return the unit to a known state by pressing the Preset key. 6. Is the measurement being performed, and the results that are expected, within the specifications and capabilities of the instrument? Refer to the specifications book for specifications. 7. In order to meet specifications, the instrument must be aligned. Press System, Alignments, Align All Now. The diagnostic tests should all pass. If the instrument displays a failure during these tests, refer to Troubleshooting Using Auto-Align Tests on page Check to see if the instrument has the latest firmware before starting the troubleshooting procedure. Press System, More, Show System. The firmware revision is listed under Firmware Rev. For more information, refer to Firmware Upgrades on page Is the instrument displaying an error message? If so, refer to the Instrument Messages and Functional Tests guide for more information. 10.If the necessary test equipment is available, perform the functional checks in the Instrument Messages and Functional Tests guide for your instrument. 11.Use Table 2-1 on page 46 to identify the instrument s symptoms and the specific section (in this guide) which explains troubleshooting procedures for the associated symptoms. Chapter 2 45

46 Overall Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Power-up Problems Troubleshooting Power-up Problems CAUTION If the instrument shows any of the following symptoms, immediately unplug the instrument from the ac power line: Smoke or unusual noise from inside the unit. A circuit breaker or fuse on the main ac power line opens. These potentially serious faults must be corrected before proceeding. Refer to Troubleshooting Power-up Problems on page 46. NOTE Table 2-1 Symptom Power-up problems include an instrument failing to boot, an instrument that completes the boot process but displays error messages, or an instrument that appears to be inoperative (dead). When powered up the instrument performs a boot process and CPU self-diagnostics, followed by a routine of internal auto-alignments. These tests evaluate the instrument operation; if a problem is detected an error message will be displayed, or the rear panel LEDs will indicate a problem. Initial Symptoms Troubleshooting Section No front or rear panel LEDs "Troubleshooting Power-up Problems" on page 46 Blank display screen "Troubleshooting Power-up Problems" on page 46 Fans not operating "Troubleshooting Power-up Problems" on page 46 Instrument did not boot "Troubleshooting Power-up Problems" on page 46 Power-on auto-align tests failed "Troubleshooting Using Auto-Align Tests" on page 49 No response when keypad is pressed "Troubleshooting Power-up Problems" on page 46 Error Messages Low signal level Instrument Messages and Functional Tests guide RF Assembly Quick Check - E4440A, E4443A, E4445A on page 75 For E4446A and E4448A see page Chapter 2

47 Overall Troubleshooting Troubleshooting an Inoperative Instrument Troubleshooting an Inoperative Instrument When the instrument appears to be dead (no display and no fans), there is often little evidence that points directly to the cause. This section provides steps and solutions to typical failure modes relating to an inoperative instrument. Check the Instrument Setup Before troubleshooting the instrument, ensure that it has been set up correctly. Perform the steps in "Check the Basics" on page 45. Initial Checks Perform the following initial checks when first troubleshooting an inoperative instrument. 1. Check the instrument display and fans. a. If the display is dark and the fans are not running, suspect a power supply or CPU problem. Refer to Chapter 7, Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display, on page 145. b. If the display is dark but the fans are running, suspect either a display problem, or a problem with the CPU boot sequence. Refer to "Isolating a Display Problem" on page 160. c. If the display looks good but the fans are not running, refer to "If the Fans Are Not Operating" on page If the instrument appears to abort the boot process, experiences a failure during the self-diagnostic tests, or there is no response when a front panel key is pressed, refer to "Troubleshooting Power-up Problems" on page Instrument powers on but does not boot: a. Refer to "Verifying the A26 CPU Assembly" on page 149. Chapter 2 47

48 Overall Troubleshooting Troubleshooting an Inoperative Instrument 4. Instrument appears to abort the boot process or experiences a failure during the self-diagnostic tests: a. Check for error messages. Monitor the CPU diagnostic LED s visible on the CPU rear panel. The LED s should go through the following sequence: At power on, all four LED s turn on for a second. The left most LED turns off leaving the other three LED s on for approximately 15 seconds. The three LED s go off and the left LED turns on. The LED s go through a flashing sequence. All four turn on for approximately 10 seconds. All CPU diagnostic LED s turn off after the boot-up is complete. 5. Check for other error messages by pressing System, Show Errors. NOTE For additional information on error messages, refer to the Instrument Messages and Functional Tests manual. 48 Chapter 2

49 Overall Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Auto-Align Tests Troubleshooting Using Auto-Align Tests A sequence of alignments occur automatically when the analyzer is powered on. A pop-up box will appear on the display indicating which alignment is being performed. In the table below, you will find a description of each auto-alignment. NOTE Table 2-2 Procedure Name Align 2 nd LO The auto-alignment process can be aborted at any time by pressing the ESCAPE key. Sequence for Auto-Align Procedures Procedure Description Locks the phase lock loop that maintains the 2 nd LO, 3.6 GHz oscillator on the A9 2 nd LO assembly. This allows the 2 nd LO to phase lock to the 600 MHz reference oscillator on the A11 Reference assembly, improving the system phase noise. Must drive the ADC reading on the 2 nd LO to counts. This corresponds to an error voltage of 0.5 to 0.6 volts. Align LO This alignment adjusts the Pretune Dac to minimize loop voltage error, and calculates the optimal Pretune DAC slope and intercept values. The values are then stored in calibration files. Must be able to minimize loop error voltage at two different frequencies with a DAC setting between 10 and Align 2 nd LO Pwr Rough Cal Gains Trigger Interpolator ADC Offset DAC s ADC Dither CF ADC RAM Gains IF Image Filter Finds the DAC setting that gives an ADC reading that is equal to the ADC value written during the manufacturing process. This alignment does a rough/preliminary setup of AIF main gain and RF gain to allow other alignments to function before the completion of Align AIF Main Gain and Align RF Gain. An absolute gain level is set. The trigger interpolator provides a way to measure trigger timing to a fine precision. A unique trigger is used, which has timing that can be varied relative to the sample clock using an 8-bit control DAC on the A8 Analog IF. If it is not monotonic, or the expected variation is not verified, this alignment will FAIL. The A7 Digital IF assembly could be faulty also since it receives trigger inputs. Offset DAC s for each of the 4 ADC range positions on the A7 Digital IF assembly are aligned to reduce the overall DC offset. The ADC dither needs to be centered to prevent its own harmonics from folding back into the center of the IF passband. This routine adjusts the dither DAC on the A7 Digital IF. Each of the 4 ADC range positions has its own page of RAM memory. This is a mapping of ADC bits to output Data bits. This RAM memory is on the A7 Digital IF assembly. This alignment uses the 50 MHz CW calibrator signal to measure the relative response of each range page. The RF input attenuator and analog IF main gain DAC are dynamically adjusted to help keep the actual ADC signal level approximately the same. The 321 MHz calibrator oscillator is used to align the 5 DAC s of the image filter on the A10 3rd Converter assembly. Chapter 2 49

50 Overall Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Auto-Align Tests Table 2-2 Procedure Name IF Gain Curve Sequence for Auto-Align Procedures Procedure Description The A8 Analog IF assembly has a gain control DAC that is called the Main Gain. It is used to compensate for analog IF Prefilter BW gain variations, so that the gain of the entire IF path (before ADC) remains approximately constant. It is the only gain stage that gets varied during normal instrument operation. This alignment generates the curve coefficients which characterize the gain vs. DAC number shape associated with this stage. 321 MHz Ampl Curve The 321 MHz cal osc signal is used for many internal alignments. This alignment merely calibrates the amplitude control DAC for this signal, which is used by the other alignments when necessary to set accurate amplitude levels. Comb Teeth LC Prefilter Wide LC Prefilter Narrow XTAL Prefilter Wide XTAL Prefilter Narrow ADC Autorange AIF Main Gain Atten Steps The relative amplitude of each of the 20 individual comb teeth is determined by comparison to the 50 MHz amplitude reference. The LO is moved to position the 50 MHz signal to the same frequency in the IF path as the comb tooth. This alignment is run for wide LC bandwidths (BW > 1.2 MHz). The 321 MHz Comb calibrator oscillator is used to align BW and CF for the analog IF LC path. Coefficients are generated for a curve that maps BW-DAC to requested BW. Another curve is generated which represents Gain vs. BW. Both of these curves are then used during Prefilter and IF gain setup during a measurement. The prefilter is located on the A8 Analog IF assembly. This alignment is run for narrow LC bandwidths (BW 1.2 MHz). See description for LC Prefilter Wide. This alignment is run for wide XTAL bandwidths (BW> 20 khz). The 321 MHz Comb calibrator oscillator is used to align BW, SYM, and CF for the analog IF XTAL path. Coefficients are generated for a curve that maps BW-DAC to requested BW. Another curve is generated which represents Gain vs. BW. Both of these curves are then used during Prefilter and IF gain setup during a measurement. The prefilter is located on the A8 Analog IF assembly. This alignment is run for narrow XTAL bandwidths (BW 20 khz). See description for XTAL Prefilter Wide. The ADC autoranging subsystem has several hardware components that need to be setup. This alignment takes care of 3 DACs: 2 DACs on the A7 Digital IF assembly that set the positive and negative thresholds for range switches; and 1 DAC on the A8 Analog IF assembly that sets the GAIN of the autoranging detector signal. It also generates 4 gain values to be used for 4 possible measurement setups. The 4 setups cover the on/off positions of dither and analog IF post-filter. This is necessary since these positions produce different relative signal levels between the main path and the autorange path. This alignment derives rough values for the AIF Main Gain DAC to be used for each RF band. The front end is not measured, only the IF path. Constants set in cal files specify the amount of AIF gain desired for each band (e.g. 3 db in band 0, 1 db in band 1). The isolated gain of just the AIF is measured by using a detector at the AIF input to establish approximately -7 dbm input, and then measuring the power entering the digital IF with standard ADC scaling processes. The AIF gain dac is adjusted up or down until the band 0 desired gain is achieved. The AIF gain dac for all other bands is predicted (not measured) by using the band 0 value, the relative gain between bands, and the AIF gain curve (gain vs. dac) which was established by another alignment (IF GAIN CURVE). If Option B7J is present, this alignment switches DIF dither on and off, and performs calculation for electronic attenuator usage. The routine uses the MHz Cal oscillator. Align errors of the mechanical attenuator pads at 50 MHz. If Option B7J is present, this alignment switches through the 41 electronic attenuator steps. Performs check of relative attenuator switching. When testing mechanical attenuators, this checks only the 0 db, 10 db AC Coupled, 10 db DC Coupled, 12, 14, 16, 20, 30, and 40 db steps. If the error is > 1 db the test fails. 50 Chapter 2

51 Overall Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Auto-Align Tests Table 2-2 Procedure Name Align RF Gain Sequence for Auto-Align Procedures Procedure Description This alignment derives values for the RF Gain DAC to be used at a center frequency tuning of 50 MHz, for various system signal path setups. The RF Gain DAC in general is adjusted relative to these reference DAC values during sweeps to perform RF flatness compensation; however, at 50 MHz center frequency, the RF Gain DAC should always be exactly one of the values generated by this routine. The various system signal path setups include, but are not limited to: nominal reference path, ditheroff, and optional hardware paths (1DS and B7J) tested as part of the optional path RF Gain routine. Each path has a CAL FILE specified system gain that must be achieved (e.g. 9.8 db nominally, 12.8 db with ditheroff, etc.). Each path is measured using the 50 MHz AREF signal (at -25 dbm) iteratively as the RF gain DAC is adjusted up or down, until the digital IF readings indicate the correct gain has been achieved. Residual errors are recorded (e.g. 01 db) to be applied as video shift. This alignment establishes the ABSOLUTE amplitude accuracy in the reference positions (50 MHz, DC coupled, 10 db atten, 30 khz RBW, 75 khz prefilter, etc.). Because of this, it must be done near the end of the full alignment sequence, after many other system elements are aligned. If this alignment fails, it can be due to something in the several possible signal path setups mentioned above. The RF Gain DAC is located on the 3 rd converter and controls the variable gain circuit. Align Audio Board Gain Wide IF ADC Image (Options 122 or 140) Option Path RF Gain Align Variable Gain Align LO Nulling Wide IF Step Gains (Options 122 or 140) Switches in the audio board calibration signal and measures its amplitude and DC offset. If the alignment fails, assure there is no high level 10 khz signal applied to the front panel Audio Input. An alignment failure is caused by an unseated audio board or a faulty audio board. The instrument uses the 50 MHz reference signal and compares the outputs of both A/D converters on the A31 Wideband Analog IF assembly. Internal adjustments are made to provide the best match. If this alignment fails, it can be that one of the A/D converters is faulty or the 50 MHz reference power is incorrect. This procedure is the same as the Align RF Gain routine, where it derives values for the RF Gain DAC. However it tests the optional hardware paths: Electronic attenuator, Option B7J Lowband preamplifier, Option 1DS Wideband IF assemblies, Options 122 or 140 If this alignment fails, three messages are possible: Align_RF_Gain_Eatten, Align_RF_Gain_Preamp, Align_RF_Gain_WBIF. Characterizes the usable range of the RF Gain DAC setting. This allows for analog and digital gain compensations (to improve the overall amplitude accuracy of the box), used for RF flatness compensation. A valid DAC/gain response curve is required for this alignment to pass (30-35 db from minimum to maximum). The DAC is located on the 3 rd converter. A circuit on the A20 Lowband assembly feeds a portion of the LO signal back into the signal path that is out of phase with the LO feed through. This reduces the total LO feed through to below -65 dbm. This alignment characterizes the gain errors of the IF step gains on the A31 Wideband Analog IF assembly. The 50 MHz reference is used to make the measurements. Both filter paths on the wide band AIF are measured. If this alignment fails, it could be caused by the A31 Wideband Analog IF assembly. Check for other alignment failures also since this alignment depends on non-option 122 or 140 assemblies such as the 50 MHz reference switch on the A14 Input Attenuator and the variable gain amplifier on the A10 Third Converter assembly. Chapter 2 51

52 Overall Troubleshooting Quick Cals Table 2-2 Procedure Name Wide IF Frequency Response (Options 122 or 140) Trigger Delays Sequence for Auto-Align Procedures Procedure Description This alignment uses the internal comb generator to perform the frequency response measurement. Step gains and filter paths are taken into account. The factory comb corrections are used for this alignment. This alignment currently is used ONLY for delay compensation within the CDMA personality for measurements which synchronize to an even second clock. This alignment measures the delay of the IF path for the one particular setup used for this CDMA application. Quick Cals Table 2-3 Quick Cals run in the background so you don t see an on-screen indication. However they may fail and present an error message. Quick Cals Quick Cal Name CURRSET_SYSTEM_GAIN (ResBW Switching) CURRSET_IF_FREQ_RESPONSE (Narrow IF Freq Resp) Description Compares current ResBW (IFBW) with the reference BW (30 khz) (see Align RF Gain) to determine small residual RBW switching error, usually <.1 db. Results used for FFT sweeps and comms apps that use FFTs or demod (not for sweeps). Determines shape of Narrow Band IF and is completely analogous to Wide IF Freq Resp. 52 Chapter 2

53 Overall Troubleshooting Isolating the faulty assembly when the displayed amplitude is incorrect or the instrument fails a gain related Auto Align test Isolating the faulty assembly when the displayed amplitude is incorrect or the instrument fails a gain related Auto Align test The PSA series analyzers contain two internal calibrators. Please refer to the instrument overall block diagram under the block diagram tab in this service guide. The 50 MHz calibrator is located on the A10 3 rd Converter, and provides a 50 MHz, 25 dbm signal to the A14 Input Attenuator. This calibration signal is used during most of the instruments auto align routine. The MHz calibrator signal is also generated on the 3 rd Converter. This calibration signal is used for a small portion of the auto align routine and can only be manually controlled on instruments with Option B7J (Digital Demod hardware) or instruments with Option 122 or 140. Switching on the MHz calibrator allows verification of the signal path and processing blocks from the MHz notch filter on the 3 rd Converter assembly through the A7 Digital IF assembly. The 3 rd Converter is located at about the halfway point in the signal path. Therefore, checking the signal level at this point allows you to determine which half of the signal path is faulty. Instruments without option B7J require measuring the 2 nd IF output port on the rear panel with another spectrum analyzer to determine which half of the signal path has a fault. The following example illustrates how the internal calibrators and an external source can be used to identify faulty assemblies. 1. Check the internal 50 MHz calibrator amplitude on screen. Press the green Preset key. Press Mode, Spectrum Analysis. Press Input/Output, Input Port, Amptd Ref, Frequency, 50 MHz, Span 1MHz, Peak Search. The displayed amplitude should be 25 dbm. If the internal 50 MHz calibrator amplitude is incorrect, the calibrator may be faulty or one of the assemblies in the signal path may be faulty. To determine if the internal calibrator is faulty, perform the auto align using an external 50 MHz source connected to the PSA RF input. Connect a source to PSA RF input. Set source to 50 MHz and 25 dbm. You should first measure the source and cable with a power meter to assure the power level is correct. On the PSA: Press Input/Output, select Input Port RF. Press System, More, More, Service. To enter the password, type -49 and press the Enter key. Press the Service softkey again. Locate the 50 MHz Osc softkey and toggle to Ext. This will allow the Auto Align routine to Chapter 2 53

54 Overall Troubleshooting Isolating the faulty assembly when the displayed amplitude is incorrect or the instrument fails a gain related Auto Align test run using an external source rather than the internal 50 MHz calibrator. Press System, Alignments, Align All Now to perform the Auto Align routine. If the Auto Align now passes: The internal 50 MHz calibrator signal is faulty. Suspect the cable that connects the 3 rd Converter to the Attenuator cal switch. Suspect the 3 rd Converter calibrator circuit. Measure 3 rd Converter at J7. Suspect the cal switch on the A14 attenuator. Suspect the Reference Assy is not providing the 50 MHz signal (difficult to verify since the signal goes through the mother board.) If the Auto Align does not pass: Suspect gain problem in at least the low band (3 Hz to 3.05 GHz) signal path. However, you need to check the highband path (3.06 to 6 GHz) to determine if the problem is also there. To do this connect a 5 GHz, 25 dbm signal to the PSA input and tune the PSA to 5 GHz. If the problem appears in high band also, you can assume assemblies COMMON to both paths could be the source of the problem. 2. Determine if the problem is between the RF input connector and a portion of the 3 rd Converter, or if the problem is somewhere between the A10 3 rd Converter and A7 Digital IF output. Instruments with Basic Mode (Option B7J or Option 122 or 140) To perform this test on analyzers with Basic Mode, which is most analyzers, you will turn on the MHz calibrator on the 3 rd Converter and switch it into the signal path. When you do this, the signal path is from the 2 nd IF amp on the 3 rd Converter to the output of the Digital IF. This test assumes the MHz internal calibrator is good. Press the green Preset key (and factory preset if required). Press Mode, Basic, Input/Output, Input Port, choose IF Align, then press Peak Search. The signal level should be about 23 to 27 dbm. Notice that you did not need to set the PSA center frequency because the PSA front end is bypassed. 54 Chapter 2

55 Overall Troubleshooting Isolating the faulty assembly when the displayed amplitude is incorrect or the instrument fails a gain related Auto Align test If the signal level is correct: The signal path from the A10 3 rd Converter 2 nd IF Amp to the output of the A7 Digital IF is good. The problem is somewhere between the input to the A14 Input attenuator and the 2 nd IF Amp on the A10 3 rd Converter. a. Press the green Preset key to turn off the MHz internal calibrator and restore normal instrument operation. b. Turn on the internal 50 MHz calibrator or inject a 50 MHz, 25 dbm signal into the PSA RF input. Tune the PSA to 50 MHz. The PSA block diagram shows expected power levels at the inputs and outputs of the assembly blocks. Follow the instrument set-up instructions in the upper right hand corner of the block diagram. c. Measure the input signals and output signals of each circuit assembly between the Front Panel input connector and 3 rd Converter until you find the wrong signal level. If the signal level is not correct The signal path from the A10 3 rd Converter 2 nd IF Amp to the output of the A7 Digital IF is faulty. a. Press the green Preset key to turn off the MHz internal calibrator and restore normal instrument operation. b. Turn on the internal 50 MHz calibrator or inject a 50 MHz, 25 dbm signal into the PSA RF input. Tune the PSA to 50 MHz. The PSA block diagram shows expected power levels at the inputs and outputs of the assembly blocks. Follow the instrument set-up instructions in the upper right hand corner of the block diagram. c. Measure the input signals and output signals of each circuit assembly between the input to the 3 rd Converter and test point TP5 on the A7 Digital IF. Chapter 2 55

56 Overall Troubleshooting Isolating the faulty assembly when the displayed amplitude is incorrect or the instrument fails a gain related Auto Align test Instruments without Basic Mode (Option B7J or Option 122 or 140) a. Press the green Preset key. b. Press Mode, Spectrum Analysis. c. Turn on the internal 50 MHz calibrator or inject a 50 MHz, 25 dbm signal into the PSA RF input. Tune the PSA to 50 MHz. The PSA block diagram shows expected power levels at the inputs and outputs of the assembly blocks. Follow the instrument set-up instructions in the upper right hand corner of the block diagram. d. To check the signal path from the A14 Input Attenuator to the 2 nd IF Amp on the A10 3 rd Converter, connect a spectrum analyzer to the MHz IF Out on the PSA rear panel and measure the MHz output signal. The signal level should be about 30 dbm. If the signal level is correct: The signal path between the RF input connector and the 2 nd IF Amp on the A10 3 rd Converter is good. The PSA block diagram shows expected power levels at the inputs and outputs of the assembly blocks. Follow the instrument set-up instructions in the upper right hand corner of the block diagram. Measure the input signals and output signals of each circuit assembly between the input to the 3 rd Converter and test point TP5 on the A7 Digital IF. If the signal level is not correct There is a problem with the signal path between the RF input connector and the 2 nd IF Amp on the A10 3 rd Converter. Measure the input signals and output signals of each circuit assembly between the input connector and 3 rd Converter until you find the wrong signal level. When checking the input attenuators, cycle through the attenuator steps to assure all attenuator steps are correct. 56 Chapter 2

57 Overall Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Front Panel Keys Troubleshooting Using Front Panel Keys Using front-panel keys, you can perform limited troubleshooting to the instrument without opening up the analyzer. The following key-driven features under the System key will help you diagnose the instrument: The Show Errors key accesses error message information. The Service key accesses an adjustment and diagnostic mode. The Alignments key enables you to realign analyzer circuitry. The Restore Sys Defaults key restores the analyzer to a known, safe state. The Reference key enables you to select an internal or external reference and, if an external reference is chosen, to enter the frequency of the external reference. Each section below begins with a list of the keys you will press to access the features in that section. Error Messages Press: System, Show Errors The Show Errors key displays the 11 most recent error messages that have been reported to the front-panel error queue. A total of 33 error messages can be stored in the error queue. The Next Page and Previous Page keys enable you to move between the pages of the error queue. The Clear Error Queue key clears the error queue. Error messages are retained in the queue, even if they are no longer detected, until the queue is cleared. The error queue is useful for troubleshooting since it records errors which may be intermittent and may not be present on the instrument display status line. NOTE For additional information on error messages, and for troubleshooting them, refer to the Instrument Messages and Functional Tests Manual (included in this instrument s documentation set). Chapter 2 57

58 Overall Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Front Panel Keys Using Service Features NOTE When the Service key is pressed, a password prompt will appear. Enter -49, Enter to access the Service Mode. Press Service again to access the following keys: Flatness Bandlock 50 MHz Osc LO Null Noise Source Diagnostics 1st LO State Flatness The instrument default is Flatness On, and this causes the instrument to function as follows: The System Variable Gain circuit on the A10 3 rd Converter assembly provides gain to compensate for the frequency response (roll-off) of the instrument. The amount of gain needed for a given frequency point is determined by the flatness correction values stored in the instrument memory during the flatness adjustment procedure. There are thousands of correction points since additional corrections must be made for the optional Preamp and the Digital Demod Hardware states. The Variable Gain circuit also sets the level of the internal 50 MHz calibrator. The System Variable Gain circuit cannot remove the ripple component of the frequency response. This ripple is removed with video shift on the A7 Digital IF assembly. When Flatness is turned Off, the System Variable Gain is fixed at the 50 MHz setting. The video shift is turned off. The result is that the instrument displays the uncorrected frequency response of the hardware. Repair technicians can then compare the uncorrected hardware performance to the corrected performance and determine if a problem is caused by hardware, an adjustment error, or bad correction values. Band Lock The Band Lock key tunes the first LO and sets the system gains according to the particular band that is selected. This process is needed to force the instrument to be tuned to the desired band in the frequency overlap regions. 58 Chapter 2

59 Overall Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Front Panel Keys 50 MHz Oscillator The 50 MHz Oscillator key performs the internal alignment routine using a signal from the RF input (rather than the internal 50 MHz reference signal) when Ext is selected. Ext mode disables the internal 50 MHz reference oscillator and selects the RF input (when the Align All Now function is enabled.) LO Null The LO Null circuit on the A20 Lowband assembly reduces the amplitude of the LO feedthrough that allows measurement of low level signals near the LO feedthrough signal (O Hz). LO Null On is the default state. LO Null can be used to help troubleshoot a low gain problem. Turning off the nulling so the LO feedthrough amplitude increases gives you a quick way to check that the first mixer is working. When LO Null is set to Off, the amplitude of the LO feedthrough should increase approximately db. If it doesn t, the first mixer or LO Null circuit might be defective. Noise Source This key appears only if the Front End Driver assembly contains the 28V switch. Instruments with a serial prefix US4251 or MY4251 and above all contain the 28V switch. Earlier instruments may have received a Front End Driver replacement and also have the 28V switch. Allows the 28V Noise Source Drive output on the rear panel to be turned on and off. The 28V switch is located on the A13 Front End Driver assembly. Diagnostics When HW Diag is On, the following keys are active: IF Ctrl Main Gain DAC - Changing the DAC value from 0 to 4095 causes about 20 db change in displayed signal gain. Pre-ADC BPF - Allows changing the bandwidth of the prefilter on the analog IF assembly. The prefilter bandwidth range is 2.5 khz to 2.83 MHz, although the instrument display shows the upper range as 10 MHz. Above 2.83 MHz prefilter BW, the prefilter circuit switches to bypass mode and the 10 MHz wide anti-alias filter effectively sets the filtering through the analog IF assembly. Chapter 2 59

60 Overall Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Front Panel Keys ADC Ctrl To view the dither signal, go to Basic mode, and set the span to 10 MHz. ADC Dither - Turns dither on and off. ADC Dither CF - Moves the dither center frequency in the IF. The default is MHz relative to 7.5 MHz (center of the screen). The DAC range is 1 to 255. ADC Offset (7, 3, 2, 1, 0) - Provides an offset adjustment on the NONE/direct ADC path or the manual gain path in the following amounts: ADC Offset 7 ADC Offset 3 ADC Offset 2 ADC Offset 1 ADC Offset 0 (max gain) offset adjustment on the NONE/direct ADC path offset adjustment on the 0 db manual gain path offset adjustment on the 6 db manual gain path offset adjustment on the 12 db manual gain path offset adjustment on the 18 db manual gain path These adjustments have a DAC range of 0 to 255. ADC Offset adjustments are designed for factory use. ADC Range Auto - The instrument automatically selects the proper ADC range based on the ranging rules in firmware. Auto Peak - Allows the instrument to range up during a measurement but not range down. Allows the ADC range to automatically change to limit ADC gain (to prevent overdriving the ADC). The ADC range cannot automatically change to allow more ADC gain. Auto Peak Lock - Locks in one range setting. During a measurement the ADC will not change ranges. ADC overloads could occur more easily in this mode, but the fact that the ADC range is unchanged improves the accuracy. Manual - Allows front panel control of the Auto range selections: None, 0 db, +6 db, +12 db, and +18 db. The None setting bypasses the ADC range circuits. When the ADC range is changed, the noise floor level will increase with decreasing ADC gain values. 60 Chapter 2

61 Overall Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Front Panel Keys 1st LO State Center Freq - Allows the center frequency to be changed. 1st LO Mode - This key shows which of four possible LO modes the instrument is in. Note: the following description assumes the instrument is in auto coupled mode (phase noise optimization under the auto coupled menu is set to Auto). The span breaks mentioned below will be different if the phase noise optimization is set manually or the sweep rate is not auto coupled. Dual loop mode is chosen when the frequency span is < 2MHz. Single loop mode is chosen when the frequency span is to 2 MHz. Dual-Wide means the synthesizer is in dual-loop wide mode. If the span is 141 khz the instrument is set to Dual-Wide. Dual-Narrow means the synthesizer is in dual loop narrow mode. If the span is 142 khz to 1.99 MHz, the instrument is set to Dual-Narrow. Single-Narrow means the synthesizer is in single loop narrow mode. If the span is 2 MHz to 10 MHz, the instrument is set to Single-Narrow Single-Wide means the synthesizer is in single loop wide mode. If the span is >11 MHz, the instrument is set to Single-Wide. DL Band Harm - Dual Loop Band Harmonic. This key is greyed out unless the instrument is in dual loop mode (span < 2 MHz). The Dual loop harmonic is 1 when the center frequency is set to less than approximately 6.6 GHz. The actual center frequency where band harmonic changes is based on frequency span. For span = 1.99 MHz, the instrument uses dual loop band harmonic 1 at center frequency GHz and band harmonic 2 at GHz center frequency. DL band harmonic 4 is used from center frequency 13.3 GHz and above. SmpIF Start - Shows the start frequency of the IF sampler. This can be a negative number or positive number. This frequency can be measured at J7 of the Sampler Assembly. SmpIF SwpDir - Shows the Sampler IF Sweep Direction. This can be positive or negative to indicate which direction the sampler frequency sweeps or steps. A positive number means the sampler is swept or stepped higher in frequency. Chapter 2 61

62 Overall Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Front Panel Keys Using Alignment Features Press: System, Alignments. Alignment Keys Auto Align Align All Now Align Subsystem Align RF Align IF Align ADC Align Current IF Flatness Align Current SysGain Restore Align Defaults Auto Align Auto Align can be set to one of three states listed below. Regardless of the auto align state, an alignment will automatically occur whenever the instrument power is cycled. When the Auto Align (ON) state is selected, the instrument will automatically run all alignments in Table 2-2 every 24 hours or if the internal instrument temperature changes ± 3 degrees C from the last alignment. The alignment routine is the same as if you pressed the Align All Now. The instrument will not sweep while the alignments are running. After the alignment routine completes, the instrument reverts back to the pre-alignment state. Therefore, if the instrument is performing a measurement and an auto align is triggered, the measurement will be interrupted, possibly causing a measurement error, until the auto align completes. The Auto Align (Off) key causes neither automatic alignments nor an alert to occur. The Auto Align (Alert) key causes an alert message to appear on the display when, (1), a 3 degree (Celsius) change in temperature is detected, or (2), at 24 hour intervals. The message will prompt you to perform an alignment, but no alignment will occur automatically. NOTE An annotation at the left side of the screen that reads AA will appear when the Auto Align On or Alert features are active. 62 Chapter 2

63 Overall Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Front Panel Keys Align All Now The Align All Now key halts normal analyzer operation and forces a complete realignment of the entire system. When performing any alignment, the presence of an external 50 MHz signal is checked. If an external 50 MHz signal > 0 dbm, is detected, the alignment routine will be skipped and the message High 50 MHz power level will be displayed. If this occurs, remove the 50 MHz signal from the analyzer input and perform Align All Now or Align Subsys, Align RF. Align Subsystem The Align Subsys key allows you to align the RF, IF, and ADC circuitry of the analyzer for amplitude accuracy by activating the Align RF, Align IF, and Align ADC keys. You can also align the current IF flatness and the system gain of the analyzer (explained below). The Align Current IF Flatness key activates an immediate measurement of the current IF flatness. The Align Current SysGain key activates a fine-tuning of the system gain. This adjustment is done by measuring the response of the current system state configuration to the 50 MHz amplitude reference signal. All subsequent measurements are then compensated appropriately for absolute amplitude accuracy. Restore Align Defaults The Restore Align Defaults key loads the default values for system alignments, turns on frequency corrections, and resets the timebase to the factory set values. Chapter 2 63

64 Overall Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Front Panel Keys Selecting the Frequency Reference Press: System, Freq Ref The Freq Ref key allows you to toggle the reference from internal to external (or external to internal), and then specify the external reference frequency, by entering a value between 1 and 30 MHz, followed by pressing the Enter key. The 10 MHz Out key activates or deactivates the 10 MHz reference out signal on the rear panel of the analyzer. User Diagnostics Press: System, More, Diagnostics, Front Panel Test The Front Panel Test allows key presses and RPG knob rotations to be displayed on the instrument s screen. This diagnosis is useful when checking the functionality of all keys and the RPG knob. Restore System Defaults Press: System, More, Restore Sys Defaults Pressing this key sets the following back to the factory defaults: Power On/Preset Power On is set to Preset. Preset Type is set to Mode. Auto Align is set to On. Freq Ref is set to Internal. 10 MHz Out is set to Off. Color Palette is set to Default. 64 Chapter 2

65 Overall Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Performance Test Failures Troubleshooting Performance Test Failures This information assumes the analyzer is making measurements but a performance test is failing by a small margin, or only a few measurements are failing. If most of the performance tests are failing, go to "Check the Basics" on page 45. Step 1. Determine if an adjustment is causing the analyzer to fail the performance test. Do the adjustments, if any, associated with the failing performance test. Step 2. Determine the probable faulty assembly by comparing the performance test results to Table 2-4. NOTE Please note that a failure on any assembly in the input RF path could cause many of the performance tests to fail. See the Overall Block Diagram in Chapter 9. Table 2-4 lists the assembly or assemblies most likely to cause the failure. Multiple probable faulty assemblies are listed in order of probability. Table 2-4 Performance Test Failures Failing Performance Test Adjustment Probable Faulty Assembly Troubleshooting Information Residual Responses None RF Section - cables and assemblies Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Displayed Average Noise Level (DANL) 2nd LO Power Lowband Mixer Bias SLODA/FELOMA RF Section A8 Analog IF/ A31 Wide Analog IF A10 3rd Converter A19 RYTHM A20 Lowband A22 Preamp Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 6 Frequency Reference Accuracy Frequency Readout Accuracy Count Accuracy 10 MHz Internal Frequency Reference 10 MHz Internal Frequency Reference 10 MHz Internal Frequency Reference A11 Reference Chapter 5 A11 Reference Chapter 5 A11 Reference Chapter 5 Chapter 2 65

66 Overall Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Performance Test Failures Table 2-4 Performance Test Failures Failing Performance Test Adjustment Probable Faulty Assembly Troubleshooting Information Spurious Responses None A19 RYTHM FL1 (3 GHz LPF) FL2 ( GHz BPF) A20 Lowband A10 3rd Converter A8 Analog IF Chapter 5 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 6 Images and Spurious Responses (Wide IF) But not failing the normal Spurious Responses test A31 Wideband Analog IF Chapter 8 Second Harmonic Distortion Lowband Mixer Bias A13 Front End Driver A19 RYTHM A20 Lowband Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Third-Order Intermodulation Distortion Second LO Power Lowband Mixer Bias SLODA/FELOMA A19 RYTHM A20 Lowband A10 3rd Converter Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Third-Order Intermodulation Distortion (Wide IF) But not failing the normal TOI test A31 Wideband Analog IF Chapter 8 Gain Compression Second LO Power Lowband Mixer Bias A20 Lowband A10 3rd Converter A19 RYTHM Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Power Bandwidth Accuracy None A8 Analog IF A7 Digital IF Chapter 6 IF Amplitude Ripple None A8 Analog IF/ A31 Wideband Analog IF A10 3rd Converter Chapter 6 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 IF Phase Ripple None A12 Synthesizer Chapter 5 Input Attenuation Switching Uncertainty None A14/A15 Input Attenuators A13 Front End Driver The A8 Analog IF or A7 Digital IF assemblies may have come unseated. Assure these assemblies are fully inserted in the motherboard. Chapter 3 Display Scale Fidelity None A7 Digital IF A8 Analog IF Chapter 6 66 Chapter 2

67 Overall Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Performance Test Failures Table 2-4 Performance Test Failures Failing Performance Test Adjustment Probable Faulty Assembly Troubleshooting Information Absolute Amplitude Accuracy Second LO Power SLODA/FELOMA 50 MHz Calibrator Amplitude A14/A15 Input Attenuators A20 Lowband A10 3rd Converter A8 Analog IF A7 Digital IF A19 RYTHM A30 FIFA (44-50 GHz) A18 YTO A29 SBTX/FELOMA Driver (44-50 GHz) Chapter 3 Absolute Amplitude Accuracy (Wide IF) A10 3rd Converter A31 Wideband Analog IF Chapter 8 But not failing the normal Absolute Amplitude Accuracy test Noise Sidebands None A12 Synthesizer A11 Reference A9 Second LO A18 YTO Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Frequency Response (check description of test to determine instrument settings such as Preamp ON, Preselector On or OFF) SLODA/FELOMA YTF Align Attenuator Slope Frequency Response A20 Lowband A19 RYTHM A22 Preamp A27 Electronic Attenuator A14/A15 Input Attens A10 3rd Converter A13 Front End Driver RF Section Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty None A8 Analog IF A7 Digital IF Chapter 6 LO Output Accuracy (Opt. AYZ) LO Output A21 SLODA A21 FELOMA A13 Front End Driver Chapter 3 Chapter 4 IF Input Accuracy (Opt. AYZ) Preselector Tune Out (Opt. AYZ) IF Input A10 3rd Converter Chapter 6 Preselector Tune Out A13 Front End Driver Chapter 6 Chapter 2 67

68 Overall Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Performance Test Failures Table 2-4 Performance Test Failures Failing Performance Test Adjustment Probable Faulty Assembly Troubleshooting Information Input Noise Density (Wide IF) A31 Wideband Analog IF A10 3rd Converter Chapter 8 But not failing the DANL test 68 Chapter 2

69 3 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) 69

70 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) What You Will Find in This Chapter What You Will Find in This Chapter The following information is found in this chapter: 1. Theory of operation of the RF section for model numbers E4440A, E4443A, and E4445A. 2. Isolating the cause of an hardware problem by verifying the functionality of assemblies in the RF section signal path. 3. Block diagrams of the RF section of the analyzer. NOTE Each section describes how the assembly works and gives information to help you troubleshoot the assembly. Each description covers the purpose of the assembly, describes the main components, and lists external connections to the assembly. This following descriptions are found in this chapter: RF Section Description (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A)...page 71 Overall Front End...page 75 A14 and A15 Step Attenuators...page 76 A21 Switched LO Distribution Amplifier (SLODA)...page 78 A19 RYTHM...page 80 A18 YTO...page 81 A20 Lowband...page 82 A13 Front End Driver...page 84 A22 Low Band Preamplifier (Option 1DS)...page 86 A27 Electronic Attenuator Description (Option B7J)...page Chapter 3

71 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) RF Section Description (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) RF Section Description (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) Purpose The RF front end section converts input signals to a 3 rd IF of 21.4 MHz. This section contains assemblies which generate Local Oscillator (LO) signals and assemblies which use the LO signals to mix the RF Input and the subsequent IF signals. Assemblies in the RF section also provide attenuation and circuit protection, gains and trigger signals, and a path for the 50 MHz calibrator signal. RF Block Diagram (E4440A Example) The 3 Hz to 26.5 GHz RF input signal first enters the input attenuators, A14 and A15. The input attenuators provide 0 to 70 db attenuation in 2 db steps. In addition, a selectable DC block and a switch for the calibrator signal are contained in the input attenuator block. With the DC block switched in (AC coupling), the frequency range is limited to 20 MHz to 26.5 GHz. The calibrator path supports a 50 MHz, 25 dbm signal for absolute amplitude calibration. After passing through the input attenuators, the RF signal routes to one of two major RF paths; High Band for frequencies above 3 GHz and Low Band for frequencies below 3 GHz. The A19 RYTHM (Routing YIG-Tuned Harmonic Mixer) is where the two major RF paths diverge. For the High Band path, the signal continues through the RYTHM where it first passes through the YIG Tuned Filter (YTF). The YTF tracks the displayed center frequency as the instrument sweeps and removes spurious signals such as images and multiples. Next the signal is down-converted to the MHz IF using the harmonically-pumped High Band mixer. The IF signal then routes out of the RYTHM and into the Third Converter board. For the Low Band path, the 3 Hz to 3 GHz signals leave the input switch in the RYTHM and continue through to the FL1 3 GHz Lowpass filter. If the instrument contains Option 1DS (preamplifier) or Option B7J (digital demod hardware), the low band signal also routes through them. The signal then enters the A20 LowBand assembly. The Lowband assembly contains both the first and second mixer. The first mixer up-converts the RF signal to the GHz first IF. The first IF signal leaves the Lowband assembly and routes through the GHz bandpass filter FL2, and back into the Lowband assembly at the first IF input port. The second mixer down-converts the first IF to the MHz second IF. The second IF signal then routes to the A10 Third Converter assembly. Chapter 3 71

72 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) RF Section Description (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) Figure 3-1 Example of Down Conversion In the Third Converter, one of three possible MHz IF signals is selected: High Band, Low Band, and MHz from an optional MHz input. The MHz is fed to the system variable gain which is used to establish gain at 50 MHz as well as remove front end frequency response as the instrument tunes across it s frequency range. The third mixer down-converts the MHz second IF to the 21.4 MHz IF. 72 Chapter 3

73 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) RF Section Description (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) Figure 3-2 RF Section Assemblies - E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Item Description 1 J1 Input Connector 2 A14 Attenuator/Switch 3 A15 Attenuator 4 L-bracket, RF Main 5 A18 YTO, 2.9 to 7 GHz (Yig Tuned Oscillator) 6 A19 RYTHM 7 A20 Low Band Assembly 8 FL1 Low Pass Filter, 3 GHz 9 A21 SLODA (Switched LO Distribution Amplifier) 10 FL2 Band Pass Filter, GHz 11 A22 Preamp Assembly (Option 1DS) 12 A27 Electronic Attenuator (Option B7J) Chapter 3 73

74 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) RF Section Description (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) Figure 3-3 Block Diagram with RF Options - E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Option BAB (E4440A only) - APC 3.5 mm input connector. Standard PSAs use a precision machined Type N connector for the RF input. Option B7J Option 1DS - Digital Demod Hardware. The electronic attenuator works over the lowband frequency range. In bypass mode, the coax switches in the electronic attenuator board route the RF signal on through to the Lowband board. The electronic attenuator path consists a 40 db, 1 db step solid state attenuator. - Low Band Preamp. In bypass mode, the coax switches route the Low Band RF signal on to the Lowband assembly. When in preamp mode the 30 db gain, low noise figure amplifier path is selected. Option AYZ (E4440A only) - External Mixing. Allows an external preselected or unpreselected mm wave mixer to be used with the instrument. 74 Chapter 3

75 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) RF Section Description (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) RF Assembly Quick Check - E4440A, E4443A, E4445A NOTE To perform the following checks, it will be necessary to remove the outer case and the top brace. See Chapter 11 for removal procedures. Turn the instrument on and allow it to complete its internal calibration routines. This routine will generate error messages if the signal level is incorrect through the system. Inject the 50 MHz, 25 dbm calibrator signal to the RF Section by pressing Input/Output, Input Port, Amptd Ref (f = 50 MHz). Set the instrument to CF = 50 MHz, Span = 0 Hz, and the input attenuator to 10 db. Disconnect the cable with the 3 color band from the third converter 21.4 MHz output A10J5. Connect the RF Input of another spectrum analyzer to A10J5. A 21.4 MHz, 27 dbm ±2 db signal should be present. Verifying a Faulty Front End Assembly E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Overall Front End Finding a fault in the RF front end is best done by breaking the path and monitoring the signal level and frequency with another spectrum analyzer. The signal levels and frequencies are noted on the overall block diagram foldout for given input conditions. In following the first LO, breaking the signal path between the A18 YTO and the A21 SLODA, or at the Sampler Output of the SLODA, will cause an unlock condition. This can be resolved by using a power splitter to keep the loop complete and yet facilitate measurement. In doing this, the measured signal level due to loss of the splitter must be taken into account. Since most RF section assemblies are expensive, a suspected faulty assembly should be verified by checking bias voltages and input signals before replacing them. This is best accomplished by improving accessibility of the test points and nodes on the A13 Front End assembly by using the extender boards and cables supplied in the Service Kit E For troubleshooting the RF Section, use the following pieces supplied in the kit: A13 Front End Driver Extender E A13J12 Bias Board E Chapter 3 75

76 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) RF Section Description (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) A14 and A15 Step Attenuators A faulty attenuator can cause improper signal level in both High and Low bands, often in certain combinations of attenuator settings. In addition, a faulty A14 can prevent the frequency range from going down to 3 Hz, even when the PSA is set in DC Coupled mode. A14 can also prevent the 50 MHz calibrator signal from being displayed. Figure 3-4 Attenuator Block Diagram The attenuators receive control signals and supplies from the A13 Front End Driver assembly. A14 is fed from A13J3 and A15 is fed from A13J4. Ground is on pin 3 and the 25V supply is on pin 10. Viewing from the circuit side of the board, the connector pinouts are shown: Figure 3-5 Connector Pinout If the 50 MHz calibrator signal is not displayed, first verify its presence at A14J2. Disconnect the gray W20 cable from the attenuator and monitor the signal coming out of the cable with another spectrum analyzer. The signal should be 50 MHz at 25 dbm. Verify that the attenuator is receiving the proper TTL signals monitoring the points on A13J3 with a scope using the truth table. Input Path Calibrator Path Select J3 pin 2 Calibrator Path Bypass J3 pin 1 RF High Low Calibrator Low High 76 Chapter 3

77 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) RF Section Description (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) If the DC/AC Coupling modes are not properly functioning, a similar table can be used. Coupling DC Block Select J3 pin 9 DC Block Bypass J3 pin 4 DC High Low AC Low High Improper displayed signal amplitudes in some attenuator settings can be isolated to either A13 or A14 based on which steps are incorrect. Signal out of the attenuators can be measured by disconnecting the appropriate semirigid cable and using a spectrum analyzer. Referring to Figure 3-4, A14 has two 2 db sections and A15 has a 6 db, a 10 db, a 20 db and a 30 db section. Verify that the attenuators are receiving the correct switching sequences by using the following tables. Table 3-1 Attenuation (db) A15 Settings 6 db Select J4 pin 9 6 db Bypass J4 pin 4 10 db Select J4 pin 2 10 db Bypass J4 pin 1 20 db Select J4 pin 8 20 db Bypass J4 pin 5 30 db Select J4 pin 7 30 db Bypass J4 pin 6 0 High Low High Low High Low High Low 6 Low High High Low High Low High Low 10 High Low Low High High Low High Low 20 High Low High Low Low High High Low 30 High Low High Low High Low Low High 40 High Low Low High High Low Low High 50 High Low High Low Low High Low High 60 High Low Low High Low High Low High 70 Low High Low High Low High Low High Chapter 3 77

78 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) RF Section Description (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) Table 3-2 A14 Settings Attenuation (db) 2 db_a Select J3 pin 8 2 db_a Bypass J3 pin 5 2 db_b Select J3 pin 7 2 db_b Bypass J3 pin 6 0 High Low High Low 2 Low High High Low 4 Low High Low High 6 High Low High Low 8 Low High High Low 10 High Low High Low A21 Switched LO Distribution Amplifier (SLODA) Figure 3-6 SLODA Block Diagram The A21 SLODA provides amplitude leveling and distribution of the 3 to 7 GHz first LO signal to the RYTHM, Lowband assembly, and LO Synthesizer Board (Sampler output). The External LO Output is terminated in 50 Ohms. The 3 to 7 GHz LO signal enters the SLODA from the YTO. The ALC circuit on the A13 Front End Driver provides level control via the PIN Atten line. The ALC circuit receives its input from the SLODA s INT Sense line. The A13 also provides the RYTHM band and Low Band switching information as well as Gate Bias. Some common symptoms of a faulty SLODA include YTO Unlock errors, Sampler errors, LO Unleveled errors, low signal level in one or both bands, spurious signals or high DANL. To verify a faulty SLODA, first check that the YTO signal is present at the YTO IN connector. The 78 Chapter 3

79 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) RF Section Description (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) signal should be 3 to 7 GHz at +12 to +17 dbm. Next verify the LO outputs, all of which range from 3 to 7 GHz. To verify the High Band output, set the PSA to a center frequency of 5 GHz and set the span to 0 Hz. The High Band LO Output should be 14.5 dbm ±3 db. Verify the Low Band LO output by setting the PSA to a frequency below 2.85 GHz in zero span, and verify that the signal is 14.5 dbm ±1 db. The signal at the SAMPLER OUT should range from 8 dbm to 3 dbm and the 1 st LO OUT should be around 15 dbm. NOTE The DC voltages on the SLODA can be measured either at the connectors to the SLODA, or at A13J12 using the E bias board (included in Service Kit E ). Measuring at the SLODA will help verify the condition of the A13-to-SLODA bias cable, W28. If either the Low Band or High Band outputs are bad, check that the band switch is being driven properly. To set the PSA to Low Band, set the Center Frequency below 2.85 GHz in Zero Span. Set the analyzer above 3 GHz for High Band. A DVM with a fine probe can be used to reach the connections at the SLODA. Connect the negative lead to A13 TP11, or to A13J12 pin 10 (SLODACOM) if the bias board is available. SLODA Pin High Band Low Band SW A 1 V 1 V SW B 1 V 1 V Using a DVM, verify that the Gate Bias is close to the value printed on the SLODA label. If probing on A13J12, measure at pin 9 (GATE BIAS on the bias board.) For the ALC, verify that the Level Adj pin reads between 0.5 V to 3 V. INT Sense can be measured at A13J12 pin 8 (INT SENSE on the bias board) as well as at the SLODA. With the E4440 in Zero Span, set the Center Frequency to the frequencies listed and measure the INT Sense voltages. They should be close to the values printed on the SLODA label for each band. Band B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 Frequency Range 30 Hz to 3 GHz 2.85 GHz to 6.6 GHz 6.2 GHz to 13.2 GHz 12.8 GHz to 19.2 GHz 18.7 GHz to 26.5 GHz EXT Sense is used when Option AYZ External Mixing, or Option 123, Unpreselected Path is installed. EXT Sense line goes to the Front End Driver assembly and is MUX d into the SLODA LO levelling loop. Chapter 3 79

80 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) RF Section Description (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) A19 RYTHM RYTHM stands for Routing YIG Tuned Harmonic Mixer. This is the first mixer for the preselected high bands, bands 1 though 4. Three major components make up RYTHM: the input switch, YIG preselected bandpass filter, and the harmonic mixer. Included with the RYTHM Driver PC board which includes the current source for the YTF coil as well as bias circuitry for the ODD/EVEN IF Switch as well as the input switch. The ODD/EVEN IF switch optimizes conversion loss for different harmonic mixing bands. A TTL high on L_ODD_IF from the Front End Driver board is used for bands 2, 3, and 4. A TTL low on L_ODD_IF is used for band 1. TTL levels on L_RYTHM_LB select the RF input switch position in RYTHM: low for Low Band position and high for High Band position. The RYTHM bands are bands 1 through 4 whose start (minimum) and stop (maximum) frequencies are shown in the following table: Band Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency GHz 6.6 GHz GHz 13.2 GHz GHz 19.2 GHz GHz 26.5 GHz The mixing equations are: Band 1 F LO = F RF + F IF Band 2 F LO = (F RF + F IF )/2 Band 3, 4 F LO = (F RF + F IF )/4 F IF = Hz RYTHM uses the 1, 2 and 4 th harmonic of the LO. The RF is always on the low side of the LO harmonic. Note that band 3 and band 4 use the 4 th LO harmonic. The artificial band break between band 3 and band 4 allows for the YTF tuning curve and the frequency response curve to more approximate straight line segments. The PSA uses independent ramp generation circuits for the YTO and YTF. The YTF s center frequency is a near linear function of the tuning current. A YTF voltage ramp generator is contained on the A13 Front End Driver Board and the YTF current source is contained on the RYTHM PC board. The voltage ramp feeds both the RYTHM microcircuit as well as the PRE-SEL Tune Output port on the back panel. The YTF is specified to have a tuning sensitivity range of 41 to 49 MHz/mA. 80 Chapter 3

81 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) RF Section Description (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) Common failures with RYTHM are a damaged input switch due to input overstress, and a faulty preselector. The former can cause signal loss in either High Band or Low Band, or in both. The latter will cause signal loss or flatness problems in High Band only. Whenever a RYTHM is suspected, first check presence of the 15VF bias at A13J6 pin 5, and +15VF at A13J6 pin 7 using a DVM. Connect the negative lead of the DVM to A13 TP8. Voltages and signals coming from A13J6 should also be checked at the RYTHM to verify W28. Check that the LO from A18 through W35 is present using another spectrum analyzer. Also check the input signal coming through W9 from the attenuator. (The signal level will be the input level less the attenuator settings.) If you are using the internal 50 MHz calibrator signal, make sure that it is switched in. If the signal is corrupted in Low Band only, make sure that the input switch is being controlled after verifying presence of the input signal. HIBAND should be a TTL high in High Band and low in Low Band. If the signal is not getting through the preselector, first check the band switching per the above paragraph. Try manually peaking the signal by pressing AMPLITUDE, Presel Adjust. If the signal can be peaked, the flatness adjustment may be needed or the A13 is faulty. A faulty RYTHM is least likely in this scenario. Next check the presence of a tune ramp. Set the start and stop frequencies to 3 GHz and 26.5 GHz respectively with the PSA in continuous sweep. (This generates a ramp to tune the preselector nearly through its entire range.) The A13 YTF tune circuitry can be quickly verified by looking for a combination of steps and ramps ranging from approximately 0 to 5 volts with an oscilloscope on the rear panel PRE-SEL OUT connector. The period of this waveform will vary with the sweep time. Also verify that +VTUNE is being applied to the RYTHM at A13J6 pin 13. A similar ramp ranging up to about 2.5 volts should be observed. A18 YTO The YTO (YIG-Tuned Oscillator) supplies the raw 3 to 7 GHz LO signal. Verify that its output is from +12 dbm to +17 dbm. With a DVM, verify the presence of the supplies on the A13 Front End Driver: J7 Pin 4 J7 Pin 5 J7 Pin 7 J7 Pin V 5 V +15 V +15 V Common symptoms of a faulty YTO are YTO Unlock errors, spurious signals, and low signal level at all frequencies. Two current-driven coils are used to tune the YTO. Both coils are used in all spans. The coil drivers are on the A12 LO Synthesizer assembly and the signals route through the A13 Front End Driver. Chapter 3 81

82 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) RF Section Description (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) A20 Lowband The Lowband assembly is the front end converter for frequencies below 3 GHz. The Lowband assembly encompasses both the first and second mixers, the 2 nd LO multiplier, LO Nulling and filtering. Figure 3-7 Lowband Assembly Block Diagram Mixing equation: F LO = F RF + F IF F IF = GHz The 3 Hz to 3 GHz RF input signal enters the Lowband assembly at A20J1. The first component in the RF path is the RF Limiter. This limiter prevents excessive RF energy from damaging the first mixer. The first mixer up-converts the 3 Hz to 3 GHz signal to the GHz first IF. The first LO, which enters the Lowband assembly from the SLODA, ranges from to GHz. Following the first mixer is a dual coupler. One output of the coupler routes to the first IF overload detector and the other coupler port is the input from the LO Nulling circuit. The next stage in the first converter section is the First IF Amplifier. Following the First IF Amplifier, the first IF signal leaves the Lowband assembly, routes through the external first IF bandpass filter and re-enters the Lowband assembly in the Second Converter section. The second mixer down-converts the GHz first IF to the MHz second IF. The second LO is at 3.6 GHz. Following the 82 Chapter 3

83 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) RF Section Description (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) second mixer is the second IF lowpass filter. LO Nulling is the process of reducing the LO feedthrough signal that appears on screen when the instrument is tuned to 0 Hz. When tuned to 0 Hz, the first LO is at GHz. The LO Nulling circuitry works around this frequency and adds a signal of approximately-equal amplitude, but 180 degrees out of phase. This signal is coupled off the main LO path. A faulty Lowband assembly will commonly cause low or no signal below 3 GHz, and no LO Nulling. The 3.6 GHz second LO signal is supplied by the A9 Second LO assembly. The second LO is amplified in the Lowband assembly before it is applied to the Second Mixer A failure with the Lowband assembly will likely result in a problem with signals up to 3 GHz only. First check for a signal at the input, A20J1, the First LO at A20J2, and the 2 nd LO at A20J5 by referring to the signal conditions given on the overall block diagram. The multiplied 2 nd LO can be checked at A20J6. Similarly the first IF signal can be verified at A20J3. With the PSA set to a center frequency below 3 GHz, and in zero span, check that the bias voltages are present. Some of these can be accessed on the A13J12 Test Connector and some others have test points. With the negative lead of the DVM on A13J12 pin 6, look for values listed in the table. CAUTION Use care when probing connector pins on A13, especially on A13J8. Connector spacings are close and shorting nodes can cause damage. Pin/ Name A13J12 pin1/ 5V_LB A13J12 pin2/ 5V_M1LO A13J12 pin3/ 5V_M1IF A13J12 pin4/ 5V_M2IF A13J8 pins 7,8/+3V_LB A13J8 pin25/+5.2v_lb A13TP22/M1LO_ADJ A13TP23/M1LO_ADJ A13TP24/M2LO_ADJ A13J8 pin16/+10v_lb A13TP26/LO_NULL_I_DAC A13TP27/LO_NULL_Q_DAC Nominal Voltage 5 V 5 V 5 V 5 V 3 V 5.2 V 100 mv 150 mv 100 mv 10 V 5 to +5 V 5 to +5 V Chapter 3 83

84 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) RF Section Description (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) The remaining biases are 2 nd _LO_PIN and 2 nd _LO_ATTEN. Since these are currents they cannot be directly measured at the Lowband assembly connector. The output of the DAC which controls this ALC circuit on A13 is A13TP25. To help verify that this part of the circuitry which drives the Lowband assembly is functioning correctly, perform the 2 nd LO Power adjustment. A13 Front End Driver The Front End Driver assembly contains the circuitry needed to drive the microcircuits and other assemblies used in the RF section. Many of these circuits can be verified using the previous discussions for verifying these assemblies. The voltage values on selected connectors are (with ground connection on A13TP16 top of board near fans): Option 219, Noise Figure, provides a switched 28V (via A13J14) to the rear panel to drive a noise source. Press System, Service, enter the password 49, and press Service, Noise Source to turn on the 28V at J14. This 28V is the result of regulating the +32V power supply voltage on the Front End Driver assembly. If the 28V cannot be turned on or is not 28V ± 0.2V, suspect the Front End Driver or a power supply problem. The RF input attenuator also uses the +32V supply, so if the attenuator also functions incorrectly, suspect an incorrect power supply level. Option AYZ, External Mixing, requires the front end driver to switch the input signal path on the A10 3 rd converter and provides the preselector tune out range to the rear panel. The preselector tune out is required to tune the tracking filter on the Agilent series preselected mixers. The LO leveling circuit and LO Unlock Sense circuits are on this assembly. 84 Chapter 3

85 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) RF Section Description (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) Figure 3-8 Front End Driver Assembly - E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Chapter 3 85

86 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) RF Section Description (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) A22 Low Band Preamplifier (Option 1DS) Figure 3-9 Preamplifier Block Diagram The Low Band Preamp has a nominal gain of 30 db and contains two electro-mechanical coax switches. The frequency range of the preamp is 100 khz to 3 GHz. The input signal level at the preamp should not exceed 30 dbm. To verify its operation, display the 25 dbm, 50 MHz calibrator signal on screen with a 5 MHz span and the input attenuator set to 10 db. Select the Low Band Preamp path by pressing AMPLITUDE, More, Int Preamp On, (listen for a distinctive click ) and measure the signal levels at the input and output with a spectrum analyzer. Also, the displayed signal on the PSA should not change position when the preamplifier is switched in and out, but the noise floor will decrease with the preamp on. Please note that the RF attenuator value may increase, depending on the reference level, causing the noise floor to increase. The preamp is controlled by supply biases and coax switch voltages. A nominal +9 volts should be present at A13J9 pins 2 and 3. Switch voltages can be checked per the table (the ribbon cable must remain attached). Node Off Volts On Volts A13J9 pins 18,19 +COIL A13J9 pin 20 SW A13J9 pin 17 SW Chapter 3

87 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) RF Section Description (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) Figure 3-10 Coax Switch Bias Circuit A27 Electronic Attenuator Description (Option B7J) Purpose: The electronic attenuator facilitates the accurate, frequent, and rapid attenuation that is optimal for digitally modulated signals. The attenuator supplies 40 db of attenuation in 1 db steps. The instrument must be in Basic mode to allow front panel control of the electronic attenuator. Press MODE, Basic, Input/Output, Input Atten. The electronic attenuator is actuated by the instrument firmware during comms measurements. Signal Path: The low band signal is routed from the RYTHM. A switch in the electronic attenuator selects either the bypass path, or the attenuation path. The output signal is routed to the A20 Low Band assembly. Troubleshooting: Select Spectrum Analysis mode. Apply a 50 MHz input signal to the analyzer and select zero span. Measure the signal on the W51 input cable after detaching it from the input connector. Reattach the input cable and measure the power out of the attenuator at J2. In Spectrum mode, the attenuator pads should be bypassed and the output power should be input power minus 0.2 to 0.3 db. Select Basic mode. Press Input/Output and select Input Port Amptd Ref. Set the analyzer center frequency to 50 MHz to display the internal calibration signal. Vary the input attenuation from 0 db to 40 db. The displayed amplitude should vary by less than 1 db. Chapter 3 87

88 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) RF Section Description (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) 88 Chapter 3

89 4 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) 89

90 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) What You Will Find in This Chapter What You Will Find in This Chapter The following information is found in this chapter: 1. Theory of operation of the RF section for model numbers E4446A, E4447A, and E4448A. 2. Isolating the cause of an hardware problem by verifying the functionality of assemblies in the RF section signal path. 3. Block diagrams of the RF section of the analyzer. NOTE Each section describes how the assembly works and gives information to help you troubleshoot the assembly. Each description covers the purpose of the assembly, describes the main components, and lists external connections to the assembly. This following descriptions are found in this chapter: RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A)...page 91 Overall Front End...page 95 A14 and A15 Step Attenuators...page 96 A21 FELOMA and A29 FELOMA/SBTX Driver...page 98 A19 SBTX/RYTHM Assembly...page 101 A18 YTO...page 103 A20 Lowband...page 104 A13 Front End Driver...page 107 A22 Low Band Preamplifier (Option 1DS)...page 108 A27 Electronic Attenuator Description (Option B7J)...page Chapter 4

91 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) Purpose The RF front end section converts input signals to a 3 rd IF of 21.4 MHz. This section contains assemblies which generate Local Oscillator (LO) signals and assemblies which use the LO signals to mix the RF Input and the subsequent IF signals. Assemblies in the RF section also provide attenuation and circuit protection, gains and trigger signals, and a path for the 50 MHz calibrator signal. RF Block Diagram (E4448A Example) NOTE Refer to the E4446A/E4447A/E4448A Overall Block Diagram throughout this procedure. The block diagram outlines instrument settings and input power levels to obtain the measured levels in this procedure. The 3 Hz to 50 GHz RF input signal first enters the input attenuators, A14 and A15. The input attenuators provide 0 to 70 db attenuation in 2 db steps. The A14 Attenuator contains a switch that allows the 25 dbm, 50 MHz calibrator signal to be switched into the signal path for amplitude calibration. The E4446A, E4447A, and E4448A do not have a DC blocking cap in the signal path. Therefore, the first mixer can easily be damaged if DC is present. The attenuated input signal enters the A19 SBTX/RYTHM assembly, where a switch at the input of the SBTX (switched Barium-tuned filter/mixer) routes the signal through the SBTX or to the RYTHM assembly. Switches in the SBTX and RYTHM sub-assemblies route the input signal to one of three mixing paths: If the signal frequency is 26.8 GHz to 50 GHz, the signal goes through the tracking preselector and mixer in the SBTX where it is down-converted to GHz and sent to the A30 First IF Amplifier (FIFA). The output of the FIFA is connected through a GHz bandpass filter to the second mixer on the A20 Lowband assembly. The second mixer converts the signal to MHz. If the signal frequency is 3 GHz to 26.8 GHz, the signal is routed through the 27 GHz low pass filter cable to the RYTHM (routing YIG-tuned harmonic mixer) where it passes through a YIG-tuned filter. The YIG-tuned filter tracks the displayed input signal as the instrument sweeps and removes spurious signals such as images and multiples. Next the signal is down-converted to the MHz IF using the harmonically-pumped mixer. The IF signal is then sent to the A10 Third Converter. Chapter 4 91

92 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) If the signal frequency is 3 Hz to 3 GHz, the SBTX switch routes the signal through the 27 GHz low pass filter cable, bypassing the tracking preselector and mixer. The 3 Hz to 3 GHz signal is applied to FL1, the 3 GHz lowpass filter. If the instrument contains Option 1DS (preamplifier) or Option B7J, (digital demod hardware), the signal also routes through them. The signal then enters the A20 Lowband assembly. The A20 Lowband assembly contains both the first and second mixers. The first mixer up-converts the RF signal to the GHz first IF. The first IF signal leaves the Lowband assembly and routes through the switch on the A30 FIFA assembly and then on to FL2, the GHz bandpass filter, before returning to the Lowband assembly. The second mixer down-converts the first IF to the MHz second IF. The second IF is applied as one of the inputs to the A10 Third Converter. Figure 4-1 Example of Down Conversion In the Third Converter, one of three possible MHz IF signals is selected. The signal at J1 is from the highband or microwave port of the RYTHM converter. The signal at J2 is from the A20 Lowband assembly. This can be either the 3 Hz to 3 GHz lowband input signal that has been frequency shifted, or the 26.8 GHz to 50 GHz millimeter band input signal that has been pre-filtered and down-converted in the SBTX and then passed through the second converter. If Option AYZ is present, J3 is the MHz IF input from the external mixer. The MHz signal is fed to the system variable gain circuit that is used to establish gain at 50 MHz as well as compensate for front end frequency response as the instrument tunes across its frequency range. The third converter down-converts the MHz signal to 21.4 MHz. 92 Chapter 4

93 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) Figure 4-2 RF Section Assemblies - E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Item Description 1 J1 Input Connector, 2.4 mm 2 A14 Input Attenuator (10 db)/switch) 3 A15 Input Attenuator (60 db) 4 L-bracket, RF Main 5 A18 YTO, 2.9 to 7 GHz (Yig Tuned Oscillator) 6 A19 SBTX/RYTHM Assembly 7 A20 Low Band Assembly 8 FL1 Low Pass Filter, 3 GHz 9 A21 FELOMA (Frequency Extended LO Multiplying Amplifier) 10 FL2 Band Pass Filter, GHz 11 A22 Preamp Assembly (Option 1DS) 12 A27 Electronic Attenuator (Option B7J) 13 A30 FIFA, First IF Amplifier Assembly 14 A29 SBTX Driver Board Chapter 4 93

94 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) Figure 4-3 Block Diagram with RF Options - E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Option B7J Option 1DS Option AYZ - Digital Demod Hardware. The electronic attenuator works over the lowband frequency range of 100 khz to 3 GHz. In bypass mode, the coax switches in the electronic attenuator board route the RF signal on through to the Lowband board. The electronic attenuator path consists a 40 db, 1 db step solid state attenuator. - Low Band Preamp. In bypass mode, the coax switches route the Low Band RF signal on to the Lowband assembly. When in preamp mode the 30 db gain, low noise figure amplifier path is selected. - External Mixing. Allows an external preselected or unpreselected mm wave mixer to be used with the instrument. 94 Chapter 4

95 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Assembly Quick Check - E4446A, E4447A, E4448A NOTE To perform the following checks, it will be necessary to remove the outer case and the top brace. See Chapter 11 for removal procedures. Turn the instrument on and allow it to complete its internal calibration routines. This routine will generate error messages if the signal level is incorrect through the system. Inject the 50 MHz, 25 dbm calibrator signal to the RF Section by pressing Input/Output, Input Port, Amptd Ref (f = 50 MHz). Set the instrument to CF = 50 MHz, Span = 0 Hz, and the input attenuator to 10 db. Disconnect the cable with the 3 color band from the third converter 21.4 MHz output A10J5. Connect the RF Input of another spectrum analyzer to A10J5. A 21.4 MHz, 30 dbm signal should be present. Verifying a Faulty Front End Assembly E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Overall Front End Finding a fault in the RF front end is best done by breaking the path and monitoring the signal level and frequency with another spectrum analyzer. The signal levels and frequencies are noted on the overall block diagram foldout for given input conditions. In following the first LO, breaking the signal path between the A18 YTO and the A21 FELOMA, or at the Sampler Output of the FELOMA, will cause an unlock condition. This can be resolved by using a power splitter to keep the loop complete and yet facilitate measurement. In doing this, the measured signal level due to loss of the splitter must be taken into account. Since most RF section assemblies are expensive, a suspected faulty assembly should be verified by checking bias voltages and input signals before replacing them. This is best accomplished by improving accessibility of the test points and nodes on the A13 Front End assembly by using the extender boards and cables supplied in the Service Kit E For troubleshooting the RF Section, use the following pieces supplied in the kit: A13 Front End Driver Extender E A13J12 Bias Board E Chapter 4 95

96 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) A14 and A15 Step Attenuators A faulty attenuator can cause improper signal level in both High and Low bands, often in certain combinations of attenuator settings. This can also prevent the 50 MHz calibrator signal from being displayed. Figure 4-4 Attenuator Block Diagram The attenuators receive control signals and supplies from the A13 Front End Driver assembly. A14 is fed from A13J3 and A15 is fed from A13J4. Ground is on pin 3 and the 25V supply is on pin 10. Viewing from the circuit side of the board, the connector pinouts are shown: Figure 4-5 Connector Pinout If the 50 MHz calibrator signal is not displayed, first verify its presence at A14J2. Disconnect the gray W20 cable from the attenuator and monitor the signal coming out of the cable with another spectrum analyzer. The signal should be 50 MHz at 25 dbm. Verify that the attenuator is receiving the proper TTL signals monitoring the points on A13J3 with a scope using the truth table. Input Path Calibrator Path Select J3 pin 2 RF Path Select RF High Low Calibrator Low High 96 Chapter 4

97 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) Improper displayed signal amplitudes in some attenuator settings can be isolated to either A13 or A14 based on which steps are incorrect. Signal out of the attenuators can be measured by disconnecting the appropriate semirigid cable and using a spectrum analyzer. Referring to Figure 4-4, A14 has two 2 db sections and one 6dB section. A15 has a 10 db, a 20 db and a 30 db section. Verify that the attenuators are receiving the correct switching sequences by using the following tables. Table 4-1 A15 Settings Attenuation (db) 30 db Select J4 pin 9 30 db Bypass J4 pin 4 10 db Select J4 pin 2 10 db Bypass J4 pin 1 20 db Select J4 pin 8 20 db Bypass J4 pin 5 0 High Low High Low High Low 10 High Low Low High High Low 20 High Low High Low Low High 30 Low High High Low High Low 40 Low High Low High High Low 50 Low High High Low Low High 60 Low High Low High Low High 70 Low High Low High Low High Table 4-2 A14 Settings Attenuation (db) 2 db - B Select J3 pin 9 2 db - B Bypass J3 pin 4 2 db - A Select J3 pin 8 2 db - A Bypass J3 pin 5 6 db Select J3 pin 7 6 db Bypass J3 pin 6 0 High Low High Low High Low 2 High Low Low High High Low 4 Low High Low High High Low 6 High Low High Low Low High 8 High Low Low High Low High 10 High Low High Low High Low Chapter 4 97

98 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) A21 FELOMA and A29 FELOMA/SBTX Driver Figure 4-6 FELOMA Block Diagram The A21 FELOMA (Frequency Extended LO Multiplier-Amplifier) provides amplitude leveling and distribution of the LO signal from the A18 YTO assembly. For frequency bands 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4, the 3 to 7 GHz LO is distributed to the Lowband or the RYTHM, to the 1 st LO Out port, and to the A12 LO Synthesizer assembly. In frequency bands 5 and 6, the LO frequency is doubled and filtered before being sent to the SBTX. The amplitude leveling of the 3 to 7 GHz LO signal inside FELOMA, biasing, and LO port switching is controlled by the A29 SBTX driver assembly. Some common failure symptoms of a faulty FELOMA or the SBTX driver includes YTO unlocks, increased residual responses, LO unleveled errors, and low signal amplitude in one or more frequency bands. The troubleshooting process below will help you determine which of the two assemblies is faulty. 98 Chapter 4

99 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) Verifying the A21 FELOMA Assembly First check that the YTO signal is present at the LO IN connector by measuring the power at the cable from the YTO. The signal should be 3-7 GHZ at +12 to +17 dbm. Next verify the signals at the LO outputs. The Lowband, RYTHM, LO Out and Sampler outputs all range from 3 GHz to 7 GHz. The SBTX output is doubled, and will range from 6 to 14 GHz. Table 4-3 lists the LO power at the different FELOMA output ports. To verify the SBTX output at J2, set the PSA to a center frequency above 26.8 GHz and set the span to zero Hz. Verify the RYTHM output at J3 by setting the center frequency of the PSA from 3 GHz to 26.5 GHz while in zero span. Notice the table includes some approximate out of band measurements, shown in italics, that can be useful if you suspect a port-to-port isolation problem. Verify the Lowband output at J4 by setting the center frequency of the PSA from 3 Hz to 2.85 GHz while in zero span. Again, additional out of band values are given for isolation purposes. Verify the Sampler output and the 1ST LO outputs while in zero span. Currently the J6 LO Output is not leveled. Table 4-3 Example measurements for FELOMA outputs PSA Center Frequency J2 SBTX Power/Fre q J3 RYTHM Power/Freq J4 Lowband Power/Freq J5 Sampler Power/Freq J6 1 st LO Out Power/Freq 50 MHz NA 21 dbm GHz (typical) +14 dbm GHz 14 dbm GHz +14 dbm GHz 10 GHz NA +13 dbm GHz 25 dbm GHz (typical) 9 dbm GHz +13 dbm GHz 30 GHz +13 dbm GHz 14 dbm GHz (typical) 17 dbm GHz (typical) 11 dbm GHz dbm GHz Chapter 4 99

100 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) Verifying the A29 SBTX/FELOMA Driver Assembly Test points are provided on the A29 SBTX/FELOMA Driver board that allow you to confirm the DC drive levels to the FELOMA assembly are correct. There is a label on the FELOMA assembly that lists the target voltages in milli-volts. Access to the test points is gained by sliding the A29 assembly out of the instrument slightly. 1. Power down the instrument to avoid shorting out the A29 assembly while it is being unseated from the RF chassis. 2. Pull up on the stainless steel spring clip near the center of the assembly, and pull forward on the A29 bracket to slide the assembly 1 to 2 inches out of the instrument. 3. Locate test point 2 near the back of the board, and connect the DVM ground lead to TP2. 4. Connect the other DVM test lead to one of the test points listed in Table Assure the A29 assembly is supported well and cannot short out against anything. 6. Turn on the instrument and set it to zero span and set the center frequency to correspond to the test point chosen in Table Compare the DVM reading to the value documented on the FELOMA label. The values should match ± volts, except for the Int B5 and Int B6 values that must be less that 275 mv, but are usually close to the 350 mv label. Table 4-4 A29 SBTX Driver Board DC Levels To Be Compared With FELOMA Label PSA Center Frequency TP5 VG1 (mv) TP12 VG2 (mv) TP9 LO Level (mv) TP4 SBTX Unleveled (mv) TP11 S Sampler Unleveled (mv) 50 MHz VG1 VG2 Band0 NA S 4 GHz VG1 VG2 Band1 NA S 10 GHz VG1 VG2 Band2 NA S 20 GHz VG1 VG2 Band3/4 NA S 30 GHz NA NA IntB5 SBTX B5 S 50 GHz NA NA IntB5 SBTX B6 S External Mixing Frequency NA NA F Label Value NA NA 100 Chapter 4

101 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) A19 SBTX/RYTHM Assembly The A19 assembly is comprised of the SBTX (switched barium-ferrite tuned filter/mixer), and the RYTHM (routing yig-tuned harmonic mixer). The SBTX and the RYTHM are not separately replaceable. The SBTX provides a switch that routes the input signal to the RYTHM (high band and low band signals) or through the SBTX preselector and mixer (mm band path). The following table lists the frequencies where the switch points occur. Center Frequency (Instrument in zero span) Signal Routed to First Mixer on: 3 Hz to 3 GHz Low band (through SBTX and RYTHM switches) 3.05 GHz to 26.8 GHz RYTHM > 26.8 GHz SBTX The RYTHM bands are bands 1 through 4 whose start (minimum) and stop (maximum) frequencies are shown in the following table: Band Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency GHz 6.6 GHz GHz 13.2 GHz GHz 19.2 GHz GHz 26.5 GHz The mixing equations are: Band 1 F LO = F RF + F IF Band 2 F LO = (F RF + F IF )/2 Band 3, 4 F LO = (F RF + F IF )/4 F IF = MHz Chapter 4 101

102 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) The SBTX bands are bands 5 and 6 whose start (minimum) and stop (maximum) frequencies are shown in the following table: Band Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency GHz 31.5 GHz GHz 50 GHz The mixing equations are: Band 5 F LO = (F RF F IF )/4 Band 6 F LO = (F RF + F IF )/8 F IF = GHz Common failures with SBTX/RYTHM are a damaged input switch due to input overstress, and a faulty preselector. The former can cause signal loss in any one of the three signal paths, or in all signal paths. The latter will cause signal loss or flatness problems in high band or the mm bands above 26.8 GHz. Troubleshooting involves measuring the signal outputs of the A19 SBTX/RYTHM assembly on another spectrum analyzer and monitoring the DC switching voltages on the A29 SBTX/FELOMA Driver assembly. Since the A13 Front End Driver assembly controls the SBTX driver assembly, also verify the A13 assembly is not the cause of the problem. Signal Path Troubleshooting Refer to the E4446A/E4447A/E4448A overall block diagram in Chapter 9. The block diagram outlines instrument settings and input power levels to obtain the measured levels documented in the block diagram. 1. Determine which frequency band or bands are faulty. Do this by connecting the PSA to a signal source and viewing 50 MHz, 5 GHz, and 30 GHz signals. NOTE When setting up the PSA to view any signals above 3 GHz, you must press the Preselector Center key (found under the Amplitude key) to assure the preselector is properly centered. The Preselector Adjust key allows you to manually adjust the preselector, and sometimes a misadjusted preselector can cause 40 to 50 db of signal loss. 102 Chapter 4

103 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) 2. If the problem is in high band or mm band, set the PSA for a start frequency of 3 GHz and stop frequency of 30 GHz. Verify the presence of a sweep ramp on the rear panel PRE-SEL TUNE OUT connector. The oscilloscope display should indicate a series of ramps and steps ranging from approximately 0 to 5 V. This tune ramp originates on the A13 Front End Driver assembly and is used to tune the preselectors in the SBTX/RYTHM assembly. 3. Set the PSA to zero span and use a low loss cable between the measuring spectrum analyzer and the assembly under test. Set up the PSA and the signal source as instructed in the block diagram note (analyzer in zero span, and analyzer and source set to one of several frequencies that correspond to the different signal paths). Measure the signal level at the appropriate output port of the SBTX/RYTHM or cable. Measure the LO input signals at the output ports of A21 FELOMA. 4. The SBTX and RYTHM must be replaced as an entire unit. It is possible to remove the A19FL1 cable and confirm a faulty RYTHM or the SBTX switch. The A19FL1 cable is not separately replaceable. SBTX Control Verification Refer to the A29 FELOMA/SBTX driver troubleshooting information on page 100. Verify that Test Point 4 and Test Point 9 voltages are correct. A18 YTO The YTO (YIG-Tuned Oscillator) supplies the raw 3 to 7 GHz LO signal. Verify that its output is from +12 dbm to +17 dbm. With a DVM, verify the presence of the supplies on the A13 Front End Driver: J7 Pin 4 J7 Pin 5 J7 Pin 7 J7 Pin V 5 V +15 V +15 V Common symptoms of a faulty YTO are YTO Unlock errors, spurious signals, and low signal level at all frequencies. Two current-driven coils are used to tune the YTO. Both coils are used in all spans. The coil drivers are on the A12 LO Synthesizer assembly and the signals route through the A13 Front End Driver. Chapter 4 103

104 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) A20 Lowband The Lowband assembly is the front end converter for frequencies below 3 GHz and the 2 nd converter for input frequencies 26.8 GHz to 50 GHz. The Lowband assembly encompasses both the first and second mixers, the 2 nd LO amplifiers, LO Nulling and filtering. Figure 4-7 Lowband Assembly Block Diagram Mixing equation: F LO = F RF + F IF F IF = GHz 104 Chapter 4

105 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) The 3 Hz to 3 GHz RF input signal enters the Lowband assembly at A20J1. The first component in the RF path is the RF Limiter. This limiter prevents excessive RF energy from damaging the first mixer when the input attenuator is set to zero db. The first mixer up-converts the 3 Hz to 3 GHz signal to the GHz first IF. The first LO, which enters the Lowband assembly from the FELOMA, ranges from to GHz. Following the first mixer is a coupler that routes a portion of the input signal to the first IF overload detector. The first IF signal leaves the Lowband assembly, routes through the switch in the First IF Amplifier (FIFA) and the external first IF bandpass filter, then re-enters the Lowband assembly in the Second Converter section. The second mixer down-converts the GHz first IF to the MHz second IF. The second LO is at 3.6 GHz. LO Nulling is the process of reducing the LO feedthrough signal that appears on screen when the instrument is tuned to 0 Hz. The on-screen LO feedthrough amplitude is typically reduced 30 db. The LO null function can be turned on and off using a switch in the service menu. With LO nulling applied, the LO s phase noise contribution to the analyzer s noise floor is reduced thereby increasing dynamic range. This is important when measuring signals close to 0 Hz. A faulty Lowband assembly will commonly cause low or no signal below 3 GHz, and no LO Nulling. The 3.6 GHz second LO signal is supplied by the A9 Second LO assembly. The second LO is amplified in the Lowband assembly before it is applied to the Second Mixer A failure with the Lowband assembly will likely result in a problem with signals up to 3 GHz and above 26.8 GHz. Start troubleshooting in lowband with a 50 MHz input signal. First check for a signal at the input, A20J1, the First LO at A20J2, and the 2 nd LO at A20J5 by referring to the signal conditions given on the overall block diagram. The 2 nd LO signal can be checked at A20J6. Similarly the first IF signal can be verified at A20J3. Chapter 4 105

106 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) With the PSA set to a center frequency below 3 GHz, and in zero span, check that the bias voltages are present. Some of these can be accessed on the A13J12 Test Connector and some others have test points. With the negative lead of the DVM on A13J12 pin 6, look for values listed in the table. CAUTION Use care when probing connector pins on A13, especially on A13J8. Connector spacings are close and shorting nodes can cause damage. Pin/ Name A13J12 pin1/ 5V_F A13J12 pin2/ 5V_M1LO A13J12 pin3/ 5V_M1IF A13J12 pin4/ 5V_M2LO A13J8 pins 7,8/+3V_LB A13J8 pin25/+5.2v_lb A13J8 pin16/+10v_lb A13TP22/M1LO_ADJ A13TP23/M1IF_ADJ A13TP24/M2LO_ADJ A13TP26/LO_NULL_I_DAC A13TP27/LO_NULL_Q_DAC Nominal Voltage 5 V 5 V 5 V 5 V 3 V 5.2 V 10 V 100 mv 150 mv 100 mv 5 to +5 V 5 to +5 V The remaining biases are 2 nd _LO_PIN and 2 nd _LO_ATTEN. Since these are currents they cannot be directly measured at the Lowband assembly connector. The output of the DAC which controls this ALC circuit on A13 is A13TP25. To help verify that this part of the circuitry which drives the Lowband assembly is functioning correctly, perform the 2 nd LO Power adjustment. 106 Chapter 4

107 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) A13 Front End Driver The Front End Driver assembly contains the circuitry needed to drive the microcircuits and other assemblies used in the RF section. Many of these circuits can be verified using the previous discussions for verifying these assemblies. The voltage values on selected connectors are (with ground connection on A13TP16 top of board near fans): Option 219, Noise Figure, provides a switched 28V (via A13J15) to the rear panel to drive a noise source. Press System, Service, enter the password 49, and press Service, Noise Source to turn on the 28V at J15. This 28V is the result of regulating the +32V power supply voltage on the Front End Driver assembly. If the 28V cannot be turned on or is not 28V ± 0.2V, suspect the Front End Driver or a power supply problem. The RF input attenuator also uses the +32V supply, so if the attenuator also functions incorrectly, suspect an incorrect power supply level. Figure 4-8 Front End Driver Assembly - E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Chapter 4 107

108 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) A22 Low Band Preamplifier (Option 1DS) Figure 4-9 Preamplifier Block Diagram The Low Band Preamp has a nominal gain of 30 db and contains two electro-mechanical coax switches. The frequency range of the preamp is 100 khz to 3 GHz. The input signal level at the preamp should not exceed 30 dbm. To verify its operation, display the 25 dbm, 50 MHz calibrator signal on screen with a 5 MHz span and the input attenuator set to 10 db. Select the Low Band Preamp path by pressing AMPLITUDE, More, Int Preamp On, (listen for a distinctive click ) and measure the signal levels at the input and output with a spectrum analyzer. Also, the displayed signal on the PSA should not change position when the preamplifier is switched in and out, but the noise floor will decrease with the preamp on. Please note that the RF attenuator value may increase, depending on the reference level, causing the noise floor to increase. The preamp is controlled by supply biases and coax switch voltages. A nominal +9 volts should be present at A13J9 pins 2 and 3. Switch voltages can be checked per the table (the ribbon cable must remain attached). Node Off Volts On Volts A13J9 pins 18,19 +COIL A13J9 pin 20 SW A13J9 pin 17 SW Chapter 4

109 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) Figure 4-10 Coax Switch Bias Circuit A27 Electronic Attenuator Description (Option B7J) Purpose: The electronic attenuator facilitates the accurate, frequent, and rapid attenuation that is optimal for digitally modulated signals. The attenuator supplies 40 db of attenuation in 1 db steps. The instrument must be in Basic mode to allow front panel control of the electronic attenuator. Press MODE, Basic, Input/Output, Input Atten. The electronic attenuator is actuated by the instrument firmware during comms measurements. Signal Path: The low band signal is routed from the RYTHM. A switch in the electronic attenuator selects either the bypass path, or the attenuation path. The output signal is routed to the A20 Low Band assembly. Troubleshooting: Select Spectrum Analysis mode. Apply a 50 MHz input signal to the analyzer and select zero span. Measure the signal on the W51 input cable after detaching it from the input connector. Reattach the input cable and measure the power out of the attenuator at J2. In Spectrum mode, the attenuator pads should be bypassed and the output power should be input power minus 0.2 to 0.3 db. Select Basic mode. Press Input/Output and select Input Port Amptd Ref. Set the analyzer center frequency to 50 MHz to display the internal calibration signal. Vary the input attenuation from 0 db to 40 db. The displayed amplitude should vary by less than 1 db. Chapter 4 109

110 Troubleshooting the RF Section (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) RF Section Description (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) 110 Chapter 4

111 5 Troubleshooting the Synthesizer Section 111

112 Troubleshooting the Synthesizer Section What You Will Find in This Chapter What You Will Find in This Chapter NOTE The synthesizer section covers the synthesizer assembly, the reference assembly, and the second LO/fan control assembly. The following information is found in this chapter: 1. Theory of operation for the reference, synthesizer, and 2nd LO sections at the assembly level. 2. Interconnections between assemblies. 3. Isolating the cause of a hardware problem by verifying the assembly functionality. NOTE Each section first describes how the assembly works, then gives information to help you troubleshoot the assembly. Each description explains the purpose of the assembly, describes the main components, and lists external connections to the assembly. Important! The Align All Now routine sets the signal levels on several assemblies. The routine will run automatically if Auto Align is set to On. When troubleshooting, it is recommended that Auto Align be set to Off to give you total control of the instrument. To set Auto Align to Off, press System, Alignments, Auto Align Off. You may want to trigger an alignment from time to time, especially when you replace assemblies. To run Align All Now, press System, Alignments, Align All Now. 112 Chapter 5

113 Troubleshooting the Synthesizer Section A12 Synthesizer Assembly Description A12 Synthesizer Assembly Description Purpose. The A12 synthesizer assembly phase locks the A18 YTO, resulting in a very stable, low phase noise LO signal. The A12 synthesizer assembly consists of sub-assemblies A12A1 LO/Synthesizer board and the A12A2 sample oscillator. It is possible to replace each sub-assembly, or the entire A12 synthesizer. Chapter 5 113

114 Troubleshooting the Synthesizer Section Verifying the A12 Synthesizer Board Verifying the A12 Synthesizer Board Troubleshooting LO and Sampling Oscillator Unlock Conditions: Error messages Sampling Oscillator Unlock, Failure acquiring SO frequency lock This message appears when the 600 MHz signal to the A12A2 is not present. Check the MMCX cable connections on A12W2 between the A12A2 and A12A1 boards. 1St LO unlock, failure acquiring FracN frequency lock This message will also appear when the 1st LO is unlocked for many reasons. It will often appear whenever the sampling oscillator unlock message is displayed. NOTE Perform the Auto Align All routine before beginning troubleshooting. The LO power is adjusted during this internal alignment process. Input signal check Measure the sampler output from the A21 LO distribution amplifier. Since removing the LO signal will cause a 1st LO unlock and an unstable measurement, you must inject a signal into the LO amplifier and measure the signal at the sampler output port. NOTE Please use care when moving the semi rigid cables since they can crack or break, especially at the connector solder joints. The almost invisible cracks can cause residual responses to appear. Power down the PSA. Disconnect W35, the semi-rigid cable from the LO IN port of the A21 LO distribution amplifier. Connect a cable with SMA connectors to a source capable of 4 GHZ and +10 dbm output power. Measure the power level at the end of the cable with a power meter to assure the proper level. Disconnect the power sensor, and connect the cable to the LO IN port of A21. Disconnect the semi-rigid Sampler In cable W24 from J1 of the A12 synthesizer. Connect a spectrum analyzer to the end of this cable. 114 Chapter 5

115 Troubleshooting the Synthesizer Section Verifying the A12 Synthesizer Board Power on the PSA and immediately measure the Sampler out signal amplitude on the spectrum analyzer. The signal should be 4 GHz at 0 dbm. If the PSA's internal auto align runs, the measured signal will change to about -13 dbm. Therefore, perform the measurement during the boot process. Extend the A12 synthesizer using the E extender board. You will need to install the special offset board guides so the extender card will fit into the motherboard connector with out bending the extender board. Also, connect an extender SMA cable between the sampler in cable W24 and J1. Measure the 600 MHz input by connecting the spectrum analyzer and SMA cable to the extender board jack P2. Set the extender board switch in the lower position. The signal should measure 600 MHz at -5 dbm. Measure the 10 MHz input signal by connecting the spectrum analyzer to P3 on the extender board. The 10 MHZ signal should measure +2 dbm. Determining which of the two sub assemblies is faulty The PSA has two major phase lock modes, dual loop mode is used in frequency spans < 2 MHz and single loop mode is used for frequency spans 2 MHz. These frequency breaks occur when the phase noise optimization under the auto couple menu is set to auto. Troubleshooting is performed by placing the PSA in each of the modes to determine where the unlock condition occurs. Chapter 5 115

116 Troubleshooting the Synthesizer Section Verifying the A12 Synthesizer Board Dual Loop troubleshooting If an LO unlock problem occurs only in dual loop mode (span < 2 MHz) the cause is either the A12A2 Sampling Oscillator board or the sampler circuit on the A12A1. The A12A2 board is only used in dual loop mode. To verify the problem is the A12A2 you must measure the sampling oscillator output at A12A2 J1. The following table lists PSA center frequency verses sample oscillator frequency at J1. J1 is a female MMCX connector. Use the MMCX to SMB cable supplied in the service kit. The three frequencies test the low, middle and high frequency range of the sample oscillator. If the frequencies are correct, yet the unlock appears, suspect the A12A1 synthesizer board. If the frequencies are incorrect or there is no output signal, suspect A12A2. PSA settings: Span 100 khz Measuring Spectrum Analyzer: Span 20 khz PSA Center Frequency (MHz) Sampling Oscillator Output (MHz) Power Level dbm dbm dbm Single loop troubleshooting When single loop mode (span 2 MHz) is bad, it will appear that dual loop is also bad, suspect the A12A1 board. E Extender Board The E extender board is used to troubleshoot the A10 3rd Converter, A11 Reference, A12 Synthesizer, and A13 Front End Driver assemblies. Refer to Figure 5-1. There are eight SMB connectors and eight switches on the E extender board. Each switch controls the signal path at the corresponding connector to allow for signal monitoring and injection. For example, switch S6 controls the signal path for connector P6. The following table shows how the switches work: Extender Board Switch Positions Up - Board to SMB Connects SMB connectors to J2. Middle - Board to Mother Connects J1 to J2. Up - SMB to Mother Connects J1 to SMB connectors. 116 Chapter 5

117 Troubleshooting the Synthesizer Section Verifying the A12 Synthesizer Board Figure 5-1 E Extender Board Table 5-1 E Extender Board Jack Descriptions Jack # Signal Assembly that is extended P1 P2 600 MHz 300 MHz 600 MHz 300 MHz A11 Reference Assembly A10 3rd Converter Assembly A12 Synthesizer Assembly A11 Reference Assembly P3 50 MHz Calibrator A10 3rd Converter Assembly P4 10 MHz Syn A11 Reference Assembly P5 10 MHz Opt A11 Reference Assembly P6 10 MHz CPU A11 Reference Assembly P7 10 MHz FE Driver A11 Reference Assembly P8 10 MHz Analog IF A11 Reference Assembly Chapter 5 117

118 Troubleshooting the Synthesizer Section A11 Reference Assembly Description A11 Reference Assembly Description Purpose. The A11 reference assembly provides a phase locked 10 MHz signal to other boards and assemblies in the instrument. The 10 MHz reference is phase locked either to an internal reference source or to an externally applied signal. Any external signal between 1 MHz and 30 MHz can be selected by the user to phase lock the 10 MHz reference signal. Signal Path. The 10 MHz signal is routed to the A12 synthesizer assembly, the A8 analog IF assembly, the A26 CPU assembly, the A13 front end driver board, the option slots on the A25 motherboard, and the rear panel 10 MHz output connector. In addition, a 50 MHz signal and a 300 MHz signal are routed to the A10 3rd converter assembly. The 50 MHz signal is used for calibration purposes, and is switched on when amplitude calibration is performed. The 300 MHz signal is used as a second LO for the 3rd Converter assembly, and is always active. The reference assembly utilizes a phase-lock loop which provides stabilization for all the internal reference oscillators used throughout the instrument. The reference assembly performs the following function: phase locks the 100 MHz VCXO to, either, an internal 10 MHz frequency reference, or to an external standard, user selectable between 1 MHz and 30 MHz. provides a phase-locked 300 MHz (100 MHz 3) 3rd LO signal to the A10 3rd Converter assembly. provides a phase-locked 600 MHz (100 MHz 6) signal to the A9 2nd LO assembly. provides a 600 MHz (100 MHz 6) signal to the A12 Synthesizer assembly. provides the reference unlock detector which, through the A26 CPU assembly, warns the user that the reference lock loop is unlocked. provides a phase-locked 50 MHz (100 MHz 2) internal calibrator signal to the A10 3rd Converter assembly. provides the 10 MHz phase-locked reference for various assemblies in the instrument. 118 Chapter 5

119 Troubleshooting the Synthesizer Section A11 Reference Assembly Description 100 MHz VCXO The 100 MHz voltage controlled crystal oscillator is used as the main reference in the instrument. It is phase-locked with either an internal or external frequency reference. The overall frequency accuracy of the instrument is determined by the accuracy of the frequency reference. 300 MHz Outputs There are two 300 MHz outputs. The first 300 MHz output provides the 3rd LO signal and the LO signal for the IF calibrator on the A10 3rd Converter assembly. 600 MHz Outputs There are two 600 MHz outputs. One is routed to the A12 Synthesizer assembly, and the other is routed to the A9 2nd LO assembly. Reference Unlock Detector If the A11 reference assembly is not receiving the correct reference signal, an unlock error message will appear in red text in the annunciator bar on the front panel. This state is detected by the A26 CPU assembly from the A11 reference assembly. 50 MHz Calibrator Output The 50 MHz (100 MHz 2) internal calibrator is used to perform background calibration on various assemblies in the instrument. This signal is routed to the A10 3rd Converter assembly where it is level shifted. 10 MHz Outputs The 100 MHz VCXO, which is phase locked to a frequency reference, is divided by ten, resulting in a 10 MHz signal. This signal is used on various assemblies in the instrument, including the A26 CPU, A13 front end driver, A8 analog IF, A12 synthesizer assembly, and the 10 MHz output to the rear panel (switched). Interconnections to other assemblies A11P1. External reference input (1 to 30 MHz) from rear panel. A11P2. 10 MHz output to rear panel. Chapter 5 119

120 Troubleshooting the Synthesizer Section Verifying the A11 Reference Board Verifying the A11 Reference Board The instrument achieves its frequency stability from the phase locked circuitry on the A11 reference assembly. The 100 MHz phase locked VCXO is the heart of this assembly. This VCXO is divided by 10 to a phase locked 10 MHz reference for use on several other PC board assemblies in the instrument. The 100 MHz VCXO is also multiplied by 3 for the 2nd L.O. in the RF assembly. The 50 MHz internal calibrator signal is derived from this assembly as well by dividing the 100 MHz VCXO by 2. Verify the 10 MHz references by extending the reference assembly. Reference Assembly Quick Check This procedure checks the 600 MHz output level, the rear panel 10 MHz Ref Out level, and the 300 MHz output at P4. Setup 1. The instrument should be turned on, and a factory Preset performed. Press the green Preset key. (If necessary press System, Power On/Preset, Preset Type and select Factory. 2. Assure the instrument is set to internal reference by pressing System, Reference, and making sure that the Freq Ref key has Int underlined. 3. Turn on the rear panel 10 MHz Ref Out by pressing the 10 MHz Out key until On is underlined. This will allow the 10 MHz Out signal to be present at the rear panel connector and at the reference board P2 jack. Measure the 600 MHz Out Signal 4. Disconnect the 4 cable (W16, refer to Figure on page 282 for the location) from P3 on the reference assembly. Measure P3 by connecting a low loss SMA cable and SMA to SMB adapter between P3 and a spectrum analyzer. The 600 MHz output signal should measure +13 dbm ±3 db. NOTE A 2nd LO unlock message will appear on the PSA screen. The 600 MHz amplitude measurement is still valid. 5. Reconnect the 4 cable to P3. Clear the 2nd LO unlock condition by performing an Align All Now. Press System, Alignments, Align All Now. You will need to clear the error queue to remove the 2nd LO unlock message. Press System, Show Errors, Clear Error Queue. 120 Chapter 5

121 Troubleshooting the Synthesizer Section Verifying the A11 Reference Board Measure the 10 MHz Rear Panel Output 6. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the 10 MHz Out (Switched) BNC connector on the PSA rear panel. The 10 MHz signal amplitude should be +6 dbm ±2 db. Measure the 300 MHz Out at P4 7. Connect the spectrum analyzer to P4 on the reference assembly. The 300 MHz amplitude should be 27 dbm ±2 db. Reference Assembly Detailed Troubleshooting The reference assembly is placed on the E extender board so additional signal levels can be measured. 1. Turn off the PSA and remove the reference assembly from the instrument. Refer to Chapter 11 for removal procedures. 2. Place the reference assembly on the extender board and assure the 4 cable (W16, 600 MHz Out) is connected to P3 on the reference assembly. 3. Turn the instrument on and perform a factory preset. Measure the 600 MHz Output to the Synthesizer Assembly 4. Connect a low loss SMA cable and SMA to SMB adapter between P1 (600 MHz) on the extender board and a spectrum analyzer. Set the 600 MHz switch on the extender board in the up position to connect P1 to the 600 MHz output from the reference assembly. The 600 MHz signal should measure 11 dbm. Measure the 10 MHz Signals to Other Assemblies 5. Measure the 10 MHz signal listed in the following table. Set the switch controlling the jack to the up position. Extender Board Jack Designator P6 10 MHz CPU P7 10 MHz FE driver P5 10 MHz Option P8 10 MHz AIF P4 10 MHz Syn Signal Level +6 dbm +3 dbm +3 dbm +3 dbm +3 dbm Chapter 5 121

122 Troubleshooting the Synthesizer Section A9 Second LO/Fan Control Assembly Description A9 Second LO/Fan Control Assembly Description Second LO Circuitry Purpose. The A9 second LO assembly generates the 3.9 GHz LO signal that is used by the A20 low band assembly to generate the low band second IF signal of MHz. The A9 board also contains unlock detection circuitry, that indicates an unlock condition when it occurs on the assembly. Signal Path. The 600 MHz signal from the A11 reference assembly is routed to a phase detector that compares the phase of the 600 MHz signal with the output of the PMYO. Fan Control Circuitry Purpose. The three fans used to cool the various assemblies in the instrument are controlled through circuitry located on the A9 assembly. The speed of the fans varies with changes in internal instrument temperature; as temperature increases, fan speed increases. The front-panel line switch, that turns the power supply on and off, is input from the A9 assembly fan control circuitry. An over-temperature circuit is provided that will turn off the instrument if an over-heating condition in the instrument occurs. Interconnections to other assemblies A9J1 600 MHz input from A11 Reference assembly A9J GHz output to A20 Lowband assembly A9J11 and J12 Trigger outputs to rear panel 122 Chapter 5

123 Troubleshooting the Synthesizer Section Verifying the A9 2nd LO/ Fan Control Board Verifying the A9 2nd LO/ Fan Control Board If the Fans Are Not Operating CAUTION The power supply may be in thermal shutdown if the instrument has been operating without the fans running. Allow the instrument to cool down before troubleshooting. If all three fans are not operating, suspect a power supply problem or a defective fan control circuit on the A9 2nd LO/Fan Control assembly. Refer to A5 Power Supply Assembly Description on page 153 to check the individual supplies. If the supplies are within specifications, the most probable cause is a defective A9 board. Refer to Chapter 11 for assembly replacement procedures. If only one or two fans are not functioning, and the power supplies are within specifications, suspect the A9 assembly or a defective fan. 1. Remove the front frame from the instrument. Refer to Chapter 11 for removal procedures. 2. Refer to Figure 5-2. Measure all of the fan voltages at J3, J4, and J5 on the motherboard. Figure 5-2 Fan Voltages Chapter 5 123

124 Troubleshooting the Synthesizer Section Verifying the A9 2nd LO/ Fan Control Board 3. If the correct voltage is present and the fan connector is in good mechanical condition, suspect a defective fan. Refer to Chapter 11 for assembly replacement procedures. 4. If the voltage is not present, suspect a defective A9 assembly. Refer to Chapter 11 for assembly replacement procedures. Verifying Correct Input and Output Levels Disconnect W16 from J1. Measure W16, 600 MHz from the A11 Reference assembly with a spectrum analyzer. The power level should be +12 dbm. Disconnect the semi-rigid cable W15 at J10. Measure the 3.6 GHz +2 dbm signal at J10 with a spectrum analyzer. Be sure to use a quality SMA cable to connect the analyzer to J10 to avoid excessive cable loss. 124 Chapter 5

125 6 Troubleshooting the IF Section 125

126 Troubleshooting the IF Section What You Will Find in This Chapter What You Will Find in This Chapter The following information is presented in this chapter: 1. Theory of operation of the 3rd converter section and the IF section. 2. Isolating the cause of an hardware problem by verifying the functionality of assemblies in the IF section signal path. NOTE Each of the following sections first describes how the assembly works, then gives information to help you troubleshoot the assembly. Each description explains the purpose of the assembly, describes the main components, and lists external connections to the assembly. This following sections are found in this chapter: Third Converter Assembly Description...page 127 Verifying the Third Converter Board...page 129 Analog IF Assembly Description...page 133 Verifying the Analog IF Assembly Signal Path...page 136 Digital IF Assembly Description...page 139 Verifying the Digital IF Assembly...page 141 NOTE Information regarding the Option 122 or 140 Wideband IF assemblies can be found under the Hardware Options tab of this service guide. 126 Chapter 6

127 Troubleshooting the IF Section A10 Third Converter Assembly Description A10 Third Converter Assembly Description Purpose: The 3rd converter assembly levels the MHz IF to compensate for system loss, before mixing the MHz IF to a 21.4 MHz IF. The 3rd converter also provides the 50 MHz and the MHz calibrator signals. Path: Three inputs supply the MHz IF signal to the 3rd converter: (1) an input from the low band assembly, (2) an input from the RYTHM, and (3), an optional IF input from the front-panel on instruments with Option AYZ (external mixing). After input filtering, the variable gain amplification circuitry compensates for system loss. The 321 IF is then mixed with a 300 MHz IF from the reference assembly before being routed to the A8 analog IF assembly. In addition, both the 50 MHz and the MHz cal signals are processed through the 3rd converter and routed to the A14 input attenuator. Step Attenuator Provide 30 db of attenuation available in 2 db steps. System Variable Gain Compensation Circuitry The variable gain circuitry provides flatness compensation over the frequency range of the analyzer. The gain setting depends on stored flatness compensation values. The frequency response adjustment gathers and stores these values. Linearization Circuit The circuitry that provides flatness compensation for the MHz signal is non-linear. The linearization circuit, which is driven by the variable ramp generator on the A13 front end driver board, adjusts the amplification of the variable gain circuitry so that the resulting flatness compensation throughout low and high bands is linear. 50 MHz Calibrator ALC The 50 MHz levelling loop ensures that the 25 dbm, 50 MHz calibrator signal is stable and accurate. This 50 MHz signal is routed to the A14 attenuator for system level calibration. This signal is routed through pin 24 on J MHz Filter The MHz bandpass filter has a 10 MHz bandwidth and image rejection of 73 dbc. Chapter 6 127

128 Troubleshooting the IF Section A10 Third Converter Assembly Description MHz Cal Signal Mixer The 300 MHz signal from the reference assembly (via the motherboard) is summed with the 21.4 MHz signal received from the A8 analog IF assembly. The MHz calibration signal is used during the internal Align All Now routine to calibrate the bandwidth shapes. This signal can be turned on manually on instruments containing Option B7J. See Isolating the faulty assembly when the displayed amplitude is incorrect or the instrument fails a gain related Auto Align test on page 53. 3rd Mixer Down converts MHz to 21.4 MHz. The 300 MHz LO signal is provided by the A11 Reference assembly. Interconnections to other assemblies A10J MHz input from A19 RYTHM A10J MHz input from A20 Lowband assembly A10J3 optional MHz input, used on Option AYZ A10J4 to rear panel MHz Output, or input to A33, Option H70 A10J MHz to A8 Analog IF assembly A10J6 optional calibrator input A10J7 to A14 attenuator (50 MHz cal out or MHz) 128 Chapter 6

129 Troubleshooting the IF Section Verifying the A10 Third Converter Board E4440A, E4443A, E4445A, E4446A, E4448A) Verifying the A10 Third Converter Board E4440A, E4443A, E4445A, E4446A, E4448A) Begin the troubleshooting process by examining the instrument overall block diagram. Please note the analyzer settings required to obtain the signal levels printed on the block diagram. Third Converter Troubleshooting Input Level Check 1. With the PSA tuned to a 25 dbm, 50 MHz signal, disconnect cable W18 from J2 and connect a spectrum analyzer to W18. Refer to Figure 10-8 on page 260 for locations. The MHz signal from the lowband assembly should measure 43 dbm ±2 db. Reconnect W18 to J2. 2. With the PSA tuned to a 25 dbm, 5 GHz signal, disconnect W17 from J1 and connect a spectrum analyzer to W17. The MHz signal should measure -49 dbm ±2 db. Reconnect W17 to J1. Output Level Check 3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to J5. The 21.4 MHz signal should be 30 dbm ±2 db. Reconnect W11 to J5. 4. Connect the spectrum analyzer to J4, the MHz output port. The signal level should be 27 dbm ±2 db. Measure the 300 MHz 3rd LO 5. Use the extender board E to extend the 3rd converter. Reconnect the cables color coded 3, 7, 10, and 50. A short extension cable may be necessary for the 10 and 50 cables. Allow the instrument to complete the auto-align once the 3rd converter is extended. 6. Connect a spectrum analyzer to P1 on the extender board and set the extender board switch that controls P1 to the down position to measure the +10 dbm, 300 MHz signal 50 MHz Calibrator Level Check 7. Connect the spectrum analyzer to P3 on the extender board. Set the 50 MHz switch on the extender board to the up position. Assure the 50 MHz calibrator is turned on by pressing Input/Output, Input Port, Amptd Ref. The spectrum analyzer should display a 40 dbm signal at 50 MHz. Chapter 6 129

130 Troubleshooting the IF Section Verifying the A10 Third Converter Board E4440A, E4443A, E4445A, E4446A, E4448A) Option AYZ IF Input Check This procedure will check for proper gain through the 3 rd converter when the external mixing path is enabled. Setting the Synthesized Sweeper Power Level 1. Zero and calibrate the low-power sensor and power meter in dbm mode using the 30 db reference attenuator. Enter the 300 MHz calibration factor of the power sensor into the power meter. 2. Connect an SMA cable from the output of a source to the power sensor using an adapter between the cable and the power sensor. 3. Set the source frequency to MHz. Adjust the source power level for a power meter reading of 30 dbm ± 0.1 db. 4. Record the power meter reading as Input Power. Input Power dbm Measuring the IF INPUT Accuracy 5. Connect the SMA cable from the RF OUTPUT of the source to the IF INPUT of the analyzer. 6. Press Preset on the analyzer. Press Factory Preset, if it is displayed. Set the analyzer by pressing the following keys: Amplitude, More 1 of 2, Corrections, Apply Corrections No Input/Output, Input Mixer, Input Mixer Ext Ext Mix Band, GHz FREQUENCY, 30 GHz SPAN, Zero Span BW/Avg, Res BW, 1 khz 7. Press Peak Search on the analyzer. Record the marker (Mkr1) amplitude reading as the Measured Power. Measured Power dbm 8. Subtract the Input Power (step 4) from the Measured Power (step 7) and record the difference as the IF INPUT Accuracy. IF INPUT Accuracy = Measured Power Input Power For example, if the Measured Power is dbm and the Input Power is dbm, the IF INPUT Accuracy would be 0.1 db. 9. The IF INPUT accuracy should be less than ±0.3 db. 10.If the IF INPUT accuracy exceeds ±0.3 db perform the IF Input adjustment before troubleshooting a faulty 3 rd converter or variable gain range from the A13 Front End Driver. 130 Chapter 6

131 Troubleshooting the IF Section Verifying the A10 Third Converter Board (E4447A) Verifying the A10 Third Converter Board (E4447A) Begin the troubleshooting process by examining the instrument overall block diagram. Please note the analyzer settings required to obtain the signal levels printed on the block diagram. Third Converter Troubleshooting Input Level Check CAUTION Do not attempt to disconnect W18 at J2. This cable is not removable. 1. With the PSA tuned to a 25 dbm, 5 GHz signal, disconnect W17 from J1 and connect a spectrum analyzer to W17. Refer to Figure 10-8 on page 260 for locations. The MHz signal from the RYTHM assembly should measure -49 dbm ±2 db. Reconnect W17 to J1. Output Level Check 2. Connect the spectrum analyzer to J5. The 21.4 MHz signal should be 30 dbm ±2 db. Reconnect W11 to J5. Measure the 300 MHz 3rd LO 3. Connect a spectrum analyzer to P4 on the A11 Reference board to measure the 27 dbm, 300 MHz signal. 50 MHz Calibrator Level Check (also an alternate method for all PSA analyzers 4. Remove W20 from J7 on the 3rd converter. Connect a spectrum analyzer to J7. Assure the 50 MHz calibrator is turned on by pressing Input/Output, Input Port, Amptd Ref. The spectrum analyzer should display a 25 dbm signal at 50 MHz. Option AYZ IF Input Check This procedure will check for proper gain through the 3 rd converter when the external mixing path is enabled. Setting the Synthesized Sweeper Power Level 1. Zero and calibrate the low-power sensor and power meter in dbm mode using the 30 db reference attenuator. Enter the 300 MHz calibration factor of the power sensor into the power meter. 2. Connect an SMA cable from the output of a source to the power Chapter 6 131

132 Troubleshooting the IF Section Verifying the A10 Third Converter Board (E4447A) sensor using an adapter between the cable and the power sensor. 3. Set the source frequency to MHz. Adjust the source power level for a power meter reading of 30 dbm ± 0.1 db. 4. Record the power meter reading as Input Power. Input Power dbm Measuring the IF INPUT Accuracy 5. Connect the SMA cable from the RF OUTPUT of the source to the IF INPUT of the analyzer. 6. Press Preset on the analyzer. Press Factory Preset, if it is displayed. Set the analyzer by pressing the following keys: Amplitude, More 1 of 2, Corrections, Apply Corrections No Input/Output, Input Mixer, Input Mixer Ext Ext Mix Band, GHz FREQUENCY, 30 GHz SPAN, Zero Span BW/Avg, Res BW, 1 khz 7. Press Peak Search on the analyzer. Record the marker (Mkr1) amplitude reading as the Measured Power. Measured Power dbm 8. Subtract the Input Power (step 4) from the Measured Power (step 7) and record the difference as the IF INPUT Accuracy. IF INPUT Accuracy = Measured Power Input Power For example, if the Measured Power is dbm and the Input Power is dbm, the IF INPUT Accuracy would be 0.1 db. 9. The IF INPUT accuracy should be less than ±0.3 db. 10.If the IF INPUT accuracy exceeds ±0.3 db perform the IF Input adjustment before troubleshooting a faulty 3 rd converter or variable gain range from the A13 Front End Driver. 132 Chapter 6

133 Troubleshooting the IF Section A8 Analog IF Assembly Description A8 Analog IF Assembly Description Purpose. The A8 analog IF assembly receives a 21.4 MHZ signal from the A10 3rd Converter. The 21.4 MHz signal is amplified, pre-filtered, mixed with the 28.9 MHz fourth LO to provide a 7.5 MHz final IF, post filtered, and amplified again. The analog IF assembly also provides anti-alias filter protection, and routes the 21.4 MHz signal, that is used in ranging, to the A7 digital IF assembly. The analog IF assembly performs the following functions: prefilters the 21.4 MHz third IF frequency uses a variable gain amplifier to provide the optimum level to the mixer provides a 21.4 MHz anti-alias filter provides the final down conversion performs post down-conversion filtering provides calibrator oscillator and sample rate oscillator provides a clock generator performs frequency down conversion to 7.5 MHz triggering provides the power supply switching frequency generator Pre-filters LC and XTAL prefilters are used to attenuate the out of band signals that are not in the measurement bandwidth, in order to improve TOI distortion and spurious responses. The pre-filters are adjusted to 2.5 times the resolution bandwidth, except in RBWs less than 1 khz and greater than 1.2 MHz. If the resolution bandwidth is less than 1 khz, the XTAL prefilter bandwidth stays at 2.5 khz. If the resolution bandwidth is 1.2 MHz or wider, the prefilters are bypassed. Main Gain Amplifier Provides the following functions: Sets the gain between the 21.4 MHz input on the Analog IF, to the A7 Digital IF Assembly output. This is accomplished during the Auto Align routine by reading the power detector at the input of the Analog IF assembly. Then, adjusting the main gain until the proper signal level is achieved. When the prefilter BW is changed, compensates for amplitude changes. When the frequency band is changed, compensates for conversion loss. Chapter 6 133

134 Troubleshooting the IF Section A8 Analog IF Assembly Description 21.4 MHz Anti-Alias Filter This filter serves two purposes. First, it rejects the image band at 31.4 MHz to 41.4 MHz. Second, it band limits the signal to a width of 10 MHz, and so provides much of the anti-alias filtering for the ADC. Mixer The third mixer converts the incoming 21.4 MHz third IF down to the final IF at 7.5 MHz. This is accomplished by mixing the 21.4 MHz third IF with a 28.9 MHz LO. The difference frequency is 7.5 MHz. Fourth L.O. The 28.9 MHz LO signal is phase locked to the 10 MHz frequency reference from the A11 reference assembly. Post Down Conversion Filtering There are two post-mixing filters for the 7.5 MHz final IF. The 12.5 MHz low pass filter removes high order mixing products from the third LO, as well as the 21.4 MHz feed-through. The 2 MHz wide, 7.5 MHz band pass filter provides additional filtering for narrow resolution bandwidths, and is used to improve spurious free dynamic-range. The 12.5 MHz LPF is switched in when the pre-filters are bypassed (RBW > 1.2 MHz), or when in LC pre-filter BW 1.41 MHz (RBW 620 khz) and 2.83 MHz (RBW 1.1 MHz). Calibration Generator Creates a 21.4 MHz signal which is routed to the A10 3rd Converter. The 3rd converter up converts to MHz and this signal is used during the auto align routine for the adjustment of the filter bandwidths and amplitude settings of the AIF and DIF assembly. NOTE Press: System, Alignments, Align All Now to execute the auto align routine. Clock Generator The clock is a 30MSa/s differential ECL clock that is distributed on the motherboard to the digital IF as SR_L and SR_H (Sample Rate low and high). The clock generator is locked to the 10 MHz reference signal. 134 Chapter 6

135 Troubleshooting the IF Section A8 Analog IF Assembly Description Triggering The analog IF assembly has a second IF strip for generating triggers. Power Supply Switching Reference This circuit provide a 244 khz switching frequency to the A5 power supply. The A5 power supply divides this frequency in half, therefore, the power supply switching rate is 122 khz. Interconnections to other assemblies Front panel external trigger input at P4 Rear panel external trigger input at P1 Chapter 6 135

136 Troubleshooting the IF Section Verifying the A8 Analog IF Assembly Signal Path Verifying the A8 Analog IF Assembly Signal Path This procedure assumes the A10 3rd Converter assembly is functioning correctly. To verify proper 3rd Converter functionality, refer to the Verifying the A10 Third Converter Board E4440A, E4443A, E4445A, E4446A, E4448A) on page 129. Analog IF Assembly Quick Check 1. Inject a 25 dbm, 50 MHz signal into the RF input of the instrument. 2. Press Preset on the instrument and tune to 50 MHz by pressing Input, Input Port, RF, Frequency 50 MHz. 3. Press Amplitude and set the input attenuation to 0 db. 4. Disconnect the flexible gray cable (W10) going into the A7 digital IF assembly at A7P1. Refer to Figure on page 282 for cable locations. 5. Connect a calibrated spectrum analyzer to the end of this flexible cable, and measure the 7.5 MHz output from the analog IF assembly going to the digital IF assembly. 6. If the analog IF assembly is operating properly, the 7.5 MHz 4th IF out of the Analog IF assembly will measure 23 dbm ±1 db, on the calibrated spectrum analyzer. 7. Reconnect the cable to A7P Chapter 6

137 Troubleshooting the IF Section Verifying the A8 Analog IF Assembly Signal Path Analog IF Assembly Detailed Troubleshooting If the quick check power level is not correct, or you still suspect the assembly is faulty, other items can be checked to verify the analog IF assembly. Refer to the instrument block diagram. The incoming 21.4 MHz signal is routed through one of three prefilter paths depending on the instrument resolution bandwidth setting. A signal level problem may only be visible in certain resolution bandwidths. The table below shows which prefilter path is used at different resolution bandwidth settings. Resolution Bandwidth Pre-Filter Path 1 Hz to 75 khz XTAL 82 khz to 1.1 MHz LC 1.2 MHz and above Bypass Main Gain Check Under the conditions listed on the overall block diagram (CF = 50 MHz), the DAC that adjusts the AIF Main Gain amplifier is typically set to a DAC value between 90 and 1300, depending on instrument model number and hardware version. Current typical values for E4440A/E4443A/E4445A are 500 to Values for E4446A/E4447A/E4448A are 90 to 300. To view the Main Gain DAC value, enter the service mode, then view the HW Diagnostics. Press System, More, Service, -49, Enter, Service, More, Diagnostics, HW Diag On, IF Ctrl. The Main Gain DAC value is displayed on a key. The DAC range is 0 to If the DAC value is at a range limit, suspect a problem with instrument signal path levels and troubleshoot the signal path. Chapter 6 137

138 Troubleshooting the IF Section Verifying the A8 Analog IF Assembly Signal Path Testing the Cal Osc Signal The 21.4 MHz Cal Osc HI and Cal Osc LO signals are routed through the motherboard to the A10 Third Converter. The E extender board has test jacks for both of these signals. The following waveform was taken using an oscilloscope with a SMB to BNC cable connected to a BNC tee/50 ohm load at the oscilloscope input connector. The waveform is only visible while the Auto Align Now routine is running. 138 Chapter 6

139 Troubleshooting the IF Section A7 Digital IF Assembly Descriptions A7 Digital IF Assembly Descriptions Two versions of the A7 Digital IF assembly are available. Instruments with Option 124 (Video Out) or Option 122 or 140 (Wideband IF) contain the optional Digital IF assembly E This assembly requires slightly different troubleshooting techniques than the standard assembly. Therefore when following the procedures below be careful to use the correct information for the digital IF installed in your instrument. Purpose: The A7 digital IF assembly digitizes the 7.5 MHz final IF, by processing the time domain continuous data into I/Q (in-phase and quadrature) signals, and delivers the data to the CPU for further processing and display. The digital IF assembly performs the following main functions: digitizes the 7.5 MHz IF pre-adjusts the variable amplifier for optimum ADC input levels using the gain range/select rules circuitry performs analog to digital conversion performs dither generation provides video out (Option 124) Final IF overload detection 7.5 MHz IF The 7.5 MHz IF comes from the A8 analog IF assembly. The maximum input level to the A7 digital IF assembly is +4 dbm. Exceeding this level will cause distortion and will clip the ADC causing erroneous measurement results. Gain Range Select/Rules This input path is a tapped 21.4 MHz 3rd IF from the A8 analog IF assembly, which bypasses the 10 MHz anti-alias filters. The gain range of the variable amplifier before the ADC is 0 to 18 db (in 6 db steps). The gain range select/rules pre-adjusts the variable amplifier for optimum ADC input levels before the 7.5 MHz third IF arrives at the ADC. Overdriving the ADC will cause distortion and will clip the ADC, resulting in erroneous measurements. Offset Adjust and Dither These signals are requirements for the complex ADC chip to function properly. The dither generator adds noise to the ADC, which converts quantization errors into noise, and the noise on the signal can be removed. Chapter 6 139

140 Troubleshooting the IF Section A7 Digital IF Assembly Descriptions Interconnections to other assemblies A7P1 7.5 MHz in from A8 Analog IF assembly. SR_H (Sample Rate High) and SR_L (Sample Rate Low) clock signals from the A8 Analog IF assembly. 140 Chapter 6

141 Troubleshooting the IF Section Verifying the A7 Digital IF Board Verifying the A7 Digital IF Board This procedure assumes the A10 3rd Converter assembly and the A8 analog IF assembly are functioning correctly. To verify proper functionality, refer to the Verifying the A10 Third Converter Board E4440A, E4443A, E4445A, E4446A, E4448A) on page 129 and Verifying the A8 Analog IF Assembly Signal Path on page 136. Evaluating the performance of the digital IF board involves: measuring the input signal prior to the analog to digital conversion. verifying proper clock signals. Digital IF Assembly Quick Check The A7 digital IF assembly requires a 30 MHz clock from the A8 analog IF assembly or the instrument will not boot. 1. Inject a 25 dbm, 50 MHz signal into the RF input of the instrument. 2. Press Preset on the instrument and tune to 50 MHz by pressing Input, Input Port, RF, Frequency 50 MHz. 3. Press Span, Zero Span. 4. Set the input attenuation to 10 db. Press Amplitude, Attenuation and enter 10 db. 5. Connect a calibrated spectrum analyzer to A7TP5 (for E or E ). If A7 is E , connect to P The 7.5 MHz IF power level at A7TP5 should measure 21 dbm ±2 db on the calibrated spectrum analyzer if the circuitry up to the ADC is operating correctly. 7. Check the other ADC range settings by entering the service mode and selecting each range. 8. Press System, More, Service, -49, Enter, Service, More, Diagnostics, HW Diag On, ADC Range Manual. ADC Range Power TP5 ±1 db 0 db 39 dbm +6 db 33 dbm +12 db 27 dbm +18 db 21 dbm None N.A. Chapter 6 141

142 Troubleshooting the IF Section Verifying the A7 Digital IF Board 9. If your instrument contains Option 124 Video Out, See the Option 124 Troubleshooting section of this service guide for details on verifying the video out port. Digital IF Assembly Detailed Troubleshooting If the quick check power level is not correct, other items can be checked to verify the A7 digital IF assembly. The remaining detailed checks require the digital IF assembly to be placed on an extender board (p/n E ). Turn the instrument off before removing a PC board assembly from the instrument. Measure the voltages on the extender board. If the levels are incorrect, or the clock measurements (using an oscilloscope) from Figure 6-1 are incorrect, suspect the A7 digital IF assembly as being defective. Figure 6-1 A7 Clock Measurements (E , E ) 142 Chapter 6

143 Troubleshooting the IF Section Verifying the A7 Digital IF Board Figure 6-2 A7 Clock Measurements Options 122 or 140, and 124 (E ) Chapter 6 143

144 Troubleshooting the IF Section Verifying the A7 Digital IF Board 144 Chapter 6

145 7 Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display 145

146 Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display What You Will Find in This Chapter What You Will Find in This Chapter The following information is presented in this chapter: 1. Theory of operation of the CPU, power supply, and display sections along with descriptions of the motherboard, front panel interface assembly and SCSI Interface board. 2. Isolating the cause of an hardware problem by verifying the functionality of assemblies in these sections. NOTE Each section first describes how the assembly works, then gives information to help you troubleshoot the assembly. Each description explains the purpose of the assembly, describes the main components, and lists external connections to the assembly. This following sections are found in this chapter: Motherboard Description...page 147 CPU Assembly Description...page 148 Verifying the CPU Assembly...page 149 Power Supply Description...page 153 Isolating a Power Supply Problem...page 154 SCSI Interface Board Description...page 158 Front Frame Description...page 159 Keyboard Description...page 159 Front-Panel Interface Description...page 159 Display Description...page 159 Disk Drive...page Chapter 7

147 Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display A25 Motherboard Description A25 Motherboard Description Purpose. The A25 Motherboard provides the following functions: Provides a load to the power supply assembly for the +9 V, 5.2 V, 15 V, +5.2 V supply lines. This allows a minimum set of PC board assemblies to be present for power supply operation. See the power supply troubleshooting section of this manual for a list of minimum assemblies required. This will help isolate power supply problems. Provides regulated +12 V and 12 V supplies to the CPU assembly. Provides interconnections between many assemblies. Location of the on/off switch. Chapter 7 147

148 Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display A26 CPU Assembly Description A26 CPU Assembly Description Purpose. The A26 CPU (processor) assembly consists of three boards: the base CPU processor board, the A26A1 128M DRAM card, and the A26A2 Flash memory board. The operating system, the main firmware, measurement applications, and the IP address and saved states, are stored in Flash memory. If the original CPU board fails, all this information can be transferred to a replacement CPU board by transferring the A26A2 Flash board. The CPU board contains the instrument serial number. There are several I/O connections on the rear panel of the instrument. Many of these connectors are soldered directly into the CPU board or plug into the CPU. These connections include the following: SCSI-2 connector. (Factory use only) Parallel interface connector. Used to connect the instrument to a parallel printer. LAN connector. Used for instrument control and for downloading firmware into the instrument. GPIB. Used for instrument control and automated testing and remote control operation. Keyboard connector. Used for connecting an external PS-2 keyboard. Keyboard functionality is limited to factory/field service. RS-232 connector. (Factory use only) VGA monitor output connector. Used to connect an external, non-interlaced VGA compatible monitor with a signal that has 31.5 khz horizontal/60 Hz vertical synchronization rate. 148 Chapter 7

149 Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display Verifying the A26 CPU Assembly Verifying the A26 CPU Assembly The A26 CPU assembly slides into the instrument from the rear and connects to the A25 Motherboard assembly. The GP-IB interface connector, LAN connector, RS-232 connector, Parallel Interface connector, and the external VGA monitor output connector are all soldered directly onto the CPU board. If you want to remove the CPU assembly from the instrument, several assemblies must be removed before sliding the CPU out. Refer to Chapter 11 for removal instructions. There is no extender board for the CPU assembly. NOTE The replacement CPU board DOES NOT include the A26A1 DRAM board or the A26A2 Flash memory board. It is important that these boards be transferred to the replacement CPU board. The Flash contains all of the instrument firmware, plus any options and option keywords loaded into the instrument. NOTE If you are troubleshooting a frozen keyboard, start by verifying the A26 CPU assembly. If the CPU is found not to be the cause of the problem, suspect the A2 Front Panel Interface or the ribbon cable that connects the motherboard to the A2 Front Panel Interface assembly. CPU Assembly Quick Check Following power-up, the instrument will perform a boot process as follows: Once power is applied to the instrument, the screen will remain blank for several seconds. Text begins to scroll by on the instrument display as the instrument boots from the bootrom. During this time you will see information on the screen, such as what the primary and alternate boot paths are, what the keyboard path is, and messages that indicate the autoboot process has started and the CPU is booting. When the message HARD booted appears, the instrument has stopped booting from bootrom and is now booting from the main Flash. If DRAM is bad, there will be a memory check sum error or size mismatch. If Flash memory on the CPU is bad, an IPL error may occur and the on screen message is often Main menu: Enter Command. Next, a series of keys appear on-screen and the instrument loads its operating system. More messages appear which tell you what is happening during the boot process. During this time the instrument is looking for LAN connections and checking for a floppy disk in the disk drive. Chapter 7 149

150 Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display Verifying the A26 CPU Assembly The message LAN timeout; External loopback test failed indicates the instrument didn t sense a LAN connection. A gray screen appears for about 15 seconds. Next a screen appears with the instrument model number and firmware revision information. This screen may be displayed for 2 minutes. If the boot process hangs up here, reload the PSA firmware. Once the boot process is complete, the instrument runs the auto-align procedure documented on page 49. If the instrument does not boot, look to see if the LEDs on the CPU assembly are flashing. When the instrument power is turned on, you can observe the processor LEDs from the rear panel access holes by the LAN connector. At power on, the CPU DIAG LEDs behave as follows: At power on, all four LED s turn on for a second. The left most LED turns off leaving the other three LED s on for approximately 15 seconds. The three LED s go off and the left LED turns on. The LED s go through a flashing sequence. All four turn on for approximately 10 seconds. All CPU diagnostic LED s turn off after the boot-up is complete. At the end of the sequence, all of the green LEDs should be off. If one or more of the green LEDs remains on, suspect the CPU assembly as being defective. If a LAN connection is present, the yellow LAN CO LI LED remains on. The yellow RX LED will blink. If the screen remains blank (dark) and the green LEDs never blink, the instrument was not able to boot from bootrom. The bootrom on the CPU assembly could be bad, or the instrument clock signals could be missing. The bootrom is not a replaceable part. If the 30 MHz sample clock from the A8 Analog IF assembly to the A7 Digital IF assembly is not present, the display signal processor chip on the digital IF assembly will not reset, causing the PCI bus to hang up and the instrument will not boot. To check the 30 MHz sample clock: Put the A7 Digital IF assembly on an extender board (E ). Check A7J4 for a 30 MHz signal using an oscilloscope, as shown in Figure 6-1 on page 142. If the signal is not present, the cause could be the A8 Analog IF assembly, or the A11 Reference assembly. Go to "A11 Reference Assembly Description" on page 118 to check the reference assembly. If the boot-up process stops after the message Processor starting 150 Chapter 7

151 Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display Verifying the A26 CPU Assembly auto-boot process appears, the firmware files on the A26A2 Flash board may be defective. Try loading new firmware before replacing the A26 CPU or A26A2 Flash assemblies. Suspect the DRAM (A26A1) board is not seated correctly or the board has failed if 3 green LEDs on the CPU board remain on and the following message displayed on screen: CPU0 WARNING: Self tests have been disabled as a result of FASTBOOT being enabled. To enable self tests, use the FASTBOOT command in the CONFIG. menu and reboot the system. WARNING: One or more memory banks were not configured due to a SIMM size mismatch or a SIMM failure. For more details, use the MEMORY command in the CONFIG. menu. Look at the instrument screen and read any error messages that might appear. The messages can give you a clue as to what is happening when the instrument hangs up. Chapter 7 151

152 Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display Verifying the A26 CPU Assembly CPU Assembly Detailed Troubleshooting There are a few items that should be checked before suspecting a defective CPU assembly. The CPU must have all the DC power supplies coming from the motherboard. Carefully measure the DC supplies on the motherboard at the N12 and P12 test point pads. The test points are located near the digital IF connector. These two supplies come from a regulator circuit on the A25 Motherboard. Also measure the VCC and VDL supplies by inserting the E extender board into option slot 2, next to the digital IF assembly. Measure VCC (+5.2 V) and VDL (+3.4 V) using DCOM for the ground connection. VCC and VDL voltages come from the A5 Power Supply. If the power supplies measure correctly, and the CPU does not boot properly, the I/O lines could be loaded down by another assembly, or a clock signal could be missing. Remove the A7 Digital IF assembly and try rebooting. The A8 Analog IF assembly must be installed and providing the 30 MHz sample clock before the CPU will boot. See page 150 for troubleshooting hints. If the instrument will still not boot, suspect the A26 CPU assembly is faulty. Battery Information The analyzer uses a Lithium Polycarbon Monofloride battery to power the instrument clock/calendar and to backup the NVRAM on the CPU assembly. If the power cord has been disconnected for several hours, and then the power cord re-connected and the instrument powered up, the first sign of a depleted battery is the on-screen time and date read out are incorrect. The date reverts to Also, you may see the message Restoration of NVRAM on the display status line. This message occurs when the contents of NVRAM do not match data stored on other assemblies, and this results in the NVRAM being updated. The battery is located on the CPU assembly. See A26BT1 in the Replacement Parts section of this manual. To replace the battery, it is necessary to remove the CPU assembly. Refer to Chapter 11 for removal procedures. 152 Chapter 7

153 Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display A5 Power Supply Assembly Description A5 Power Supply Assembly Description Purpose. The A5 Power Supply assembly is a switching power supply that operates at a switching frequency of khz. The power supply automatically senses the input power and selects between two voltage ranges, 90 to 132 VAC or 195 to 250 VAC. A low TTL level on the PS_off_L line turns off the power supply and places it in standby mode. In standby mode, the front panel standby LED is powered on by the P15SBY line from the power supply.when the power supply is on, the power on front-panel LED is powered by the 5.2 V supply. The power supply plugs directly into the motherboard. The power supply output voltages are: +5.2 V, 5.2 V, +9 V, +15 V, 15 V, +32 V, VCC (5.2 V for processor) and VDL (3.3 V to processor). Chapter 7 153

154 Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display Isolating an A5 Power Supply Problem Isolating an A5 Power Supply Problem NOTE There are no fuses to replace within the power supply. If you determine that the power supply is the failed assembly, replace the power supply. Observing the LED on the front of the instrument, and measuring the probe power connector, will determine if there is catastrophic failure in the power supply assembly. 1. Ensure the instrument is plugged in with the power switch in the Standby position (power not switched on). Verify that the yellow LED next to the power switch is lit. A lit yellow LED indicates the +15 VDC line (P15 STB) is providing enough voltage to light the LED. (The actual voltage may not be +15 VDC.) 2. Power on the instrument and verify that the green LED on the front panel is lit. A lit green LED indicates the power supply has received an ON command and that the +5.2 VDC supply can at least light the LED. 3. The front panel probe power connector can be used to check the +15 VDC and 12.5 VDC ( 15 VDC) supplies. The 12.5 VDC is produced by post regulating the 15 VDC supply. Refer to Figure 7-1 for a diagram of the probe power connector. Figure 7-1 Probe Power Connector If all of these supplies seem dead, it is likely that the problem is a defective power supply assembly, or some other assembly is loading down the power supply. Continue with "If All Voltage Supplies Are Dead" on page 155, to determine the cause of the problem. If the correct LEDs are lit and the probe power voltages measure within the specifications, the power supply has not suffered a catastrophic failure; however, the power supply could still be at fault. Continue with the next section to measure the individual voltage supplies. 154 Chapter 7

155 Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display Isolating an A5 Power Supply Problem Verifying the Individual Voltage Supplies If any one individual supply line from the power supply assembly develops an over voltage/current problem, all supply lines are affected. The supply will go into a burp mode where the supplies will cycle on and off at a low voltage level. The cause of the over voltage/current condition can be the supply itself or any assembly that the power supply provides voltage to. If the power supply is in the burp mode, continue with the assembly removal process as described in the section titled "If All Voltage Supplies Are Dead" on page 155. WARNING The instrument contains potentially hazardous voltages. Refer to the safety symbols provided on the instrument, and in the general safety instructions in this guide, before operating the unit with the cover removed. Ensure that safety instructions are strictly followed. Failure to do so can result in severe or fatal injury. In order to measure the power supply voltages, it is necessary to remove the instrument s outer case and top brace. Refer to Chapter 11 for removal procedures. Use the E extender board to measure the individual power supply voltages. Assure the test pins on the board are not bent and touching each other. Insert the extender board into the empty slot next to the digital IF board. Use the point marked as ACOM for the ground connection. If All Voltage Supplies Are Dead The power supply may be faulty, or one or more assemblies are pulling down the supplies. In this case it is necessary to sequentially remove or unseat the assemblies, taking care to disconnect the line-power cord before removing or unseating any assembly. Unseating the vertical assemblies is done by first assuring the assembly is not screwed in, such as the A12 Synthesizer or A6 SCSI assemblies. Also assure there is enough cable length to pull the assembly up a few inches. Unseat the assembly using the metal extractors attached to the corners of the casting covers. Assure the assembly is clear of the motherboard connectors. Verify the supply each time (measuring on the E extender board). After an assembly is disconnected or removed, plug the line-power cord back into the instrument and re-measure the supply that was down. If it is still down, continue with the assembly removal. NOTE If the supply is now up, suspect the last assembly removed as being defective. Chapter 7 155

156 Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display Isolating an A5 Power Supply Problem Remove these assemblies first (refer to Chapter 11 for removal instructions): A11 Reference assembly A12 Synthesizer assembly A10 Third Converter assembly A7 Digital IF assembly A9 Second Converter assembly A8 Analog IF assembly Other assemblies to remove include: A13 Front End Driver - the front end driver supplies voltages to the RF section assemblies and the input attenuators. Therefore, if the problem goes away upon removing the front end driver, suspect any of the assemblies it provides voltages to. A6 SCSI A2 Front Panel Interface assembly - (disconnect the ribbon cable) A23 Floppy Disk Drive The Minimum Assemblies required to power up the instrument are: A25 Motherboard A5 Power Supply assembly A26 CPU assembly 156 Chapter 7

157 Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display Isolating an A5 Power Supply Problem NOTE To further isolate the failure in the remaining minimum assemblies, measure the resistance (with the power turned off) from the power supply test points on the digital IF extender board to ACOM on the extender board. Make the measurements with the digital IF board removed from the extender board. Check for shorts (zero Ω) or very low resistance (approx. 1 Ω). If a short or low resistance is measured, pull the remaining boards from the instrument in the following order, and recheck the shorted test point after each board is pulled. Note that the resistance will be different from the table, but you should be able to tell if the shorted condition has changed. First pull the A26 CPU assembly, and finally the A5 Power Supply. Supply Approximate Resistance (Ω) +5.2 VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC 939 Chapter 7 157

158 Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display A6 SCSI Interface Board Description A6 SCSI Interface Board Description Purpose. The SCSI board assembly plugs directly into the A26 CPU assembly. The SCSI board assembly provides a connector for an external keyboard. This keyboard connector is compatible with an external AT style PC keyboard. 158 Chapter 7

159 Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display Front Frame Description Front Frame Description Purpose. The front frame assembly contains the following four assemblies. A1 LCD Display The LCD display assembly provides annotation, graticule, and trace information, as processed by the CPU though the A2 Front Panel Interface board. A3 Keyboard The keyboard allows entry of keyboard characters, immediate activation of some features including the print, restart, and display navigation features, and selection of some softkey menus. A2 Front Panel Interface Assembly The front panel interface board interprets which key has been pressed, and provides voltage supplies to the inverter boards, the RPG tuning circuitry, and the probe power bias voltage outputs. The front panel interface assembly is comprised of three boards. The A2A1 and A2A2 Inverter boards are identical. The inverter boards provide a stepped-up voltage to both backlights on the LCD display. A23 Disk Drive The disk drive is used to download information from a 3.5 inch floppy disk to instrument memory, and to load information from the instrument onto a floppy disk. Chapter 7 159

160 Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display Isolating a Display Problem Isolating a Display Problem NOTE There are no front panel adjustments for intensity and contrast of the LCD. 1. Verify the instrument went through a complete power-on sequence. Refer to "Troubleshooting Power-up Problems" on page If the display is dark, (not visible), connect an external VGA monitor to the rear panel VGA output connector on the instrument. Some multisync monitors might not be able to lock to a 60 Hz sync pulse. If the video information is not present on the external VGA monitor, the most probable cause is the A26 CPU assembly. 3. If the external VGA monitor is functioning, verify that the front panel ribbon cable (W2) is properly plugged into the motherboard. 4. If W2 is properly connected, suspect cable W5 from the LCD display, a defective A2 Front Panel Interface board, one or both of the inverter boards (A2A1 and A2A2) mounted on the interface board, or the LCD assembly itself (A1). Verifying the Inverter Boards WARNING High voltage is present on the inverter boards and the front panel interface board. Be careful when measuring the following signals and voltages. NOTE In order to access the front panel boards for measurements, it is necessary to drop the front frame from the deck and remove the front frame shield. Refer to Chapter 11 for these procedures. Measure the signals and voltages as indicated in Figure 7-2. If the signals and voltages measure good, the inverter boards are functioning correctly. 160 Chapter 7

161 Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display Isolating a Display Problem Figure 7-2 Verifying the Inverter Boards Test Point Signal or Voltage Test Point Signal or Voltage CN1 pin Vdc T1 pin 4 (input) CN1 pin Vdc T1 pin 5 (input) CN1 pin 3 26 mv T1 pin 6 (input) CN1 pin mv T1 pin 7 (output) CN1 pin mv T1 pin 9 (output) CN1 pin mv T1 pin 10 (output) +3.3 Vdc mv.30 Vdc 60 V p-p 38 khz 77 V p-p 38 khz 450 V p-p 38 khz T1 pin 1 (input).30 Vdc T1 pin 12 (output) 45 V p-p 38 khz T1 pin 2 (input) T1 pin 3 (input) +3.3 Vdc CN2 A 400 V to +400 V 38 khz (see figure) +3.3 Vdc CN2 B 2.15 V to +4 V 38 khz (see figure) Chapter 7 161

162 Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display Isolating a Display Problem Verifying HSYNC, VSYNC, and LCD Clock To verify that the HSYNC (horizontal sync), VSYNC (vertical sync), and LCD clock are functioning correctly, measure the following signals as indicated in Figure 7-3. If all of these signals measure correctly, suspect a defective backlight or LCD. The backlight is the most probable cause. NOTE The P2 connector on the front panel interface board has supports soldered at each end, as shown in the figure. Make sure to measure the correct pins. Be very careful when measuring these signals to ensure you do not short out any pins. 162 Chapter 7

163 Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display Isolating a Display Problem Figure 7-3 Verifying HSYNC, VSYNC, and LCD Clock Chapter 7 163

164 Troubleshooting the Processor, Power Supply, and Display Rear Panel Description Rear Panel Description The following connectors are located on the rear panel of the instrument: PRE-SEL OUT. Preselected External Mixer Tune output, allows tuning voltage for a Preselected mixer. EXT REF IN. The external reference allows you to select an external reference to phase lock all oscillators in the instrument. You can select any external reference frequency between 1 and 30 MHz. The A11 Reference assembly then converts any external reference frequency to 10 MHz. An Ext Ref message will appear in the upper right hand corner of the display when the external reference is selected. If no external reference signal is applied, or if the operator does not enter the correct value for the external reference frequency, a Frequency Reference Unlock message will appear on screen. 10 MHz OUT (SWITCHED). The 10 MHz out allows you to lock other test equipment to the same frequency reference that is being used by the transmitter tester. The 10 MHz out signal is at +5 db. Once the 10 MHz out is set to On, it will persist in an On state until an Off state is selected. 2nd IF OUT. The MHz IF signal is routed from the A10 3rd Converter assembly. See the block diagram for power level with 25 dbm input signal and 10 db input attenuation. 70 MHz IF OUT. (Option H70 only) The 70 MHz IF OUT signal is provided by the A33 70 MHz IF OUT assembly located in Option Slot 2. With a 25 dbm input signal and 10 db input attenuation, the 70 MHz IF OUT signal should measure around 30 dbm. TRIGGER OUT (1 + 2). Trigger outputs used to synchronize other test equipment with the analyzer. Trigger 1 is the High+Sweeping (HSWP) signal. TRIGGER IN. Allows external triggering of measurements. NOISE SOURCE DRIVE OUT +28V (PULSED). Provides +28V supply for a noise source when Option 219, Noise Figure Measurement is installed. 164 Chapter 7

165 8 Hardware Options 165

166 Hardware Options What You Will Find in This Chapter What You Will Find in This Chapter The following information is found in this chapter: 1. Procedures to verify the functionality of each option. 2. Block diagrams of each option. This following descriptions are found in this chapter: Verifying Option 107 Audio Input page 167 Verifying Option 110 page 169 Verifying Option 122 or 140, Wide Bandwidth Digitizer page 174 Overview and Verification of Option 123, Microwave and Millimeter Preselector Bypass page 187 Verifying Option 124, Y-Axis Video Out page 203 NOTE See Instrument Hardware Option Descriptions on page 16 for overviews of Options 122 or 140, 123, and 124. See Chapter 3 for information on: Option B7J, Digital Demod hardware Option 1DS, Lowband Preamplifier Option AYZ, External Mixing Option BAB, 3.5 mm input connector 166 Chapter 8

167 Hardware Options Verifying Option 107 Audio Input Figure 8-1 Option 107 Verifying Option 107 Audio Input The PSA must have Option 233, Measuring Receiver Personality installed in order to enable Option 107, the Audio Input. Option 233 will always be present since the Audio Input Option 107 is only available on instruments that have Option 233. Option 233 is the built-in measuring receiver personality that is required for a PSA that is part of the N5531S Measuring Receiver System. Unlike many measurements where you can see a trace or waveform, the results of the audio measurement are displayed as numbers on screen. Measurements include: Audio Distortion, Audio Frequency, Audio AC Level, and Audio SINAD. Option 107 consists of an Audio board and a front panel BNC connector. The Audio signal path is in addition to, and completely bypasses the normal RF/IF signal chain. The frequency range is 20 Hz to 250 khz. Usable amplitude range is 0.1 V rms to 3 V rms. The input impedance of the audio input is 100 k ohms. The effect of this 100 k ohm input impedance is important to take into consideration when making measurements since most test equipment such as a function generator has 50 ohm input impedance. Therefore, if a function generator with 50 ohm input impedance is set to a particular output level and connected to the Audio Input port of the PSA, the PSA Audio AC Level measurement will yield a reading that is two times the function generator setting. The Audio signal comes from the front panel BNC connector, goes to the Audio board where the signal is buffered, level shifted (5 gain levels provide best signal to ADC), then run through an ADC followed by an FPGA (a custom gate array) that provides filtering and decimation to the ADC bits. The time domain FPGA bits are sent to the PSA CPU assembly via the PCI bus and the results of the measurement are displayed on screen. Chapter 8 167

168 Hardware Options Verifying Option 107 Audio Input Verification of Option 107 PSA settings: Press the front panel Mode key Select the Measuring Receiver key Press Measure key Select Audio AC Level Function Generator settings: Output level: 1.5 V rms Frequency: 1 khz You are going to measure the output level of a source at 5 different levels where each output level activates a different gain stage in the Audio board. This will verify the audio board gain stages and signal processing path. Connect a function generator to the Audio input on PSA. This test assumes a function generator with 50 ohm output impedance which will cause the PSA to measure 2 times the function generator setting. If you wish, you can also connect a voltmeter such as an Agilent 3458A to the function generator using a BNC tee, and since the voltmeter and PSA both have high input impedance relative to the function generator, both the PSA and voltmeter will display the same voltage. Function Generator Amplitude Expected PSA AC Level Measurement 1.5 V rms 3.0 V rms 0.75 V rms 1.5 V rms V rms 0.75 V rms V rms V rms V rms V rms 168 Chapter 8

169 Hardware Options Verifying Option 110 Verifying Option khz to 26.5 GHz Preamplifier (E4440A/43A/45A) 100 khz to 50 GHz Preamplifier (E4446A/47A/48A) Option 110 provides approximately 30 db of preamplification on the PSA series spectrum analyzers. The range of operation is from 10 MHz to the upper frequency of the spectrum analyzer. Option 1DS, the 100 khz to 3 GHz preamplifier, cannot reside in the instrument when Option 110 is present. Although Option 110 has the same lower frequency range as Option 123, Option 110 is more expensive and has slightly different specifications. Therefore, Option 110 will not replace Option 1DS in all cases. There are two Option 110 preamplifiers. The 26.6 GHz microwave version is used on the E4440A, E4443A and E4445A. The 50 GHz millimeter version is used on the E4446A, E44447A and E4448A. Both amplifiers require the A38 Option Driver assembly for control of the amplifier, including flatness compensation files and control of the mechanical switches that switch the amplifier into and out of the signal path. The mechanical switches are stand alone components and not part of the preamplifier or the option driver board. Verification of Option 110 The input level at the preamp should not exceed -30 dbm in order to avoid distortion or overload at the preamplifier and first mixer. Assure the instrument is in Spectrum Analysis mode. To turn on the preamplifier press the Amplitude key and select Int Preamp On. Turning the preamp on or off should produces an audible click that verifies the switch has been energized. A quick check of the preamplifier consists of viewing a signal on screen and determining if the signal level is correct. Since the preamplifier covers a wide frequency range and the flatness of the amplifier is corrected, it is important to verify the amplifier performance at several frequencies. Above 3.05 GHz, you must perform a Preselector Center (Amplitude, Presel Center) to minimize amplitude error due to the high band preselector. Frequency 200 khz 5 GHz 10 GHz 15 GHz Measured Amplitude Preamp ON Measured Amplitude Preamp OFF Chapter 8 169

170 Hardware Options Verifying Option 110 Frequency 20 GHz 30 GHz 40 GHz 50 GHz Measured Amplitude Preamp ON Measured Amplitude Preamp OFF The accuracy of the measured amplitude will depend on the source flatness, quality of interconnect cables and whether you performed Preselector Center, and the frequency response of the PSA. The table above suggests you test with the preamp on, then with the preamp off so you can separate the amplitude variation of the preamp from the test equipment and non- preamp signal path contributions. If the Preamp On amplitude variation between the frequencies in the table above seems large, the problem may be that the frequency response correction factors contained on the A38 Option Driver Assembly are corrupt and need to be replaced by performing the frequency response adjustment. See the E4446A/E4447A/E4448A Option 110 and Option 123 block diagram or the E4440A/E4443A/E4445A Option 110 and Option 123 block diagram for signal level troubleshooting. Be sure to use the instrument settings listed on the block diagram as a starting point. Run Align All Now, then turn Auto Align Off. This will allow you to remove cables and troubleshoot without having Align All run unexpectedly and change your measured results. Signal path troubleshooting on the high frequency instruments requires connection to devices with 2.4 mm connectors. A short semi-rigid cable with 2.4 mm male connectors at both ends is recommended. The required test equipment list on page 24 contains the Agilent part number of a cable that can be modified (bent) and used for this purpose. Figure 8-2 shows the preamplifier pin out/ interconnections and expected voltage levels. All yellow wires carry the same signal and it does not matter which VD1 - VD3 pins the wires connect to. The blue wires all carry the same signal and it does not matter which VG1 - VG3 pins the wires connect to. 170 Chapter 8

171 Hardware Options Verifying Option 110 Figure 8-2 Preamplifier Pin Out and Expected Voltage Levels Chapter 8 171

172 Hardware Options Overview of Option 115 Extended Memory (all PSA Series) Overview of Option 115 Extended Memory (all PSA Series) Provides 512 MB of additional memory for optional measurement personalities (such as Option BAF, W-CDMA), user state, trace and screen dumps, and personality power on last state files. This 512 MB of memory is in addition to the 64 MB of flash memory mounted on the CPU assembly. This CPU flash memory contains the instrument core firmware, license keywords, amplitude correction data, limit lines, and network settings. The extended memory is in the form of a 512 MB compact flash card mounted on the Option 115 extended memory assembly. This assembly also includes the circuitry for Option 111 USB, however USB functionality requires a separate license for it to be enabled. Because the extended memory /USB assembly also contains the keyboard connector, this assembly will be included in all new instruments, even though the Option 115 or Option 111 are not licensed and are not available for use. Therefore just because the hardware is installed, it does not mean it is functional. You must view the Show System screen or the licensing screen to determine which options are available. NOTE Option 117, Secure Erase, is designed for security conscious customers. If Option 117 is installed, Option 115 will not be available, even though the memory board with the compact flash card are installed in the instrument. When Option 117 is present, the 64 MB of flash memory on the CPU is mounted read only, and contains the instrument core firmware, all optional measurement personalities (that will fit), license keywords, and network settings. Basically all the files a user cannot store sensitive data into. The 512 MB memory on the extended memory board now contains only the user data such as state, trace or screen dumps, amplitude correction files, power on last state files, and any files a user could store data in. Option 117 allows you to completely erase the contents of the 512 MB flash card by pressing the Secure Erase User key. Since the instrument core firmware is on the CPU Flash card, the instrument will still be functional after erasing the 512 MB memory. See Option 117 secure memory description in Chapter 1, Overview, for additional information. 172 Chapter 8

173 Hardware Options Overview of Option 115 Extended Memory (all PSA Series) Verification of Option 115 Check for the presence of Option 115 by pressing System, Show System and looking for 115 in the Options section. You can also press System, Licensing, Show License and see that Option 115 appears in the list. Press System, Show Hardware, Next Page and this will show Compact Flash Type (vendor name / size) and Compact Flash Size (512MB) If the flash card is defective or missing and cannot be read, you will see the following: All optional measurement personalities will not be available. Press Mode and you will only see Spectrum Analysis. All measurement personality licenses can still be viewed when you press Show License as explained above. The Show Hardware screen will not have a Next Page key or will not show the Compact Flash Type and Size. All trace, state and limit files will be missing (assuming some were previously saved). Press File, Catalog, and select the different types to verify missing data. Chapter 8 173

174 Hardware Options Verifying Option 122 or 140, Wide Bandwidth Digitizer Verifying Option 122 or 140, Wide Bandwidth Digitizer The following procedures outline how to place the instrument into wideband mode and verify the signal path is working correctly. Since both the A31 Wideband Analog IF and A32 Wideband Digital IF must work together to provide a signal on screen, both will be tested together here. Troubleshooting hints to determine which of the two assemblies is most likely faulty are included. NOTE Press System, Show Errors to check the instrument error queue for possible error messages that resulted the last time the instrument performed an internal alignment. Errors particular to the Wideband path are: WB IF ADC Image Align WBIF Step Gains WBIF IF Frequency Response Also, the Opt Path RF Gain alignment performs an amplitude check of the Wide Band IF assemblies in addition to the Option 1DS Preamp and the Option B7J electronic attenuator. A failure on this test could be caused by any of these assemblies. Figure 8-3 shows the Wideband and Narrowband signal paths. Figure 8-3 Wideband and Narrowband Signal Paths (Option 122 example) 174 Chapter 8

175 Hardware Options Verifying Option 122 or 140, Wide Bandwidth Digitizer Setting up the instrument in wideband mode: The wideband IF is only accessible in the Basic instrument mode. 1. Press Mode, Basic 2. Press Meas Setup, IF Path, Wide. This selects the wideband IF path through A31 Wideband Analog IF and the A32 Wideband Digital IF assemblies. 3. Press Input/Output, Input Port, Amptd Ref. 4. Set Center Frequency to 50 MHz. The internal 50 MHz, 25 dbm calibrator tone should be displayed. The noise floor will be less than 70 dbc. See Figure 8-4. Figure 8-4 Noise Floor If you do not see a signal, or the signal is not the correct amplitude, or the noise floor is incorrect, check the performance in the standard narrow band mode. NOTE Option 122 example shown. The Option 140 span is limited to 40 MHz. Chapter 8 175

176 Hardware Options Verifying Option 122 or 140, Wide Bandwidth Digitizer Setting up the instrument in narrow band mode: Press Meas Setup, IF Path, Narrow. This selects the narrow band or standard IF Path through the A7 Analog IF and A8 Digital IF assemblies. The internal 50 MHz, -25 dbm calibrator tone should be displayed. The noise floor will be less than -70 dbc. If the problem exists in both IF paths, troubleshoot the narrow band path since the instrument defaults to this path after a power cycle, and it is easier to set up. 176 Chapter 8

177 Hardware Options Verifying Option 122 or 140, Wide Bandwidth Digitizer If the problem only exists in the wideband path: Set up the instrument in wideband mode as documented above. 1. Assure the Wideband Analog IF and Wideband Digital IF assemblies are properly seated. 2. Assure the W60 ribbon cable that connects the Wideband Digital IF to the Wideband Analog IF is connected properly. 3. Verify the 100 MHz and 300 MHz reference signals from the A11 Reference assembly to the Wideband Analog IF are at the correct power level and frequency. See the chart below and the Option 122 block diagram. 4. Verify the signal amplitude and frequency from the A10 3rd Converter. Note that the frequency values are dependent on span and whether the IF Path selected is wide or narrow. For this wideband test, the 3rd Converter output frequency will be 322 MHz for spans </= 36 MHz, and 300 MHz for spans > 36 MHz. If the instrument is taken out of wideband mode by selecting IF Path Narrow, the output of the 3rd converter will be MHz. See the chart below and the Option 122 or 140 block diagram. A10 3rd Converter Output to A31 Wideband Analog IF ( 40 color cable) Span 36 MHZ 19 dbm ± 2 db at 322 MHz 300 MHz In from All Reference Assy ( 95 color cable) 1 dbm ± 2 db at 300 MHz 100 MHz in from A11 Reference Assy ( 65 color cable) 6 dbm ± 2 db at 100 MHz Span > 36 MHz 20 dbm ± 2 db at 300 Mhz 1 dbm ± 2 db at 300 MHz 6 dbm ± 2 db at 100 MHz When the IF Path is set to Narrow mode 26 dbm ± 2 db at MHz 27 dbm ± 2 db at 300 MHz 6 dbm ± 2 db at 100 MHz If the problem is not fixed, suspect the Wideband Analog IF or the Wideband Digital IF. Perform the procedures that follow. NOTE If the problem reported in wideband mode is not seen yet, you must look over the entire bandwidth of the wideband IF path by performing the following procedures. Chapter 8 177

178 Hardware Options Verifying Option 122 or 140, Wide Bandwidth Digitizer Viewing the wide band response to a comb signal (inner loop test): The wideband IF is only accessible in the Basic instrument mode. 1. Press Mode, Basic 2. Press Meas Setup, IF Path, Wide. This selects the wideband IF path. 3. Press Input/Output, Input Port, IF Align. 4. Press IF Align Signal. 5. Press Signal Type and select Comb The comb signal stimulates the entire 80 MHz IF bandwidth (for Option 122) or 40 MHz IF bandwidth (for Option 140). 6. Press Meas Setup, Res BW and type in 150kHz You will see a display of the internal comb signal that is generated on the A7 Wideband Analog IF assembly and sent through both the Analog IF assembly and the A32 Wide Band Digital IF assemblies. We will call this the inner loop test since it is contained inside the wideband Analog IF and Digital IF assemblies only. Disregarding the center tone, all comb teeth should be within 15 db of each other, and at least 20 db above the noise floor. See Figure 8-5 below. Also see the chart on page 180. Figure 8-5 Comb Teeth 178 Chapter 8

179 Hardware Options Verifying Option 122 or 140, Wide Bandwidth Digitizer Viewing the wide band response to a comb signal (outer loop test): If the display is correct, you must now inject a comb calibration signal through a larger signal path. The comb signal from A32 Wide Band Digital IF will now be injected into the A14 input attenuator and go through the RF path and the A10 3rd Converter before entering the A31 wideband analog and A32 digital IF assemblies. This is the outer loop test. Perform the outer loop test as follows: 1. Press Input/Output, Input Port, WB Align (f=300 MHz) 2. Press Frequency, type in 300 MHz You must tune the analyzer to 300 MHz because the WB Align comb signal will now be present at the front end of the instrument. The displayed comb signal level will decrease about 10 db referenced to the displayed level of the IF Align signal in the inner loop test. The comb spacing and relative comb amplitudes will remain the same as they were in Figure 8-5. Chapter 8 179

180 Hardware Options Verifying Option 122 or 140, Wide Bandwidth Digitizer Troubleshooting Table Test Condition Test Results Assumptions Possible Problem Notes IF Align signal selected (Inner loop test) WB Align signal selected (Outer loop test) IF Align signal selected (Inner loop test) WB Align signal selected (Outer loop test) Good Bad Bad Good This means the A31 Wide band Analog IF circuits from the point where the calibrator signal is applied are OK. There are a few components on the very front end on the board such as the input connector that are not tested The 300 MHz and 100 MHz reference signals from the Reference assembly are correct. The A32 Wideband Digital IF assembly is good The non-wideband signal path (narrow IF path) functions correctly. A10 Third Converter The A31 Wideband Analog IF input connector or cal switch or A31 Cal Out connector or cal switch is faulty. Cable W65 from the 3rd Converter to the.a31 input connector. Cable W64 from the A31 Cal out port to the 3rd Converter faulty. The wideband IF Align calibrator is faulty IF Align signal selected (Inner loop test) WB Align signal selected (Outer loop test) Bad Bad A31 Wideband Analog IF assembly faulty A31 Wideband Analog IF assembly faulty Continue with next step in this procedure Continue with next step in this procedure 180 Chapter 8

181 Hardware Options Verifying Option 122 or 140, Wide Bandwidth Digitizer Wide Band Analog IF Assembly Filter Path Test This routine allows you to use the WB Align (f=300 MHz) comb cal signal to view the filter response of the 80 MHz filter path and the 36 MHz filter paths. Also the ADC dither signal response can be seen allowing you to determine if the dither signal is present. The following diagnostic routine requires entering the password protected Service menus. 1. Press System More, More Service 2. Enter the service password -49 and press Enter 3. Service 4. Meas Setup 5. Wide Band Setup 6. Wide Band Advanced, More 7. All Freq Pts On 8. Span 100 MHz 9. RBW 150 khz The PSA display now shows the filter response of the 80 MHz filter path in the Wideband Analog IF assembly. The Dither signal can be seen on the far left hand side of the filter response. See Figure 8-6. Figure MHz Filter Response 10.Press Return Chapter 8 181

182 Hardware Options Verifying Option 122 or 140, Wide Bandwidth Digitizer 11.Press WB ADC Dither and turn the dither signal On and Off to view the effect of turning dither on and off. 12.Press Analog Filter 13.Select Narrow 36 MHz The PSA display now shows the filter response of the 36 MHz filter path in the Wideband Analog IF assembly. See Figure 8-7. Figure MHz Filter Response If the response of only one of the filter paths is incorrect, the problem is isolated to that filter path on the A31, Wideband Analog IF assembly. 182 Chapter 8

183 Hardware Options Verifying Option 122 or 140, Wide Bandwidth Digitizer Option 122 or 140 Lowband Filters Figure 8-8 shows FL2, FL3, and associated cables. FL2 on Option 122 or 140 units is a 100 MHz BW filter. Non-Option 122/140 units have 40 MHz BW filters. FL3 is added to suppress spurious responses since FL2 has such a wide bandwidth. Figure 8-8 Option 122 Lowband Filters Chapter 8 183

184 Hardware Options Verifying Option 122 or 140, Wide Bandwidth Digitizer 184 Chapter 8

185 W66 (66) MHz IF OUT To Rear Panel (Narrow IF Path only) -26 dbm, MHz P104 A31 WIDE BAND ANALOG IF A32 WIDE BAND DIGITAL IF 2nd IF Aux Input From A10 3rd Converter In Widband Mode: Span <_ 36 MHz 322 MHz Span > 36 MHz 300 MHz W65 (40) P100 3 db 7 db MHz J db 2 db steps 0-14 db 350 MHz WB 3rd Converter 46 MHz 100 MHz 25 db 4 db J MHz AAF 12 db 12 db ADCA 14 BIT 15 ADC ADCB 14 BIT ADC TP701 delay TP SERIALIZER 14 J700 W60 DESERIALIZER CAPTURE MEMORY FPGA HOST PROCESSOR PCI BUS (TO CPU BUS) 2 TP MHz 100 MHz DIST. DESERIALIZER SERIALIZER Wide Band IF Cal Out To A10 3rd Converter W64 (60) P101 TP101 X2 600 MHz CALIBRATION TP MHz 14 BIT DAC J700 W60 FLASH DRAM TRIG IN TRIG OUT CONTROL + TRIGGER 4 2 W60 W60 P103 P200 4 TRIGGER FILTER RESAMPLER FILTER SIGNAL PROCESSING ASICS 300 MHz In -3 dbm 100 MHz -7 dbm From A11 Reference From A11 Reference W62 (95) W61 (65) psvpaifblk OPTION 122 or 140 A31/A32 WIDE BAND IF BLOCK DIAGRAM March 28, 2008

186 Hardware Options Verifying Option 122 or 140, Wide Bandwidth Digitizer 186 Chapter 8

187 Hardware Options Overview and Verification of Option 123, Microwave and Millimeter Preselector Bypass Overview and Verification of Option 123, Microwave and Millimeter Preselector Bypass Overview of Option 123 in the E4440A, E4443A, or E4445A Option 123 provides an unpreselected input mixer path for the E4440A, E4443A and E4445A spectrum analyzers in the 3.05 to 26.5 GHz frequency range. This allows a signal path with a wider bandwidth and less amplitude variability, which is an advantage when doing modulation analysis and broadband signal analysis. The disadvantage is that, without the preselector, image signals will appear. Functionality In normal instrument operation, when operating above 3.05 GHz, a preselector precedes the input mixer (see Figure 8-9 below). This preselector is part of the RYTHM circuitry, and is basically a tunable bandpass filter which prevents signals away from the frequency of interest from combining in the mixer to generate in-band spurious signals. The consequences of using this preselector filter are its limited bandwidth, amplitude and phase ripple in its passband, and amplitude and phase instability due to center frequency drift. With Option 123, the RF path can be routed via RF switches to an alternate highband ( GHz) mixer that does not incorporate the tunable bandpass filter. Chapter 8 187

188 Hardware Options Overview and Verification of Option 123, Microwave and Millimeter Preselector Bypass Figure 8-9 Block Diagram for DC to 26.5 GHz Option 123 Instruments Figure 8-9 shows the block diagram of the instrument with an upper frequency of 26.5 GHz. Functionally, Option 123 adds two new switches (Sw1 and Sw2) into the signal path plus an additional mixer. In normal operation above 3.05 GHz, Sw1 and Sw2 are in their down position, which selects the signal path through the preselection filter. When the unpreselected path is chosen, Sw1 and Sw2 are changed to their up position, which bypasses the preselection filter. When the instrument is operating below 3.05 GHz (Band 0), the signal is routed to the Lowband circuitry. The lowband circuitry has built-in low pass filtering so it does not require preselection. Please note that the Lowband (Band 0) path is unavailable when switches Sw1 and Sw2 are configured for unpreselected operation. Furthermore, since these are mechanical switches, it is unacceptable to switch them in the middle of a sweep. Therefore when the unpreselected path is chosen, Band 0 is locked out, and when any part of the sweep is in Band 0, the unpreselected path is locked out. 188 Chapter 8

189 Hardware Options Overview and Verification of Option 123, Microwave and Millimeter Preselector Bypass The 3rd converter board in the instrument contains a splitter that is used route the MHz IF signal to the normal digital IF and also, out the MHz IF Out connector on the instrument's rear panel. If Option 122 (80 MHz Bandwidth Digitizer) is installed, the second path from the splitter is first routed to the Option 122 Analog IF board where a switch is used to route the IF signal through the Option 122 Analog IF or to the rear panel MHz IF Out. In order to obtain a clean signal on the MHz IF Out port, the 3rd converter calibrator switch (Sw3 in figure 1) must be thrown into its down position. If Sw3 is in its up position, the MHz IF is still present on the rear panel but it is corrupted by frequency response ripples caused by the analyzer through path circuits. Option 123 provides the ability to control the MHz IF routing so that a clean signal can be obtained out the rear panel, although no signal will be present on the analyzer's display. To manually control this routing, press the Input/Output key and use the MHz IF Out Opt softkey to switch between the rear panel Dnconverter WBIF or the spectrum analyzer (SA) signal path. The rear panel MHz IF Out path is called Dnconverter WBIF because it is usually used when using the instrument as a down converter where wide BW is required. Chapter 8 189

190 Hardware Options Overview and Verification of Option 123, Microwave and Millimeter Preselector Bypass Figure 8-10 Option 123 Switch Wiring Wire Color Blue Green Yellow Brown Voltage 25 Vdc, Steady state. Preselector Off to On transition should show a negative-going pulse for approximately 18 ms, then the 25 Vdc steady state 25 Vdc supply 25 Vdc supply 25 Vdc, Steady state. Preselector On to Off transition should show a negative-going pulse for approximately 18 ms, then the 25 Vdc steady state Switches are actuated using a pulse drive. The pulse duration must be at least 15 ms to ensure that the switch will fully latch. The blue and brown wires provide the pulse drive to the switch. 190 Chapter 8

191 Hardware Options Overview and Verification of Option 123, Microwave and Millimeter Preselector Bypass Table 8-1 Verifying Option 123, Microwave Preselector Bypass (E4440A/E4443A/E4445A) The following test switches in and out the preselector bypass path while viewing a signal. There may be slight amplitude differences between the two signal paths. Required Equipment Description Recommended Model Signal Source > 4 GHz 83630B High quality, low-loss cable, 3.5 mm (2 required) Adapter, N (m) to 3.5 mm (f) Adapter, 3.5 mm (f) to 3.5 mm (f) 83059B 1. Preset the PSA and signal source. 2. Connect the signal source to the PSA RF input with a high quality low-loss cable. PSA Settings Mode Center Frequency Start Frequency Stop Frequency Spectrum Analysis 4 GHz 3.06 GHz 10 GHz Signal Source Settings Frequency Amplitude 4 GHz -10 dbm 3. The 4 GHz signal should appear on screen. The analyzer is currently using the preselected path. 4. On the PSA, Press Input / Output, Microwave Preselector OFF. You should have heard the switches click. The preselector is now bypassed. The 4 GHz signal will still be present, however the display may show many other responses. This occurs because the preselector filter that eliminates input frequencies that cause these images, multiples, and out-of-band responses; has been bypassed by the Option 123 hardware. You may also notice a step in the noise floor at the 6.6 GHz bandcrossing. This is normal performance of the Option123 Chapter 8 191

192 Hardware Options Overview and Verification of Option 123, Microwave and Millimeter Preselector Bypass highband mixer. Steps will also appear at 13.2 GHz and 19.2 GHz. 5. Tune the source and PSA to 10 GHz, 15 GHz, and 20 GHz and check the signal level. The accuracy of the measurement will depend on the source flatness, the quality of the interconnect cable, and the frequency response of the PSA. 6. See the foldout block diagram Option 123 (E4440A, 43A, 45A) for signal level troubleshooting. 192 Chapter 8

193 OPTION 123 (E4440A, 43A, 45A only) SWITCHABLE MICROWAVE PRESELECTOR BYPASS BLOCK DIAGRAM RF-INPUT DC COUPLED 3Hz to f max AC COUPLED 20MHz to f max (Coupling not automatic) f max: E4440A= 26.5 GHz E4445A= 13.2 GHz E4443A= 6.7 GHz 5 GHz, -25 dbm W7 A14 INPUT ATTENUATOR A 2 db 2 db W8 10 db 6 db 20 db 30 db W29 A15 INPUT ATTENUATOR B W GHz, -35 dbm W80 C Bottom Switch SW1 (OPTION 123) 1 5 GHz W82 A19 RYTHM J1 YTF ( GHz, 14 dbm ± 3 db) W51 2 Odd/Even IF 2 W81 YTF Coil Driver A34 MIXER (OPTION 123) LO 3-7 GHz Front Panel RF Input Frequency W MHz -49 dbm (preselector On) W38 To Lowband SW2 (OPTION 123) MHz -51 dbm Top Switch C 10 W MHz to A10 3rd Converter J1 W20 HB Out MHz A13 FRONT END DRIVER 10 Mhz REF. Calibrator Signal 50 MHz CW, -25 dbm 1/N COUNTER N= YTF TUNE RAMP GENERATOR 48 N=1-2 1/N COUNTER 16 BIT DAC 16 BIT DAC VARIABLE GAIN RAMP GENERATOR +32v 28v REGULATOR DELAY COMP. 10 khz PRE-SEL OUT (REAR PANEL) W47 (97) W26 J5 J6 J3 J4 J11 10 khz RYTHM BIAS/CTRL TO 3rd CONVERTER VIA MOTHERBOARD LOWBAND BIAS/CONTROL 10 ATTENUATOR CONTROL UNPRESELECTED MIXER CONTROL OPTION 1DS PREAMP BIAS/CTRL 10 THERMOMETER FROM LO VIA MOTHERBOARD SLODA LEVELING LOOP ELECTRONIC ATTENUATOR CONTROL YTO MAIN COIL FM COIL PASS THRU GATE BIAS HI/LO SWITCH BIAS W85 J13 J7 J2 W53 W25 10 W28 7 A GHz YTO GHz, dbm 10 W35 Mixer Control A21 SLODA LO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER PIN ATTEN. W24 LO W83 EXT. SENSE 3-7 GHz -3 TO -8 dbm INT. SENSE SAMPLER OUT W84 HIGH/LOW HI LO FIRST LO OUT GHz + 15 dbm W88 W41 [ GHz 14.5 dbm ± 1 db] Note - POWER LEVELS BASED ON THESE SETTINGS: Mode - Spectrum Analysis Center Frequency - 5 GHz Span - 0 Hz. Input Attenuation - 10 db Microwave Preselector - Off J8 J9 To A20 Lowband TO REAR PANEL 28v (SWITCHED) W31 W49 block_123_40_43_45

194 Hardware Options Overview and Verification of Option 123, Microwave and Millimeter Preselector Bypass 194 Chapter 8

195 E4440A/E4443A/E4445A OPTION 110 AND 123 BLOCK DIAGRAM RF-INPUT DC COUPLED 3Hz to f max AC COUPLED 20MHz to f max (Coupling not automatic) f max: E4440A= 26.5 GHz E4445A= 13.2 GHz E4443A= 6.7 GHz 5 GHz, -25 dbm W7 A14 INPUT ATTENUATOR A W20 Calibrator Signal 50 MHz CW, -25 dbm 2 db 2 db W8 10 db 6 db 20 db 30 db W29 A15 INPUT ATTENUATOR B W30 5 GHz W109 Note 1: -65 dbm Note 2: -35 dbm W114 W112 Note 1: -39 dbm AT4 4 db SW6 CONTROL A36 PREAMP (OPT 110) Note 1: -39 dbm Note 2: -35 dbm W113 W111 C Bottom Switch SW1 (OPTION 123) No cable direct connect 1 5 GHz FL4 A19 RYTHM 2 Odd/Even IF 2 W81 3 GHz W115 J1 YTF A34 MIXER (OPTION 123) Mixer Control YTF Coil Driver LO HB Out LO 3-7 GHz ( GHz, 14 dbm ± 3 db) MHz Front Panel RF Input Frequency W84 W51 W MHz -49 dbm (preselector On) To Lowband SW2 (OPTION 123) MHz -51 dbm Top Switch C 10 W MHz to A10 3rd Converter J1 A38 OPTION DRIVER 10 SWITCH CONTROL J3 PREAMP CONTROL P1 W W38 Pre Sel Out (rear panel) 7 W47 (97) W W85 Note - POWER LEVELS BASED ON THESE SETTINGS: Mode: Spectrum Analysis A13 FRONT END DRIVER 10 Mhz REF. 1/N COUNTER N= YTF TUNE RAMP GENERATOR 48 N=1-2 1/N COUNTER 16 BIT DAC 16 BIT DAC VARIABLE GAIN RAMP GENERATOR +32v 28v REGULATOR DELAY COMP. 10 khz J5 J6 J3 J4 J11 10 khz RYTHM BIAS/CTRL TO 3rd CONVERTER VIA MOTHERBOARD LOWBAND BIAS/CONTROL ATTENUATOR CONTROL UNPRESELECTED MIXER CONTROL THERMOMETER OPTION 1DS PREAMP BIAS/CTRL FROM LO VIA MOTHERBOARD SLODA LEVELING LOOP ELECTRONIC ATTENUATOR CONTROL YTO MAIN COIL FM COIL PASS THRU GATE BIAS HI/LO SWITCH BIAS J13 J7 J2 W53 W25 10 W28 A GHz YTO GHz, dbm 10 W35 A21 SLODA LO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER PIN ATTEN. W24 W83 EXT. SENSE 3-7 GHz -3 TO -8 dbm INT. SENSE SAMPLER OUT HIGH/LOW HI LO FIRST LO OUT GHz + 15 dbm W88 W41 [ GHz 14.5 dbm ± 1 db] Center Frequency: 5 GHz Span: 0 Hz. J8 J9 To A20 Lowband Input Attenuation - 10 db (Attenuator switches to 40 db when Preamp is enabled) TO REAR PANEL 28v (SWITCHED) W31 Note 1. Measured with Preamp On and Preselectors On Note 2. Measured with Preamp Off and Preselectors Off block_110_123_40_43_45 E4440A/E4443A/E4445A OPTION 110 AND 123 BLOCK DIAGRAM February 02, 2006

196 Hardware Options Overview and Verification of Option 123, Microwave and Millimeter Preselector Bypass 196 Chapter 8

197 Hardware Options Overview and Verification of Option 123, Microwave and Millimeter Preselector Bypass Overview of Option 123 in the E4446A, E4447A, or E4448A Functionality During normal operation of the PSA, when operating above 3 GHz, a preselector precedes the input mixer. This preselector is part of the SBTX and RYTHM circuitry. It is basically a tunable bandpass filter which prevents signals away from the frequency of interest from combining in the mixer to generate in-band spurious signals. The consequences of using this preselector filter are its limited bandwidth, amplitude and phase ripple in its passband, and amplitude and phase instability due to center frequency drift. Option 123 adds the > 3.05 GHz to 50 GHz unpreselected highband mixer path to the E4446A, E4447A, and E4448A millimeter wave band instruments. The block diagram is shown in Figure This option adds the millimeter unpreselected mixer, the 50 GHz coax transfer switch and the coax IF switch. The option driver board provides control of the switches, the unpreselected bias board control, and storage for the calibration factors that compensate the unpreselected path flatness. Figure 8-11 Block Diagram for 50 GHz Option 123 Instruments Chapter 8 197

198 Hardware Options Overview and Verification of Option 123, Microwave and Millimeter Preselector Bypass After the RF input attenuators the RF path is either routed to the normal preselected path (through SBTX and RYTHM) or to the unpreselected path using the coax transfer switch. The unpreselected mixer uses the ~3 to 7 GHz LO from the LO output port of the LO Multiplying Amplifier (referred to as FELOMA elsewhere). Since the LO normally used for the external mixing bands is used for the unpreselected mixer, Option AYZ (External Mixing) is not compatible with Option 123. Since the E4446A, E4447A, and E4448A instruments contain an additional down conversion path, with its own preselection filter, Option 123 for these models will bypass both sets of preselection filters present in those instruments i.e. the microwave preselection filter as well as the millimeter wave preselection filter. Figure 8-12 shows the block diagram for a configuration that has both the Preamp Option 110 as well as the Unpreselected Path Option 123. Figure 8-12 Block Diagram for 50 GHz Option 110 and 123 Instruments 198 Chapter 8

199 Hardware Options Overview and Verification of Option 123, Microwave and Millimeter Preselector Bypass Table 8-2 Verifying Option 123, Microwave Preselector Bypass (E4446A/E4447A/E448A) The following test switches in and out the preselector bypass path while viewing a signal. There may be slight amplitude differences between the two signal paths. Required Equipment Description Recommended Model Signal Source > 4 GHz 83630B High quality, low-loss cable, 2.4 mm various adapters depending on signal source used 1. Preset the PSA and signal source. 2. Connect the signal source to the PSA RF input with a high quality low-loss cable. PSA Settings Mode Center Frequency Start Frequency Stop Frequency Spectrum Analysis 4 GHz 3.06 GHz 10 GHz Signal Source Settings Frequency Amplitude 4 GHz -10 dbm 3. The 4 GHz signal should appear on screen. The analyzer is currently using the preselected path. 4. On the PSA, Press Input / Output, Uw/mmW Preselectors OFF. You should have heard the switches click. The preselectors are now bypassed. 5. Tune the Source and PSA to 10 GHz, 15 GHz, 20 GHz, 30 GHz, 40 GHz and 50 GHz to determine if any problems exist in other frequency bands. The accuracy of the measured amplitude will depend on the source flatness, quality of interconnect cables, and the frequency response of the PSA. You may wish to select uw/mmw Preselectors On and run through the test frequencies so you can compare both the preselector on and off amplitude values so you can separate the amplitude variation of the preselector off state from the test equipment and preselector on signal path contributions. Chapter 8 199

200 Hardware Options Overview and Verification of Option 123, Microwave and Millimeter Preselector Bypass Troubleshooting Hints 1. Place the instrument on a table. Remove the screws that hold the instrument front frame to the chassis so the front frame can be dropped to expose the circuitry behind the front frame. Refer to the instructions for dropping the front frame on page 314. Do not remove and front panel cables since the front frame must remain functional. 2. Run Align All Now, then turn Auto Align OFF. This will allow you to remove cables and troubleshoot without having Auto Align run unexpectedly and change your measured results. 3. Signal path troubleshooting requires connection to devices with 2.4 mm connectors. A short semi-rigid cable with 2.4 mm male connectors on both ends is recommended. The Required Test Equipment list on page 24 contains the Agilent part number of a cable that can be modified (bent) and used for this purpose. 4. Other items required include: TORX #10 driver 5/16-inch wrenches (2 required) 1/4-inch wrench Cable, 2.4 mm (m) to 2.4 mm (m) or (f), 1 meter (2 required) assorted 2.4 mm adapters Refer to the E4446A, 47A, 48A Option 110 and Option 123 block diagram for interconnection and signal level information. 200 Chapter 8

201 E4446A/E4447A/E4448A OPTION 110 AND 123 BLOCK DIAGRAM RF-INPUT DC COUPLED 3 Hz to fmax A Calibrator Signal 50 MHz CW, -25 dbm -25 dbm W7 W20 A14 INPUT ATTENUATOR A 6 db 2 db 2 db Note 1: -65 dbm Note 2: -36 dbm SW4 Note 1: -40 dbm Note 2: -37 dbm W101 SW W NC W105 Note 1: dbm W34 A19 SBTX SBTX LB Switch > 26.8 GHz Preselector 3 Hz GHz MHz GHz A19 FL1 27 GHz LPF Cable RYTHM GHz HIGH BAND YTF PRESELECTOR 3 Hz GHz LOW BAND Odd/Even IF -37 dbm W51 W89 SW3 A27 ELECTRONIC ATTENUATOR OPTION B7J 0-40 db IN 1dB STEPS W52 FL1 3 GHz, LPF fmax: E4446A = 44 GHz E4447A = GHz E4448A = 50 MHz W8 A15 INPUT ATTENUATOR B 10 db 30 db 20 db W102 W103 A36 PREAMP (OPT 110) AT3 3 db W99 A34 UNPRESELECTED MIXER (OPT 123) RF IF LO1 50 W MM BAND 3.92 GHz -48 dbm LO 3-7 GHz W94 Note 1: -53 dbm Note 2: dbm To 3rd Converter J1 W29 W30 A38 OPTION DRIVER W91 10 SWITCH CONTROL J3 W106 W92 10 W90 9 LO A35 MIXER BIAS W93 Note 2: GHz 11 dbm Note 2: MHz -50 dbm W98 AT2 3 db W46 W55 W38 MIXER BIAS Note - POWER LEVELS BASED ON THESE SETTINGS: Mode: Spectrum Analysis Center Frequency: 5 GHz Span: 0 Hz. Input Attenuation - 10 db (Attenuator switches to 40 db when Preamp is enabled) Note 1. Measured with Preamp On and Preselectors On Note 2. Measured with Preamp Off and Preselectors Off J7 PREAMP CONTROL SWITCH CONTROL SWITCH CONTROL P1 J8 J9 A13 FRONT END DRIVER 10 Mhz REF. 10 1/N COUNTER N= N=1-2 W96 1/N COUNTER PRE-SEL OUT (REAR PANEL) YTF TUNE RAMP GENERATOR W31 16 BIT DAC 16 BIT DAC VARIABLE GAIN RAMP GENERATOR LOWBAND BIAS/CONTROL J8 W47 DELAY COMP. 10 khz J5 10 khz W70 J6 BIAS/CTRL J14 TO 3rd CONVERTER VIA MOTHERBOARD FIFA MODULE BIAS/CTRL W58 J J4 F 10 J3 ATTENUATOR CONTROL W W69 THERMOMETER FROM LO VIA MOTHERBOARD +32v 10 28v REGULATOR A29 LOMA/SBTX Driver J1 J2 ELECTRONIC ATTENUATOR CONTROL YTO MAIN COIL FM COIL PASS THRU TO REAR PANEL 28v (SWITCHED) J13 J7 J9 J10 W68 20 W53 W25 10 W71 24 A GHz YTO W W24 J1 W42 J5 AT1 2 db J6 F A30 FIFA W43 A21 FREQ. EXT. LO MULTIPLIER/AMP (FELOMA) ( ) X2 U1 3-7 GHz -9 dbm SW1 W J2 +13 dbm 26 J3 J GHz +14 dbm W41 W37-36 dbm 1ST LO 3-7 GHz + 14 dbm GHz -32 dbm W54 A20 LOWBAND J1 J2 J8 W56 3Hz-3GHz LIMITER FL2 BPF CF= GHz BW= 40MHz FIRST MIXER LO IF BIAS BIAS-ADJ. L.O. NULLING W39 OVERLOAD DETECTOR 9dB RING RESONATOR GHz -30 dbm J3 3dB 1ST IF AMP -33 dbm J4 2dB LO BIAS ADJ. 7.2 GHz NOTCH SECOND MIXER 10dB 10dB 2ND LO GAIN ADJ. 6dB 400 MHz 2ND LO POWER DETECTOR 10dB J7 J6 J5 CF=3.6 GHz 3.6 GHz AUX OUT -8 dbm 2ND LO 3.6 GHz, +1dBm E4446A/E4447A/E4448A OPTION 110 AND 123 BLOCK DIAGRAM block_110_123_46_47_48 January 30, 2006

202 Hardware Options Overview and Verification of Option 123, Microwave and Millimeter Preselector Bypass 202 Chapter 8

203 Hardware Options Verifying Option 124, Y-Axis Video Out Figure 8-13 Option 124 Verifying Option 124, Y-Axis Video Out The following two procedures outline how to verify that the rear panel video out signal is correct. The first procedure is a quick check of the 0 to 1 V video out signal level that requires only a voltmeter. The second procedure allows you to view the video out signal on an oscilloscope and compare it to the PSA screen. Figure 8-13 shows the block diagram of the optional A7 Digital IF that supports Option 124. Procedure 1 - Quick check of video out level. Connect a voltmeter to the rear panel Video Out port of the PSA. Set the voltmeter to measure DC volts. 1. With the instrument is spectrum analysis mode, Preset the instrument. 2. Select the internal amplitude reference by pressing Input/Output, Input Port, and selecting the Amptd Ref. 3. Tune the analyzer to 50 MHz. Frequency, 50 MHz. 4. Set the analyzer to 5 db/div. Amplitude, Scale/Div, 5 db 5. Set the analyzer to zero span. Span, Zero Span. Chapter 8 203

204 Hardware Options Verifying Option 124, Y-Axis Video Out 6. Place the displayed signal at mid screen by pressing Amplitude, and adjusting the reference level until the signal is as close as possible to exactly mid screen. The voltmeter should read 0.5 volts. 7. Adjust the reference level to place the signal exactly on the top graticule line. The voltmeter should read 1 V. NOTE The signal trace cannot be displayed above the top graticule line. However, the analyzer will measure signals above the top graticule line. Therefore the Video Output will be driven above 1 V even though it appears the on screen trace is only at the top graticule line. 8. Adjust the reference level to place the signal on the bottom graticule line. The voltmeter should read 0V. 9. Notice also that as the signal is moved up and down the screen, the voltmeter reading changes 0.1V per graticule division. Procedure 2 - Detailed view of the video signal Connect channel 1 of the oscilloscope to the rear panel Video Out port of the PSA. Connect channel 2 of the oscilloscope to the rear panel Trigger 1 Out port of the PSA. Trigger 1 on the PSA is the High=Sweeping (HSWP) signal. Trigger 1 goes high just before the sweep starts on the analyzer screen. These connections will allow the oscilloscope display to resemble the PSA display. PSA Setup: Instrument preset Turn on internal 50 MHz, 25 dbm cal signal Center Frequency Span Sweep Time Res BW Attenuator 50 MHz 10 MHz 1 ms 300 khz 10 db Ref Level 24 dbm Places the 50 MHz cal signal at top screen on the PSA Scale/Div 10 db/ Div 204 Chapter 8

205 Hardware Options Verifying Option 124, Y-Axis Video Out Oscilloscope Setup: Input 1 Input 2 Time/Div Volts/Div Turn on the input. 1 M ohms, DC Coupling, BW limit OFF Probe = 1 Turn on the input. 1 M ohms, DC Coupling, BW limit OFF Probe = 1 Invert = Off 200 ms 200 mv This input connected to PSA Video Out This input connected to Trigger 1 Out of PSA. Displaying the external trigger signal shows the relationship between the trigger signal and the displayed video on the oscilloscope. Trigger Source Input 2 Trigger Mode Trigger Level Normal Set so oscilloscope triggers The oscilloscope display reveals the following: The Video Out signal resembles the PSA display. This means the A7 Digital IF assembly in the PSA has successfully reconstructed a video signal from the ADC. The period of the trigger signal is 1 ms which corresponds to the full 10 division horizontal sweep time of 1 ms on the PSA. The 200 mv /Div vertical scope setting allows 5 vertical divisions on the oscilloscope to correspond to the 10 division display on the PSA. Chapter 8 205

206 Hardware Options Verifying Option 124, Y-Axis Video Out 206 Chapter 8

207 9 Block Diagrams 207

208 Block Diagrams What You Will Find in This Chapter What You Will Find in This Chapter The following information is presented in this chapter: 1. A table showing signal levels in the instrument s forward path. 2. Descriptions of the signal mnemonics used in the instrument and mnemonic pin locations. 3. Overall block diagrams of the Agilent PSA Series Spectrum Analyzers. The following sections are found in this chapter: Mnemonics Descriptions...page 209 Overall block diagram (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A)...page 213 Front Panel Interface Board block diagram...page 215 Motherboard Schematic...page 217 Overall block diagram (E4446A, E4448A)...page Chapter 9

209 Block Diagrams Signal Mnemonics Signal Mnemonics Table 9-1 Mnemonic ACOM CALOSC_H CALOSC_L DCOM FP_BLUE0 FP_BLUE1 FP_BLUE2 FP_BLUE3 FP_CBLANKL FP_CLK FP_CSL FP_D0 FP_D1 FP_D2 FP_D3 FP_D4 FP_D5 FP_D6 FP_D7 FP_DOTCLK FP_GREEN0 FP_GREEN1 FP_GREEN2 FP_GREEN3 FP_HSYNCL FP_P15SBY FP_PWR_RST_L FP_RED0 Faulty assemblies can be identified by confirming that a specific signal on an assembly is not at its expected level. Mnemonic Descriptions Analog ground (chassis) Description Differential ECL 21.4 MHz calibration oscillator output from the analog IF board to the RF board Differential ECL 21.4 MHz calibration oscillator output from the analog IF board to the RF board Digital ground (single point ground inside the power supply) Flat panel display blue 0 (LSB) signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Flat panel display blue 1 signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Flat panel display blue 2 signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Flat panel display blue 3 (MSB) signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Flat panel display blanking signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Front panel bus 7.5 MHz clock signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Front panel bus chip select signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Front panel bus data 0 (LSB) signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Front panel bus data 1 signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Front panel bus data 2 signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Front panel bus data 3 signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Front panel bus data 4 signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Front panel bus data 5 signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Front panel bus data 6 signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Front panel bus data 7 (MSB) signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Flat panel display 25 MHz dot clock signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Flat panel display green 0 (LSB) signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Flat panel display green 1 signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Flat panel display green 2 signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Flat panel display green 3 (MSB) signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Flat panel display horizontal sync signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Front panel +15V standby power supply from the fan control board to the front panel interface board Front panel bus power on reset signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Flat panel display red 0 (LSB) signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Chapter 9 209

210 Block Diagrams Signal Mnemonics Table 9-1 Mnemonic Descriptions Mnemonic FP_RED1 FP_RED2 FP_RED3 FP_VSYNCL FP_W_RL GATE_ARM GATE_TRIG HPUP N12 N15 Description Flat panel display red 1 signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Flat panel display red 2 signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Flat panel display red 3 (MSB) signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Flat panel display vertical sync signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Front panel bus read/write signal from the CPU board to the front panel interface board Gate arm signal from the analog IF board to the digital IF board Gate trigger signal from the analog IF board to the digital IF board High = power up +5.2 V when instrument is turned on 12 V power supply from the motherboard to the CPU board 15 V power supply on the motherboard N V power supply on the motherboard P12 P15 P15SBY P V power supply from the motherboard to the CPU board +15 V power supply on the motherboard +15 V standby power supply on the motherboard +32 V power supply on the motherboard P V power supply on the motherboard PROBE_N12.6 PROBE_P15 SR_H SR_L SWEEP_ARM SWEEP_TRIG TRIG1 TRIG2 VCC VDL VFAN+ VFAN- Probe power 12.6 V power supply from the fan control board to the front panel interface board Probe power +15 V power supply from the fan control board to the front panel interface board Differential ECL sample rate clock from the analog IF board to the digital IF board Differential ECL sample rate clock from the analog IF board to the digital IF board Sweep arm signal from the analog IF board to the digital IF board Sweep trigger signal from the analog IF board to the digital IF board Trigger #1 output from the digital IF assembly to all vertical assemblies Trigger #2 output from the digital IF assembly to all vertical assemblies +5.2 V digital power supply +3.4 V digital power supply Cooling fans positive power supply from the fan control board to the fan connectors on the motherboard Cooling fans negative power supply from the fan control board to the fan connectors on the motherboard 210 Chapter 9

211 Block Diagrams Signal Mnemonics Figure 9-1 Graphic Symbols Chapter 9 211

212 Block Diagrams Overall Block Diagrams Overall Block Diagrams 212 Chapter 9

213 E4440A, E4443A and E4445A OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM RF-INPUT DC COUPLED 3Hz to f max AC COUPLED 20MHz to f max (Coupling not automatic) f max: E4440A= 26.5 GHz E4445A= 13.2 GHz E4443A= 6.7 GHz se81a W7 Calibrator Signal 50 MHz CW, -25 dbm A13 FRONT END DRIVER 10 Mhz REF. [50 MHz, -25 dbm] ( 5 GHz, -25 dbm) A14 INPUT ATTENUATOR A W20 A 1/N COUNTER N= YTF TUNE RAMP GENERATOR 48 N=1-2 1/N COUNTER A12 LO SYNTHESIZER 16 BIT DAC 16 BIT DAC VARIABLE GAIN RAMP GENERATOR +32v 28v REGULATOR DELAY COMP. 10 khz 2 db 2 db W8 10 db 6 db 20 db 30 db PRE-SEL OUT (REAR PANEL) W47 (97) 10 khz A12 A2 SAMPLING OSCILLATOR DAUGHTER BD. F RATE MULTIPLIER N= MHz N*600/ MHz OFFSET SAMPLING OSC. PLL J3 J4 L TO REAR PANEL 28v (SWITCHED) X2 (600 MHz FROM MOTHERBOARD) R W29 W26 A15 INPUT ATTENUATOR B B W30 J5 J6 J3 J4 J11 RYTHM BIAS/CTRL TO 3rd CONVERTER VIA MOTHERBOARD LOWBAND BIAS/CONTROL J1 1200MHz J8 W31 J3 10 ATTENUATOR CONTROL UNPRESELECTED MIXER CONTROL MHz THERMOMETER PREAMP BIAS/CTRL WIDE SPAN FROM LO VIA MOTHERBOARD J9 W49 S 10 SLODA LEVELING LOOP SAMPLER IF 90 MHz LPF MHz NARROW SPAN 1/R R=5, 6, 7 (DUAL LOOP) 129 (SINGLE LOOP) 14 ELECTRONIC ATTENUATOR CONTROL YTO MAIN COIL FM COIL PASS THRU LO UNLEVEL GATE BIAS HI/LO SWITCH BIAS DUAL PATH LOOP NARROW SPAN (DUAL LOOP) J13 J7 J2 J1 3-7 GHz FRAC-N Divider F [50 MHz, -35 dbm] ( 5 GHz, -35 dbm) W53 W25 10 W28 1/8 W9 20 SINGLE LOOP PATH A18 J1 3-7 GHz YTO MHz WIDE SPAN (SINGLE LOOP) A19 RYTHM YTF Coil Driver YTF [ GHz, dbm] ( GHz, dbm) 10 W35 A12 A1 SYNTHESIZER PRETUNE GAIN CONTROL PRETUNE GENERATOR DAC MAIN COIL FM COIL ( GHz, 14 dbm ± 3 db) W51 A21 SLODA LO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER PIN ATTEN. W24 DELAY COMP MAIN COIL FILTER Odd/Even IF LO 3-7 GHz LO OUT to front panel TO FE DRIVER VIA MOTHERBOARD. [50 MHz, -35 dbm] W17 W38 EXT. SENSE 3-7 GHz -3 TO -8 dbm W45 (Opt AYZ) A27 ELECTRONIC ATTENUATOR OPTION B7J IN INT. SENSE SAMPLER OUT W22 (70) REAR PANEL EXT. REF INPUT 1MHz TO 30MHz REAR PANEL 10MHz REF OUT +5dBm W21 (90) (321.4 MHz - 48 ± 1 dbm) HIGH/LOW W46 (Opt AYZ) 0-40 db IN 1dB STEPS HI LO FIRST LO OUT 3-7 GHz + 15 dbm Nominal A11 REFERENCE BOARD P1 P2 1/R W41 [ GHz 14.5 dbm ± 1 db] 50MHz/N.F. F dbm FL dbm 3 GHz, LPF W48 J2 W52 B 20 A20 LOWBAND J1 J2 3Hz-3GHz LIMITER 1ST LO 3.9-7GHz 100 MHz PLL UNLOCK DETECTOR LOOP GAIN FRAC-N EXT. REF OUT OFF 100 MHz VCO W49 W50 FIRST MIXER 10 db 90 HYBRID J8 26 A22 LOWBAND PREAMP OPTION 1DS Coax Switch LO IF BIAS-ADJ. 1dB 1dB LO NULLING 1 / 2 1 / 5 W61 (65) P5 X3 (Option 122) I BIAS 3dB 3dB Q BIAS 100 MHz TO WB A-IF 300 MHz 50 MHz CAL. 10 MHz DIST. +20 db +20 db 5 db [ GHz, -31 dbm] OVERLOAD DETECTOR RING RESONATOR 2 db CPU FRONT END DRIVER LO SYNTH ANALOG IF OPTIONS X2 50 MHz CAL (TO 3RD CONVERTER) 5 db W40 9dB J3 3dB 1ST IF AMP 600 MHz J4 2dB LO BIAS ADJ. W GHz NOTCH 300 MHz 3RD LO, TO 3RD CONVERTER 300 MHz -27 dbm DOUBLER BIAS DETECTOR 10dB 10dB FL2 CF = [ GHz, dbm] BW = 40 MHz SECOND MIXER C P4 P3 J5 2ND LO GAIN ADJ. CF=3.6 GHz 2ND LO 3.6 GHz, +3dBm 600 MHz db 400 MHz 2ND LO POWER DETECTOR W62 (Option 122) (95) W15 J7 J6 TO A31 WB A-IF W16 (4) TO SYNTH BD. VIA MOTHERBOARD Front Panel IF IN (321.4 MHz Nominal -20 dbm, Max) (Option AYZ) [321.4 MHz IF -43 dbm + 2 dbm] 3.6 GHz AUX OUT -8 dbm W17 (10) J1 W18 (7) A9 2ND LO BOARD J1 TEMP. SENSE MAIN COIL UNLOCK INDICATOR W44 A10 THIRD CONVERTER J3 J2 EXT. MIXER BIAS 14dB 3.6 GHz PMYO FM COIL S BIAS T 50 MHz FROM REFERENCE BOARD VIA MOTHERBOARD THERMOMETER W13 (20) 0-30 db 2 db/step 200 MHz 2 GHz -.5 TO 4.5 V VARIABLE GAIN RAMP FROM FE DRIVER VIA MOTHERBOARD 50 MHz CALIBRATOR ALC LEVELING LOOP 50 MHz CALIBRATOR TO INPUT ATTENUATOR J10 FAN CONTROL TRIG 1 OUT J12 5dB TRIG 2 OUT J11 TO REAR PANEL W14 (30) LINEARIZATION CIRCUIT DET. A LEVEL DAC W20 (50) 14 db 2ND IF AMP 2 SYSTEM VARIABLE GAIN PIN DIODE DRIVE CAL SIGNAL MUX J7 A8 ANALOG IF W11 (3) J13 3 db MHz, -27 dbm + 2dB REAR PANEL EXT. TRIG. W12 (6) W1 (5) FRONT PANEL EXT. TRIG. BUFFER P4 P1 TRIG 2 LEV TRIG 1 LEV AGC J6 W64 (60) 14 db 14 db 2ND IF AMP MHz CAL SIGNAL I 9.6 db L 3 db AUX IF OUT AMP W65 (40) W19 (40) MHz BW=30 MHz DACS 300 MHz, +7 dbm 21.4 MHz AMP J4 CAL-OSC, LOW CAL-OSC, HIGH (Option 122) IF OUT TO A31 WB A-IF MHz, -30 dbm + 2 db AUX OUTPUT TO REAR PANEL TUNE FROM AIF VIA MOTHERBOARD D CAL SIGNAL FROM A31 WB A-IF LC BW = 200 khz TO 2.83 MHz XTAL BW = 2.5 khz TO 200 khz DET. LC XTAL INTERP. CAL CAL OSC LINE BURST TV POWER DETECTOR VIDEO PK DET. 3 TRIGGER MUX (Option 122) AIF MAIN GAIN BURST 2dB 3RD MIXER R 1 db 2.8 db 2.8 db C L I 300 MHz +23 dbm 300 MHz 21.4 MHz 3RD LO AMPLIFIERS 300 MHz, +11dBm FROM REFERENCE BD. VIA MOTHERBOARD PLL -3dB ANTI ALIAS FILTER BW = 10 MHz BURST TRIGGER THRESHOLD GATE ARM GATE TRIG SWEEP ARM SWEEP TRIG 10MHz REF TO DIF VIA MOTHERBOARD +15 db 21.4 MHz AUTO RANGE TO DIF VIA MOTHERBOARD +7dB 4TH MIXER R L I 28.9 MHz 4TH LO PLL PLL J MHz PLL 42.8 MHz 30 MHz J5 2 MHz 12.5 MHz 10 MHz REF POWER SUPPLY SWITCHING REFERENCE CALIBRATION FREQUENCY GENERATOR ECL MHz +4 dbm MAX -6dB 244 khz ±5% FM DEVIATION FM RATE = 10 Hz TO POWER SUPPLY VIA MOTHERBOARD CAL OSC TRIGGER INTERPOLATOR CAL TRIGGER CAL OSC HI TO 3RD CONVERTER CAL OSC LO INTERP CAL TRIGGER ECL A7 DIGITAL IF P1 50 W J9 P62 P2 J9 P55 J9 P54 W10 (8) D SAMPLE RATE HI SAMPLE RATE LO Note - POWER LEVELS BASED ON THESE SETTINGS: Center Frequency - 50 MHz for Low band, 5 GHz for High band, Preselector Centering Required for Input Signals >3 GHz. Span - 0 Hz. Input Attenuation - 10 db Preamp - Off Electronic Attenuator - 0 db Single Sweep AUTO RANGE ATTEN: 0 TO 24 db 6 db STEPS 6 db 18 db 6 db 21.4 MHz AUTORANGE RANGING RULES RANGE DETECTION 7.5 MHz, -24 dbm + 2dB ADC OFFSET TP5 DITHER GENERATOR -20 dbm 14 BIT ADC TIMING TRIGGER INPUTS FROM AIF 2 30 MHz A5 POWER SUPPLY SWITCHING FREQ REF. LINE TRIGGER. GAIN LOOK UP TRIG1,TRIG2 TO 2ND LO BD. DIGITAL IF ASIC SERIAL BUS INTERFACE PCI BUS (TO CPU BUS) E4440A, E4443A and E4445A OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM March 28, 2008 ADDRESS BUS DATA BUS POWER SUPPLY SHUTDOWN V -5.2 V +9 V +15 V -15 V +32 V

214 Block Diagrams Overall Block Diagrams 214 Chapter 9

215 PSA SERIES FRONT PANEL INTERFACE BLOCK DIAGRAM A2 FRONT PANEL INTERFACE VCC VCC VCC TO KEYBOARD A3J1 J4 40 PIN KBDROW 0:7 8 ROW_STRB_L BACKLIGHT_OFF A2W21 KBDCOL 0:7 8 COL 0:7 8 DAC_STRB_L STBY_LED ON_LED KEYBOARD INTERFACE INTERFACE PLD RPG1A RPG1B RPG BACKLIGHT INTENSITY J1 5 PIN J2 5 PIN A2W22 A2A1 INVERTER ASSEMBLY A2A2 INVERTER ASSEMBLY W3 W4 A1DS1 BACKLIGHT A1 FLAT PANEL DISPLAY A1DS2 BACKLIGHT KBDREV1 KBDREV1 KBDREVO KBDREVO P1 PROBE POWER W2 DCOM ACOM J3 100 PIN FP-P155BY FP_DATA 8 PROBE_N12.6 PROBE_P15 PROBE POWER EMI FILTER ACOM + 15V -12.6V FROM A25 MOTHERBOARD VCC VDL P5.2 FP_ADDRESS FP_AO:A2 FP_CLCK FP_W_RL 3 VDL P3 40 PIN PROBE_P15 PROBE_N12.6 FP_PWR_RST_L FP_CSL FP_REDO: W5 FP_GREENO:3 FP_BLUEO:3 FP_HSYNCL FP_VSYNCL FP_DOTCLK 4 4 FLAT PANEL DISPLAY DRIVE/ POWER SEQUENCER FP_CBLANKL FP_A3 (NOT USED) FP_INTRL (NOT USED) se853a PSA SERIES FRONT PANEL INTERFACE BLOCK DIAGRAM

216 Block Diagrams Overall Block Diagrams 216 Chapter 9

217 Agi l ent MOTHERBOARD E se860a

218 Block Diagrams Overall Block Diagrams 218 Chapter 9

219 E4446A/E4447A/E4448A OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM F 50W F W49 B A27 ELECTRONIC ATTENUATOR OPTION B7J -25 dbm YTF W51 W7 3 Hz GHz -38dBm Odd/Even IF 0-40 db IN 1dB STEPS 5GHz FL1 DC COUPLED > 26.8 GHz 3 GHz, LPF 3 Hz to fmax W20 Preselector W17 Front Panel SBTX LB GHz Switch HIGH BAND A Calibrator Signal 50 MHz CW, -25 dbm fmax: E4446A = 44 GHz E4447A = GHz E4448A = 50 MHz W8 A13 FRONT END DRIVER 10 Mhz REF. sn51a A14 INPUT ATTENUATOR A 1/N COUNTER N= db YTF TUNE RAMP GENERATOR 48 N=1-2 1/N COUNTER A12 LO SYNTHESIZER A15 INPUT ATTENUATOR B PRE-SEL OUT (REAR PANEL) W31 A12W2 10 db 16 BIT DAC 16 BIT DAC 2 db VARIABLE GAIN RAMP GENERATOR LOWBAND BIAS/CONTROL 2 db 30 db W47 DELAY COMP. 10 khz W29 PREAMP BIAS/CTRL W49 20 db 10 khz A12 A2 SAMPLING OSCILLATOR DAUGHTER BD. F RATE MULTIPLIER N=6-63 J8 N*600/ MHz OFFSET SAMPLING OSC. PLL L J3 J4 X2 (600 MHz FROM MOTHERBOARD) R J9 W70 J5 J6 J14 B BIAS/CTRL SBTX W33 W30 TO 3rd CONVERTER VIA MOTHERBOARD FIFA MODULE BIAS/CTRL A12W1 J J1 1200MHz W58 A19 10 J4 W34 ATTENUATOR CONTROL MHz J UNPRESELECTED MIXER CONTROL THERMOMETER WIDE SPAN 20 W69 J11 FROM LO VIA MOTHERBOARD S J3 +32v 28v REGULATOR SAMPLER IF 90 MHz LPF MHz NARROW SPAN 50MHz A29 LOMA/SBTX Driver J1 J2 ELECTRONIC ATTENUATOR CONTROL YTO MAIN COIL FM COIL PASS THRU NARROW SPAN (DUAL LOOP) MODULUS CONTROL R=5, 6, 7 (DUAL LOOP) 129 (SINGLE LOOP) 1/R TO REAR PANEL 28v (SWITCHED) DUAL PATH LOOP J9 J13 J7 J10 J1 3-7 GHz A19 FL1 27 GHz LPF Cable W53 TESSERA PAREN F W25 1/8 W SINGLE LOOP PATH W MHz WIDE SPAN (SINGLE LOOP) MM BAND 3.92 GHz -48 dbm W55 A GHz YTO PRETUNE GAIN CONTROL RYTHM W42 A30 FIFA W W J1 A12 A1 SYNTHESIZER PRETUNE GENERATOR DAC MAIN COIL FM COIL LO 3-7 GHz J5 W38 J6 A22 LOWBAND PREAMP OPTION 1DS Coax Switch W43 A21 FREQ. EXT. LO MULTIPLIER/AMP (FELOMA) ( ) DELAY COMP MAIN COIL FILTER X2 3 Hz GHz LOW BAND 2 db AT GHz -32 dbm TO FE DRIVER VIA MOTHERBOARD. U1 3-7 GHz -9 dbm - 36 dbm W22 (70) SW1 REAR PANEL EXT. REF INPUT 1MHz TO 30MHz REAR PANEL 10MHz REF OUT +5dBm W21 (90) W46 50 J2 +13 dbm W45 26 J3 J GHz +14 dbm +30 dbm W41 Front Panel (1st LO Output 3-7 GHz + 15 dbm Nominal) (Option AYZ) A11 REFERENCE BOARD P1 P2 1/R W50 W54-36 dbm 1ST LO 3-7 GHz + 14 dbm F MODULUS CONTROL 1/F,N W52 W48 A20 LOWBAND J1 J2 J8 W56 3Hz-3GHz LIMITER 100 MHz PLL UNLOCK DETECTOR LOOP GAIN PAREN FRAC-N EXT. REF OUT OFF 100 MHz VCO FL2 BPF CF= GHz BW= 40MHz FIRST MIXER 1 / 2 1 / 5 LO IF BIAS BIAS-ADJ. X3 300 MHz L.O. NULLING SAW FILTER 50 MHz CAL. 10 MHz DIST. W39 OVERLOAD DETECTOR 9dB RING RESONATOR CPU FRONT END DRIVER LO SYNTH ANALOG IF OPTIONS GHz -30 dbm X2 50 MHz CAL (TO 3RD CONVERTER) J3 3dB 1ST IF AMP 600 MHz -33 dbm J4 2dB LO BIAS ADJ. 7.2 GHz NOTCH SECOND MIXER 10dB 10dB 2ND LO GAIN ADJ. 300 MHz 3RD LO, TO 3RD CONVERTER 300 MHz DOUBLER BIAS DETECTOR P4 P3 6dB W17 (10) 400 MHz 2ND LO POWER DETECTOR C W16 (4) 10dB 600 MHz +11 dbm TO SYNTH BD. VIA MOTHERBOARD IF IN (321.4 MHz Nominal -20 dbm, Max) (Option AYZ) CF=3.6 GHz A9 2ND LO BOARD J1 J7 J6 J5 W18 (7) TEMP. SENSE MAIN COIL UNLOCK INDICATOR W MHz -50 dbm MHz -44 dbm 3.6 GHz AUX OUT -8 dbm 2ND LO 3.6 GHz, +1dBm W GHz PMYO FM COIL A10 THIRD CONVERTER J3 J1 J2 S EXT. MIXER BIAS 14dB W13 (20) BIAS T 50 MHz FROM REFERENCE BOARD VIA MOTHERBOARD J10 FAN CONTROL TRIG 1 OUT J12 14dB THERMOMETER 0-30 db 2 db/step 5dB TRIG 2 OUT J11 TO REAR PANEL W14 (30) -.5 TO 3 V 200 MHz VARIABLE GAIN RAMP FROM FE DRIVER VIA MOTHERBOARD W20 (50) A8 ANALOG IF W11 (3) J13 3 db MHz, -30 dbm INPUT SIGNAL < 5GHz -33 db INPUT SIGNAL 30 GHz REAR PANEL EXT. TRIG. W12 (6) W1 (5) FRONT PANEL EXT. TRIG. 14dB LINEARIZATION CIRCUIT 50 MHz CALIBRATOR ALC LEVELING LOOP 50 MHz CALIBRATOR TO INPUT ATTENUATOR DET. A LEVEL DAC BUFFER P4 P1 J7 TRIG 2 LEV TRIG 1 LEV NOTE: J4 and W19 not present on E4447A SYSTEM VARIABLE GAIN PIN DIODE DRIVE CAL SIGNAL MUX J6 TV FILTER 14 db MHz CAL SIGNAL I 9.6 db L PREFILTERS. BW = 2.5 X RBW LC BW = 200 khz TO 7.5 MHz XTAL BW = 2.5 khz TO 200 khz LC XTAL INTERP. CAL CAL OSC LINE BURST TV POWER DETECTOR AGC 3 3 db AUX IF OUT AMP NOTCH 14 db 300 MHz, +7 dbm 21.4 MHz AMP CAL-OSC, LOW CAL-OSC, HIGH J4 PK DET. TRIGGER MUX W MHz BW=10 MHz TUNE AIF MAIN GAIN -1 DACS FROM AIF VIA MOTHERBOARD D MHz, -30 dbm AUX OUTPUT TO REAR PANEL (E4446A/E4448A) VIDEO INVERT GATE ARM GATE TRIG SWEEP ARM SWEEP TRIG 3RD MIXER R 5.1 db 5.5 db 2.1dB C PLL L -3dB ANTI ALIAS FILTER BW = 10 MHz BURST LPF 21.4 MHz AUTO RANGE TO DIF VIA MOTHERBOARD +7dB 4TH MIXER R L I 28.9 MHz 4TH LO BURST TRIGGER THRESHOLD TV TRIGGER 10MHz REF TO DIF VIA MOTHERBOARD I 300 MHz +21 dbm 300 MHz 21.4 MHz 3RD LO AMPLIFIERS 300 MHz, +11dBm FROM REFERENCE BD. VIA MOTHERBOARD VERT HORIZ ODD/EVEN 12dB PLL PLL J5 PLL 21.4 MHz 30 MHz 2 MHz 12.5 MHz 10 MHz REF POWER SUPPLY SWITCHING REFERENCE CALIBRATION FREQUENCY GENERATOR ECL 7.5 MHz +6-6dB 244 khz ±5% FM DEVIATION FM RATE = 10 Hz TO POWER SUPPLY VIA MOTHERBOARD CAL OSC TRIGGER INTERPOLATOR CAL TRIGGER A7 DIGITAL IF P7 50 W CAL OSC HI TO 3RD CONVERTER CAL OSC LO INTERP CAL TRIGGER ECL 6 db 6 db AUTO RANGE ATTEN: 0 TO 24 db 6 db STEPS 21.4 MHz AUTORANGE J9 P62 P2 J9 P55 J9 P54 RANGING RULES RANGE DETECTION W10 (8) 7.5 MHz, -24 dbm D Note - POWER LEVELS BASED ON THESE SETTINGS: Center Frequency - 50 MHz for Low band, 5 GHz for High band, 30 GHz for mm band. Preselector Centering Required for Input Signals >3 GHz. Span - 0 Hz. Input Attenuation - 10 db Preamp - Off Electronic Attenuator - 0 db Auto Align Turned Off After Inital Auto Align ADC OFFSET SAMPLE RATE HI SAMPLE RATE LO 18 db TP5 DITHER GENERATOR A5 POWER SUPPLY SWITCHING FREQ REF. 14 BIT ADC TIMING TRIGGER INPUTS FROM AIF 2 30 MHz LINE TRIGGER. GAIN LOOK UP TRIG1,TRIG2 TO 2ND LO BD. DIGITAL IF ASIC SERIAL BUS INTERFACE POWER SUPPLY SHUTDOWN E4446A/E4447A/E4448A OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM March 28, 2008 ADDRESS BUS 4 2 DATA BUS PCI BUS (TO CPU BUS) +5.2 V -5.2 V +9 V +15 V -15 V +32 V

220 Block Diagrams Overall Block Diagrams 220 Chapter 9

221 10 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations 221

222 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations What You Will Find in This Chapter What You Will Find in This Chapter The following information is found in this chapter: 1. Part number tables for assemblies, mechanical parts, cables, front panel connectors, and labels. 2. Part location diagrams for the following: Fig External Hardware page 249 Fig Top Brace Hardware page 250 Fig Front Frame Hardware page 251 Fig Major Assemblies page 252 Fig RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A - Standard page 254 Fig YTO Assembly page 256 Fig RF Input Connector E4440A, E4443A, E4445A page 258 Fig RF Section Cables E4440A, E4443A, E4445A - Standard page 260 Fig RF Section and Cables E4440A, E4443A, E4445A - (Options 1DS, BAB, B7J, and AYZ) page 262 Fig Option 122 or 140 RF Cable Locations page 262 Fig E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Option 123 Assemblies and Cable Locations Fig E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Option 123 Assemblies and Cable Locations Fig E4440A, E4443A, E4445A - Option 110 (with Option 123) page 264 page 264 page 266 Fig RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A - Standard page 268 Fig Options 110 and 123 E4446A, E4447A, E4448A page 270 Fig Options 110 and 123 E4446A, E4447A, E4448A (Rear View) Fig RF Input Connector and Attenuators E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Fig RF Section Cable Locations E4446A, E4447A, E4448A - Standard Fig SBTX Driver Board Ribbon Cable Locations E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Fig RF Section Assembly and Cable Locations E4446A, E4447A, E4448A - (Options 1DS, B7J, and AYZ) page 272 page 274 page 276 page 278 page 280 Fig Vertical Board Assembly Cables page Chapter 10

223 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations What You Will Find in This Chapter Fig Option Driver Board and Cables page 284 Fig Option 122 or 140 Assembly and Cable Locations, and Option 124 W67 Cable Location Fig Cable Locations, Front End Driver E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Fig Cable Locations, Front End Driver E4446A, E4447A, E4448A page 286 page 290 page 291 Fig Front Panel Parts page 292 Fig Front Panel Shield Hardware page 294 Fig Front Panel Assemblies page 295 Fig Display Parts page 296 Fig Disk Drive Parts page 297 Fig Rear Frame Hardware page 298 Fig Mid Web Parts page 300 Fig Fan Guard page 300 Fig Cable Hold Down page 302 Fig CPU Parts page 303 Chapter

224 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts Some of the assemblies listed in the following table are related to options that are available with the PSA Series Spectrum Analyzers. These options are described below. Option AYZ Option BAB Option B7J Option H70 Option 1DS Option 107 Option 110 Option 111 Option 115 Option 117 Option 122 Option 123 Option 124 Option 140 Adds external mixing (E4440A, E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) Adds APC 3.5 input connector (E4440A only). Adds digital demod hardware. Adds 70 MHz IF output at the rear panel. Adds a 100 khz - 3 GHz preamplifier. Adds Audio Input. Adds a 10 MHz GHz Preamplifier (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) or a 10 MHz GHz Preamplifier (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) Adds USB Device side I/O. Adds Extended Memory. Adds Secure Memory Erase. Adds 80 MHz Bandwidth Digitizer. (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) Adds Microwave/ Millimeter Wave Preselector Bypass Adds Y-Axis Video Output. Adds 40 MHz Bandwidth Digitizer. (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) 224 Chapter 10

225 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-1 Description Assemblies Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A AT1 2 db Attenuator X X X AT2 3 db Attenuator (Option 123) AT3 3 db Attenuator (Option 110) AT4 4 db Attenuator (Option 110) A1 Flat Panel Display (serial prefixes US/MY/SG 4611 and above) See Figure A1 Flat Panel Display Retrofit Kit (serial prefixes below US/MY/SG replaces early display) A1A1 Display Converter Board A2 Front Panel Interface (Includes Inverter Boards + cable) A2A1 and A2A2 Inverter Boards RPG (on the Front Panel Interface assembly) A3 Keyboard Assembly (Key pad not included) A5 Power Supply Assembly A6 SCSI Interface Board (with attached cover plate; serial prefixes US/MY/SG 4611 and above have A39 card installed in place of A6) A7 Digital IF retrofit kit for PSA when replacing Digital IF P/N E , E X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X E X X X X X X E X X X X X X E X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X E X X X X X X X X X X X X E X X X X X X E X X X X X X Chapter

226 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-1 Description Assemblies Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A A7 Digital IF Assembly (serial prefixes US/MY/SG 4611 and above. Also Option 122/140, 124) E X X X X X X A8 Analog IF Assembly E X X X X X X A9 2nd LO/ Fan Control E X X X X X X A10 3rd Converter Assy a E X X X X X A10 3rd Converter Assy (includes W18 permanently attached) E X A11 Reference Assembly E X X X X X X A12 Synthesizer Assembly (includes A12A1 and A12A2 boards plus shields, and MMCX cables) b E X X X X X X A12A1 E X X X X X X LO/Synthesizer Bd b A12A2 Sampling Oscillator Board A12W1 Cable, MMCX coax, Sampler Signal (120 mm) A12W2 Cable, MMCX coax, 600 MHz Ref (325 mm) A13 Front End Driver Board (serial prefix US/MY/SG 4251 and above) b A13 Front End Driver Bd Replacement Kit (serial prefix US/MY/SG 4222 and below) b A14 Input Attenuator (4 db)/switch/block cap) E X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X X X X 226 Chapter 10

227 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-1 Description Assemblies Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A A14 Input Attenuator (10 db)/switch) A15 Input Attenuator (66 db) A15 Input Attenuator (60 db) A18 YTO, 2.9 to 7 GHz (Yig Tuned Oscillator) A19 RYTHM, 26.5 GHz (Routing YIG Tuned Harmonic Mixer) A19 Refurbished RYTHM, 26.5 GHz A19 RYTHM, 6.7 and 13.2 GHz A19 Refurbished RYTHM, 6.7 and 13.2 GHz A19 SBTX/RYTHM Assembly, 44 GHz A19 Refurbished SBTX/RYTHM Assembly, 44 GHz A19 SBTX/RYTHM Assembly, 50 GHz A19 Refurbished SBTX/RYTHM Assembly, 50 GHz X X X X X X X X X E X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X A19FL1 Filter cable, 27 GHz, SBTX to RYTHM Not available separately X X X A20 Low Band Assembly E X X X X X X A21 SLODA (Switched LO Distribution Amplifier) A21 FELOMA (Frequency Extended LO Multiplying Amplifier) X X X X X X Chapter

228 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-1 Description Assemblies Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A A22 Preamp Assembly E X X X X X X (Option 1DS) c A23 Floppy Disk Drive X X X X X X A25 Motherboard E X X X X X X A26 CPU (Processor) (includes standoffs; does not include A26A1 DRAM assy or A26A2 Flash Memory assy) E X X X X X X A26A1 128M DRAM Assy (includes replacement standoffs) E X X X X X X A26A2 64 MB Flash Memory Replacement Kit (includes replacement standoffs) A26BTI Battery, Lithium Polycarbon Monofloride (3V, 0.16AH Panasonic BR2325) A27 Electronic Attenuator (Option B7J) E X X X X X X X X X X X X E X X X X X X A28 Audio Out Board E X X X X X X A29 SBTX Driver Board E X X X A30 FIFA, First IF Amplifier Assembly A31 Wideband Analog IF Assembly (Option 122 or 140) A32 Wideband Digital IF Assembly (Option 122 or 140) A33 70 MHz Output Assembly (Option H70) A34 Dual Mixer (Option 123) E X X X E X X X X X E X X X X X E X X X X X X X X 228 Chapter 10

229 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-1 Description Assemblies Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A A34 Unpreselected mm-wave Mixer (Option 123) A35 Mixer Bias Board (Option 123) (requires replacement of thermal pad, N ) A36 Microwave Preamp 26.5 GHz (Option 110) A36 Millimeter Preamp 50 GHz (Option 110) A37 Audio Digitizer Assembly (Option 107) A38 Option Driver Assembly (Option 110/123 A39 USB/Memory Board (cover plate not attached; includes memory card) (Option 111, 115, 117) A39A1 512 MB Flash Card (Option 115) B1, B2, or B3 Fan (fan, wires/connector + EMI disk) FL1 Low Pass Filter, 3 GHz FL2 Band Pass Filter, GHz FL2 Band Pass Filter, GHz (Option 122 or 140) FL3 Low Pass Filter, 4.4 GHz (Option 122 or 140) 1NB X X X E X X X X X X X X X E X X X X X X E Opt 110 Opt 110 Opt 110 Opt 110 Opt 123 Opt 110 Opt 123 Opt 110 Opt 123 E X X X X X X X X X X X X E X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Chapter

230 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-1 Description Assemblies Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A FL4 High Pass Filter, 3 GHz SW1 RF Switch 1 Bottom Switch (Option 123) SW2 RF Switch 2 Top Switch (Option 123) (must also order shield, SW2. see Mechanical Parts table SW3 Coaxial Switch (Option 123) SW4 Millimeter XFER Switch 50 GHz (top switch) (Option 110) SW5 Switch, Millimeter (bottom switch) (Option 123) SW6 Switch, Microwave (Option 110) 50 Ω termination for LO OUT port of A21 SLODA or Option AYZ 1st LO OUT Opt 110 and Opt 123 Opt 110 and Opt 123 Opt 110 and Opt X X X X X X N X X X X X X X X X N X X X X X X a. Instruments need a firmware update to revision A when replacing this assembly. b. Instruments need a firmware update to revision A when replacing this assembly. c. Instruments need a firmware update to revision A when replacing this assembly. 230 Chapter 10

231 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-2 Description Mechanical Parts Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A Dress Panel, rear E X X X X X X Disk Drive Board E X X X X X X Disk Drive Mount E X X X X X X L-bracket, RF Main E X X X E X X X RF Frame E X X X X X X Bracket, Electronic Attenuator (Option B7J) Bracket, Bandpass Filter Bracket, RF Micro Bracket, RF Attenuators E X X X X X X E X X X X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X Lid, A18 YTO E X X X X X X Shield, A18 YTO E X X X X X X Screw, M3 x 0.58 MM long Grommet, A18 YTO (2 each) Shoulder Washers, A18 YTO (2 each) Screw, A18 YTO Shield (2 each) Cable clip for A15 Attenuator ribbon cable Standoffs, Memory boards Screwlock, GPIB.327 x 6-32 Washer, lock for GPIB Screwlock, ID X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Chapter

232 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-2 Description Bracket, Switch (Option 123) Shield, SW2 (Top Switch) (Option 123) Mechanical Parts Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A E X X X E X X X Washer, lock for BNC connector mounting X X X X X X Screwlock, x X X X X X X Screwlock, SCSI X X X X X X Nut, 15/32-32 Rear panel BNC connector mounting Nut, 7/16-32 Rear panel SMA connector mounting X X X X X X X X X X X X Washer for SMA X X X X X X Star washer for BNC connectors Nylon spacer.25 round (4 spacers keep the CPU from bending when vertical boards are inserted) X X X X X X X X X X X X CPU shim E X X X X X X CPU shim E X X X X X X Shield, magnetic (used inside instrument cover, 2 places) Instrument Cover (enclosure) E X X X X X X E X X X X X X Top Brace E X X X X X X Rear foot X X X X X X Bottom foot X X X X X X Key lock for bottom instrument feet X X X X X X 232 Chapter 10

233 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-2 Description Mechanical Parts Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A Spring-Wire Frame (for two front bottom feet) Front Frame Assy. (includes EMI gaskets and trim strips ) Rear Frame Assy. (includes EMI gaskets) Front Dress Panel (includes keyboard overlay label) X X X X X X E X X X X X X E X X X X X X E X X X X X X Deck Assy. (chassis) E X X X X X X Strap Handle Assembly E X X X X X X Front Shield E X X X X X X Keypad E X X X X X X RPG Knob X X X X X X Nut for RPG, M6x X X X X X X Volume Knob X X X X X X Plug, Hole 0.5D, Nylon (for BNC hole) Plug, Hole 0.25D, Nylon (for SMA hole) X X X X X X X X X X X X Line Key (push rod) Compression Spring Retainer Ring E C X X X X X X Dress Panel, SCSI E X X X X X X Display EMI Filter X X X X X X Display Mount (serial prefix below US/MY/SG 4611 order Flat Panel Display Retrofit Kit. See Table 10-1.) (If the kit is previously installed, the display and display mount will look like Figure 10-29) X X X X X X Display Mount (serial prefix US/MY/SG 4611 and above) E X X X X X X Chapter

234 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-2 Description Mechanical Parts Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A Display Pressure Plate E X X X X X X Display Bezel Assembly (includes left overlay label, but does not include nameplate) E X X X X X X Mid Web E X X X X X X Spacer for switches (Option 123) Screw, M3 x LG for switch mounting (Option 123) Thermal Pad (Option 123) X X X X X X N X X X Rivet, fan mounting X X X X X X Fan Guard X X X X X X Rivet, fan guard mounting Cable hold down (on Midweb) Cable Clamp, plastic, adhesive backed (Option 110, 123) Cable Clip Sleeves (numbers 0-9, 1 wand for each number, each wand has > 10 numbers) Bracket, FIFA/cable restraint for Lowband assembly Screw, M2.5 X 0.45, 6 MM, TORX (Option 110, 123) Attaches SW4 and SW5 to bracket Screw, in, POZI Attaches A36 P-Amp to bracket X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X E X X X X X X X 234 Chapter 10

235 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-2 Description Mechanical Parts Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A Screw, M3 x MM (Option 110) Screw M3 X MM (Option 123) Attaches SW3 to to bracket Screw M3.5 X MM TORX (Option 110, 123) Attaches mixer bracket to chassis Nut, hex, 15/32-32 For Ext IN and Audio In BNC cables (Option 107) Washer, Lock HLCL NO in ID Used for A36 amplifier mounting Bracket, Switch/Preamp (Option 110) Bracket, Unpreselected Mixer (Option 110, 123) Bracket, Preamp (Option 110) Bracket, Coax Switch (Option 123) Bracket, Switch (Option 110, 123) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X Shield, Inverter Board E X X X X X X Cover plate, rear panel, USB/Flash Board (Option 111, 115) Screw, M3 X mm long Hook and Loop fastener (Velcro) for FL2 E X X X X X X X X X X X X Chapter

236 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-3 Description Cables a Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A W1 Cable (5), coax, Front Panel External Trigger to A8 Analog IF Assy. P1 W2 Cable, ribbon 100 pin, Front Panel W5 Cable Flat flex, Front Panel Interface to flat panel display (for serial prefix below US/MY/SG 4611) W5 Cable Flat flex, Front Panel Interface to display converter board (for serial prefix US/MY/SG 4611 and above) W6 Cable flat flex, Disk drive to Motherboard W7 Cable, semi-rigid (with ferrites), For standard N type RF Input to A14 Attenuator W7 Cable, semi-rigid, For Option BAB 3.5 APC RF Input to A14 Attenuator W7 Cable, semi-rigid, For standard 2.4mm RF Input to A14 Attenuator W8 Cable, semi-rigid (with ferrites), A14 attenuator to A15 attenuator W9 Cable, semi-rigid, A15 Attenuator to A19 RYTHM E X X X X X X E X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X E X X X E X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X W10 Cable (8), coax, 7.5 MHz from A8 Analog IF P2, to A7 Digital IF, P X X X X X X 236 Chapter 10

237 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-3 Description Cables a Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A W11 Cable (3), coax, 21.4 MHz from A10 3rd Converter J5 to A8 Analog IF, J13 W12 Cable (6), coax, TRIGGER IN from rear panel to A8 Analog IF, P4 W13 Cable (20), coax, TRIGGER 1 OUT to A9 2nd LO, J12 W14 Cable (30), coax, TRIGGER 2 OUT to A9 2nd LO, J X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X W15 Cable, semi-rigid, A9 2nd LO, J10 to Lowband, J5 E X X X X X X W16 Cable (4), coax, 600 MHz from A11 Reference board P3 to A9 2nd LO, J1 W17 Cable (10), coax (with ferrites), A19 RYTHM highband output to A10 3rd Converter J1 W18 Cable (7), coax (with ferrites), MHz A20 Lowband assy to A10 3rd Converter J2 W19 Cable (40), coax MHz IF OUT from A10 3rd Converter J4 to rear panel W20 Cable (50), coax, 50 MHz Cal signal from A10 3rd Converter J7 to A14 Attenuator W21 Cable (90), coax, 10 MHz Out from A11 Reference Assy P2 to rear panel X X X X X X E X X X X X X E X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Chapter

238 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-3 Description Cables a Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A W22 Cable (70), coax, Ext Ref In from rear panel to A11 Reference Assy P1 W23 Cable, coax, 28V to rear panel from A13 Front End Driver W24 Cable, semi-rigid, A21 SLODA to A12 Synthesizer W24 Cable, semi-rigid, A21 FELOMA to A12 Synthesizer W25 Cable, ribbon, YTO Control W26 Cable, ribbon, RYTHM Control W27 Cable, backlight extension (for serial prefix US/MY/SG 4644 and above) W28 Wire harness, SLODA control, from A13 Front End Driver to A21 SLODA W29 Cable, ribbon, A13 Front End Driver to A14 Attenuator A W30 Cable, ribbon, A13 Front End Driver to A15 Attenuator B W31 Cable, ribbon, A13 Front End Driver to A20 Lowband Assy X X X X X X X X X X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X X X X E X X X X X X X X X X X X E X X X E X X X X X X E X X X X X X E X X X X X X W32 not assigned W33 Cable, semi-rigid, A15 Attenuator to W34 W34 Cable, semi-rigid, W33 to A19 SBTX/RYTHM E X X X E X X X 238 Chapter 10

239 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-3 Description Cables a Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A W35 Cable, semi-rigid, YTO Output A18 YTO to A21 SLODA W35 Cable, semi-rigid, YTO Output A18 YTO to A21 FELOMA W36 Cable, semi-rigid, A19 RYTHM to FL1 Low Pass Filter (except Option B7J) W36 Cable, semi-rigid, A19 SBTX/RYTHM to FL1 Low Pass Filter (except Option B7J) W37 Cable, semi-rigid, FL1 Low Pass Filter to A20 Lowband Assy. J1 (except Option 1DS) W38 Cable, semi-rigid, LO signal A21 SLODA to A19 RYTHM W38 Cable, semi-rigid, LO signal A21 FELOMA to A19 SBTX/RYTHM W39 Cable, semi-rigid, Bandpass Filter Output, 3.9 MHz Bandpass Filter to A20 Lowband J4 W40 Cable, semi-rigid, Bandpass Filter Input, A20 Lowband J3 to FL2, 3.9 MHz Bandpass W41 Cable, semi-rigid, A21 SLODA to A20 Lowband Assy. W41 Cable, semi-rigid, A21 FELOMA to A20 Lowband Assy. W42 Cable, semi-rigid, A19 SBTX/RYTHM LO1 to AT1 E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X Chapter

240 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-3 Description Cables a Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A W43 Cable, semi-rigid, AT1 to FELOMA J2 (SBTX) W44 Cable (9), coax, IF IN from front-panel to A10 3rd Converter J3 (Option AYZ) W45 Cable, semi-rigid, LO OUT from front-panel to W46 (Option AYZ) W46 Cable, semi-rigid, LO OUT extension cable from A21 SLODA 1st LO OUT to W45. (Option AYZ, for PSA 26.5 GHz) W46 Cable, semi-rigid, LO OUT extension cable from A21 FELOMA LO OUT to W45. (Option AYZ and 123, for PSA > 26.5 GHz) W47 Cable (97), coax, Preselector Tune Out A13 Front End Driver to Rear Panel W48 Cable, semi-rigid, FL1 Low Pass Filter to A22 Preamp Assy. (Option 1DS) W49 Cable, ribbon, Preamp control from A13 Front End Driver to A22 Preamp Assy. (Option 1DS) W50 Cable, semi-rigid, Preamp Out from A22 Preamp to Lowband (Option 1DS) W51 Cable, semi-rigid, A19 SBTX/RYTHM out to A27 Electronic Attenuator (Option B7J) E X X X E X X X X E X X X X E X E X X X X X X X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X X X X E X X X X X X E X X X E X X X 240 Chapter 10

241 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-3 Description Cables a Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A W52 Cable, semi-rigid, A27 electronic attenuator to FL1, 3 GHz Low Pass Filter (Option B7J) W53 Cable ribbon, Electronic Attenuator control from A13 Front End Driver to A27 Electronic Attenuator (Option B7J) W54 Cable, semi-rigid, A20 Lowband J3 to FIFA middle connector W55 Cable, semi-rigid, A19 SBTX to FIFA rear connector W56 Cable, semi-rigid, FIFA to FL2 Band Pass filter E X X X E X X X E X X X X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X W57 not assigned W58 Cable, ribbon, A13 Front End Driver J10 to A30 FIFA E X X X W59 not assigned W60 Cable, ribbon, ADC Data from A31 WB Analog IF to A32 WB Digital IF (Option 122 or 140) W61 Cable (65), coax, 100 MHz Ref from A11 Reference Assembly to A31 WB Analog IF (Option 122 or 140) W62 Cable (95), coax, 300 MHz Ref from A11 Reference Assembly P4 to A31 WB Analog IF (Option 122 or 140) E X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X W63, not assigned Chapter

242 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-3 Description Cables a Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A W64 Cable (60), coax, WB IF CA:L from A31 WB Analog IF to A10 3rd Converter J6 (Option 122 or 140) W65 Cable (40), coax, MHz IF from A10 3rd Converter J4 to A31 WB Analog IF (Option 122 or 140) W66 Cable (66), coax, MHz from A31 WB Analog IF to Rear Panel (Option 122 or 140) W67 Cable, coax, Video Out from Digital IF J100 to Rear Panel (Option 124) W68 Cable, ribbon, SBTX Tower Control, A29 SBTX Driver to A19 SBTX/RYTHM W69 Cable, ribbon, 20 pin, SBTX Digital Control, A29 SBTX Driver to A13 Front End Driver W70 Cable, ribbon, 14 pin, SBTX Power, A29 SBTX Driver to A13 Front End Driver X X X X X E X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X W71 Cable, ribbon, FELOMA, A29 SBTX Driver to A21 FELOMA E X X X W75 Cable (41), coax, 70 MHz IF OUT, from A33 Option card J2 to rear panel (Option H70) X X X X X X W76 Cable (40), coax, MHz IF IN, from A10 3 rd Converter J4 to A33 Option card J1 (Option H70) X X X X X X 242 Chapter 10

243 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-3 Description Cables a Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A W77 Cable (51), coax, MHz IF OUT, from A33 Option card J5 to rear panel (Option H70) W78 Cable, semi-rigid, FL2 to FL3 (Option 122 or 140) W79 Cable, semi-rigid, FL3 to A20 Lowband (Option 122 or 140) W80 Cable, semi-rigid, Input Attenuator to Switch 1 (Option 123) W81 Cable, semi-rigid (with ferrites), Switch 1 (bottom switch) port 2 to RYTHM input (Option 123) W82 Cable, semi-rigid, Switch 1 (bottom switch) port 1 to Mixer input (Option 123) W83 Cable, semi-rigid, Mixer LO IN to cable W88 from SLODA LO Out (Option 123) W84 Cable (1), coax, Dual Mixer Out to Switch 2 (top switch) port 1 (Option 123) W85 Wire Harness, FE Driver J11 to Switches/Mixer (Option 123) W86 Cable (10), coax, 3rd Converter J1 to Switch 2 (top switch) port C (Option 123) X X X X X X E X X X X X E X X X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X Chapter

244 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-3 Description Cables a Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A W87 Cable (2), coax, RYTHM t o Switch 2 (top switch) port 2 (Option 123) W88 Cable, semi-rigid, SLODA LO Out to cable W83 Mixer LO In (Option 123) W89, Cable, coax, Switch 3 bottom port to RHYTHM/SBTX (Option 123) W90 Cable, Flat Flex, Unpreselected mixer to mixer bias board (Option 123) W91, Cable, ribbon, Switch Control, Option Driver Assy J3 to SW4 (top switch) (Option 110) W92, Cable, ribbon, Switch Control Option Driver Assy J8 to SW5 (bottom switch) (Option 123) W93, Cable, coax, Unpreselected mixer to Switch 3 coax switch top port (Option 123) W94, Cable, coax, SW3 coax switch center connector to 3rd Converter (Option 123) W95, Cable, ribbon, Mixer Bias board control. Option Driver Assy J7 to Mixer Bias Board (Option 123) W96, Cable, ribbon, Driver board J9 to coax switch (Option 123) E X X X E X X X E X X X X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X 244 Chapter 10

245 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-3 Description W97, not assigned Cables a Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A W98, Cable, semi-rigid, LO In to Unpreselected Mixer from W46/3 db pad (Option 123) W99, Cable, semi-rigid, Unpreselected mixer to switch 5 (bottom switch) Port 4 (Option 123) W100, Cable, semi-rigid, Switch 5 port 1 from attenuator (Option 123, for instruments that do not have Option 110) W101, Cable, semi-rigid, Switch 4 port 4 to Switch 5 port 1 (Option 123, for combination of Option 110 with Option 123) W102, Cable, semi-rigid, A15 Attenuator out to Switch 4 port 1 (Option 110) W103, Cable, semi-rigid, Preamp In from Switch 4 port 2 (Option 110) W104, Cable, semi-rigid, Preamp out to Switch 4 port 3 (Option 110) W105, Cable, semi-rigid, Switch 5 port 2 to W34 cable to A10 RHYTHM/SBTX (Option 123) E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X W106, Wire Harness, Option Driver P1 to Preamp (Option 110) E X X X X X X Chapter

246 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-3 Description Cables a Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A W107, Cable, semi-rigid, Switch 4 port 4 to W34 cable to RHYTHM/SBTX (Option 110, for instruments that do not have Opt 123) E X X X W108, Cable, coax, Front Panel Audio In to Audio Board Assy (Option 107) W109, Cable semi-rigid A15 Attenuator to Switch 6 (Option 110 or Option 110 with Option 123 W110, Cable, semi-rigid, Switch 6 to RHYTHM (when Option 110 is installed and Option 123 is not) W111, Cable, semi-rigid, Switch 6 to Option 123 Switch 1 Center Port (Opt 110 with Option 123) W112, Cable, semi-rigid, Preamp Out from Switch 6 (Option 110) W113, Cable, semi-rigid, Preamp In from Switch 6 (Option 110) W114, Cable, ribbon, Switch Control, Option Driver Assy to SW 6 for Option 110 W115, Cable, semi-rigid, FL4 to A34 (Option combination) X X X X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X E X X X a. The numbered clip sleeves are not included with the cables. Order mechanical part to replace the clips. 246 Chapter 10

247 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-4 Front Panel Connectors and Mounting Hardware Description Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A J1 Input Connector, Type N X X X Bracket, Type N Input E X X X Input Connector Nut, Type N Input Input Connector Washer, Type N Input J1 Input Connector, 3.5 mm (m) (Option BAB) Bracket, 3.5 mm Input (Option BAB) Input Connector Nut, 3.5 mm (Option BAB) Input Connector Washer, 3.5 mm (Option BAB) J1 Input Connector, 2.4 mm Bracket, 2.4 mm RF Input Input Connector Nut, 2.4 mm Ext Trigger Front Panel (part of W1) Probe Power Part of A2 Front Panel Interface Assy IF INPUT connector SMA (Option AYZ) 1 st LO OUT connector SMA (Option AYZ) Nut, 1/4-36, LO OUT or IF INPUT (Option AYZ) Nut, hex 15/32-32 for External Trigger IN and Audio IN X X X X X X X E X X X X X X E X X X X X X E X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Chapter

248 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Replaceable Parts Table 10-5 Labels Description Part Number E4440A E4443A E4445A E4446A E4447A E4448A Name Plate, E4440A E X Name Plate, E4443A E X Name Plate, E4445A E X Name Plate, E4446A E X Name Plate, E4447A E X Name Plate, E4448A E X Line Label E X X X X X X Trim, side strips X X X X X X Label, USB port cover (Option 115) Label overlay, left front panel E X X X X X X E X X X X X X Warning label for cable E X 248 Chapter 10

249 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Hardware Figure 10-1 External Hardware Item Description Agilent Part Number 1 Strap Handle Assembly E Bottom foot Screw M4x0.7 25mm-LG Rear foot Shield, magnetic (used inside instrument cover, 2 places) 6 Spring-Wire Frame (for two front bottom feet) E Key lock for bottom instrument feet Chapter

250 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure 10-2 Top Brace Hardware Item Description Agilent Part Number 1 Top Brace E Screw M3x0.5 8mm-LG (Crest Washer-Pan Head-TORX) Screw M3x0.5 6mm-LG (Flat Head) Chapter 10

251 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure 10-3 Front Frame Hardware Item Description Agilent Part Number 1 Screw M3x0.5 8mm-LG (Crest Washer-Pan Head-TORX) Front Frame Assembly see page W2 Cable, ribbon 100 pin, Front Panel E W1 Cable (5), coax, Front Panel External Trigger to A8 Analog IF Assy. P1 E Deck Assy. (chassis) E Bracket, Type N Input Bracket, 3.5 mm Input (Option BAB) E E Chapter

252 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure 10-4 Major Assemblies 252 Chapter 10

253 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Item Description Agilent Part Number 1 RF Section See page A13 Front End Driver Board a E A12 Synthesizer Assembly a E A11 Reference Assembly E A10 3rd Converter Assembly b E A9 2nd LO/ Fan Control E A8 Analog IF Assembly E A7 Digital IF Assembly (serial prefixes US/MY/SG 4611 and above. Also Option 122/140, 124) 9 A38 Option Driver Assembly (Option 110/123 E E A26 CPU Assembly E A31 Wideband Analog IF Assembly (Option 122 or 140) 12 A32 Wideband Digital IF Assembly (Option 122 or 140) 13 A39 USB/Memory Board (cover plate not attached; includes memory card) (Option 111, 115, 117) E E E A5 Power Supply Assembly a. Instruments need a firmware update to revision A when replacing this assembly. b. Instruments need a firmware update to revision A when replacing this assembly. Chapter

254 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure 10-5 RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A - Standard 254 Chapter 10

255 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Item Description Agilent Part Number 1 J1 Input Connector, Type N A14 Input Attenuator (4 db)/switch/block cap) A15 Input Attenuator (66 db) L-bracket, RF Main E A18 YTO, 2.9 to 7 GHz (Yig Tuned Oscillator) E A19 RYTHM, 26.5 GHz (Routing YIG Tuned Harmonic Mixer) A19 RYTHM, 6.7 and 13.2 GHz A20 Low Band Assembly E FL1 Low Pass Filter, 3 GHz A21 SLODA (Switched LO Distribution Amplifier) FL2 Band Pass Filter, GHz RF Frame E Chapter

256 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure 10-6 YTO Assembly 256 Chapter 10

257 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Item Description Agilent Part Number 1 Screw, M3 x 0.58 MM long Lid, A18 YTO E A18 YTO, 2.9 to 7 GHz (Yig Tuned Oscillator) E Shield, A18 YTO E Grommet, A18 YTO (2 each) Shoulder Washers, A18 YTO (2 each) Screw, A18 YTO Shield (2 each) Chapter

258 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure 10-7 RF Input Connector E4440A, E4443A, E4445A 258 Chapter 10

259 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Item Description Agilent Part Number 1 J1 Input Connector, Type N J1 Input Connector, 3.5 mm (m) (Option BAB) 2 -W7 Cable, semi-rigid (with ferrites), For standard N type RF Input to A14 Attenuator -W7 Cable, semi-rigid, For Option BAB 3.5 APC RF Input to A14 Attenuator 3 Screw M3x0.5 8mm-LG (Crest Washer-Pan Head-TORX) 4 Bracket, Type N Input Bracket, 3.5 mm Input (Option BAB) E E E E Chapter

260 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure 10-8 RF Section Cables E4440A, E4443A, E4445A - Standard 260 Chapter 10

261 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Reference Designator Description Agilent Part Number W7 W8 W7 Cable, semi-rigid (with ferrites), For standard N type RF Input to A14 Attenuator W8 Cable, semi-rigid (with ferrites), A14 attenuator to A15 attenuator E E W9 W9 Cable, semi-rigid, A15 Attenuator to A19 RYTHM E W15 W15 Cable, semi-rigid, A9 2nd LO, J10 to Lowband, J5 E W17 W18 W20 W17 Cable (10), coax (with ferrites), A19 RYTHM highband output to A10 3rd Converter J1 W18 Cable (7), coax (with ferrites), MHz A20 Lowband assy to A10 3rd Converter J2 W20 Cable (50), coax, 50 MHz Cal signal from A10 3rd Converter J7 to A14 Attenuator E E W24 W24 Cable, semi-rigid, A21 SLODA to A12 Synthesizer E W35 W35 Cable, semi-rigid, YTO Output A18 YTO to A21 SLODA E W36 W37 W36 Cable, semi-rigid, A19 RYTHM to FL1 Low Pass Filter (except Option B7J) W37 Cable, semi-rigid, FL1 Low Pass Filter to A20 Lowband Assy. J1 (except Option 1DS) E E W38 W38 Cable, semi-rigid, LO signal A21 SLODA to A19 RYTHM E W39 W40 W39 Cable, semi-rigid, Bandpass Filter Output, 3.9 MHz Bandpass Filter to A20 Lowband J4 W40 Cable, semi-rigid, Bandpass Filter Input, A20 Lowband J3 to FL2, 3.9 MHz Bandpass E E W41 W41 Cable, semi-rigid, A21 SLODA to A20 Lowband Assy. E Chapter

262 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure 10-9 RF Section and Cables E4440A, E4443A, E4445A - (Options 1DS, BAB, B7J, and AYZ) Figure Option 122 or 140 RF Cable Locations 262 Chapter 10

263 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware This table corresponds to Figure 10-9 and Figure Reference Designator Description Agilent Part Number 1 J1 Input Connector, 3.5 mm (m) (Option BAB) st LO OUT connector SMA (Option AYZ) IF INPUT connector SMA (Option AYZ) A22 A22 Preamp Assembly (Option 1DS) E A27 A27 Electronic Attenuator (Option B7J) E FL2 FL2 Band Pass Filter, GHz (Option 122 or 140) FL3 FL3 Low Pass Filter, 4.4 GHz (Option 122 or 140) W7 W45 W46 W48 W50 W51 W52 W7 Cable, semi-rigid, For Option BAB 3.5 APC RF Input to A14 Attenuator W45 Cable, semi-rigid, LO OUT from front-panel to W46 (Option AYZ) W46 Cable, semi-rigid, LO OUT extension cable from A21 SLODA 1st LO OUT to W45. (Option AYZ, for PSA 26.5 GHz) W48 Cable, semi-rigid, FL1 Low Pass Filter to A22 Preamp Assy. (Option 1DS) W50 Cable, semi-rigid, Preamp Out from A22 Preamp to Lowband (Option 1DS) W51 Cable, semi-rigid, A19 SBTX/RYTHM out to A27 Electronic Attenuator (Option B7J) W52 Cable, semi-rigid, A27 electronic attenuator to FL1, 3 GHz Low Pass Filter (Option B7J) E E E E E E E W78 W78 Cable, semi-rigid, FL2 to FL3 (Option 122 or 140) E W79 W88 W79 Cable, semi-rigid, FL3 to A20 Lowband (Option 122 or 140) W88 Cable, semi-rigid, SLODA LO Out to cable W83 Mixer LO In (Option 123) E E Chapter

264 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Option 123 Assemblies and Cable Locations Figure E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Option 123 Assemblies and Cable Locations 264 Chapter 10

265 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Reference Designator Description Agilent Part Number W8 W80 W81 W82 W83 W84 W86 W8 Cable, semi-rigid (with ferrites), A14 attenuator to A15 attenuator W80 Cable, semi-rigid, Input Attenuator to Switch 1 (Option 123) W81 Cable, semi-rigid (with ferrites), Switch 1 (bottom switch) port 2 to RYTHM input (Option 123) W82 Cable, semi-rigid, Switch 1 (bottom switch) port 1 to Mixer input (Option 123) W83 Cable, semi-rigid, Mixer LO IN to cable W88 from SLODA LO Out (Option 123) W84 Cable (1), coax, Dual Mixer Out to Switch 2 (top switch) port 1 (Option 123) W86 Cable (10), coax, 3rd Converter J1 to Switch 2 (top switch) port C (Option 123) E E E E E E E W87 W87 Cable (2), coax, RYTHM t o Switch 2 (top switch) port 2 (Option 123) E W88 W88 Cable, semi-rigid, SLODA LO Out to cable W83 Mixer LO In (Option 123) E Dual Mixer A34 Dual Mixer (Option 123) Top Switch SW2 RF Switch 2 Top Switch (Option 123) (must also order shield, SW2. see Mechanical Parts table Bottom Switch SW1 RF Switch 1 Bottom Switch (Option 123) Bracket, Switch (Option 123) E Shield Shield, SW2 (Top Switch) (Option 123) E Chapter

266 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure E4440A, E4443A, E4445A - Option 110 (with Option 123) Reference Designator Description Agilent Part Number A36 A36 Microwave Preamp 26.5 GHz (Option 110) FL4 (not shown, attaches to SW1 port 1 and W115) FL4 High Pass Filter, 3 GHz (Option 110 and 123 combination) SW6 SW6 Switch, Microwave (Option 110) N W106 W106, Wire Harness, Option Driver P1 to Preamp (Option 110) E W109 W109, Cable semi-rigid A15 Attenuator to Switch 6 (Option 110 or Option 110 with Option 123 W111 W111, Cable, semi-rigid, Switch 6 to Option 123 Switch 1 Center Port (Opt 110 with Option 123) E E W112 W112, Cable, semi-rigid, Preamp Out from Switch 6 (Option 110) E W113 W113, Cable, semi-rigid, Preamp In from Switch 6 (Option 110) E W114 W114, Cable, ribbon, Switch Control, Option Driver Assy to SW 6 for Option 110 E Bracket, Switch/Preamp (Option 110) E Chapter 10

267 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Chapter

268 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A - Standard 268 Chapter 10

269 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Item Description Agilent Part Number 1 J1 Input Connector, 2.4 mm A14 Input Attenuator (10 db)/switch) A15 Input Attenuator (60 db) L-bracket, RF Main E A18 YTO, 2.9 to 7 GHz (Yig Tuned Oscillator) E A19 SBTX/RYTHM Assembly, 44 GHz A19 SBTX/RYTHM Assembly, 50 GHz A20 Low Band Assembly E FL1 Low Pass Filter, 3 GHz A21 FELOMA (Frequency Extended LO Multiplying Amplifier) FL2 Band Pass Filter, GHz A29 SBTX Driver Board E A30 FIFA, First IF Amplifier Assembly E Bracket, FIFA/cable restraint for Lowband assembly (E4447A only) E Chapter

270 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure Options 110 and 123 E4446A, E4447A, E4448A NOTE See Chapter 11, Assembly Replacement Procedures, on page 305 of this service guide for views of Option 110 only or Option 123 only) 270 Chapter 10

271 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Item Description Agilent Part Number A34 A35 SW4 SW5 W90 W91 W92 W93 W98 W99 W101 W102 W103 W104 W105 A34 Unpreselected mm-wave Mixer (Option 123) A35 Mixer Bias Board (Option 123) (requires replacement of thermal pad, N ) SW4 Millimeter XFER Switch 50 GHz (top switch) (Option 110) SW5 Switch, Millimeter (bottom switch) (Option 123) W90 Cable, Flat Flex, Unpreselected mixer to mixer bias board (Option 123) W91, Cable, ribbon, Switch Control, Option Driver Assy J3 to SW4 (top switch) (Option 110) W92, Cable, ribbon, Switch Control Option Driver Assy J8 to SW5 (bottom switch) (Option 123) W93, Cable, coax, Unpreselected mixer to Switch 3 coax switch top port (Option 123) W98, Cable, semi-rigid, LO In to Unpreselected Mixer from W46/3 db pad (Option 123) W99, Cable, semi-rigid, Unpreselected mixer to switch 5 (bottom switch) Port 4 (Option 123) W101, Cable, semi-rigid, Switch 4 port 4 to Switch 5 port 1 (Option 123, for combination of Option 110 with Option 123) W102, Cable, semi-rigid, A15 Attenuator out to Switch 4 port 1 (Option 110) W103, Cable, semi-rigid, Preamp In from Switch 4 port 2 (Option 110) W104, Cable, semi-rigid, Preamp out to Switch 4 port 3 (Option 110) W105, Cable, semi-rigid, Switch 5 port 2 to W34 cable to A10 RHYTHM/SBTX (Option 123) 1NB E E E E E E E E E E E Chapter

272 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure Options 110 and 123 E4446A, E4447A, E4448A (Rear View) NOTE See Chapter 11, Assembly Replacement Procedures, on page 305 of this service guide for views of Option 110 only or Option 123 only) 272 Chapter 10

273 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Item Description Agilent Part Number A36 A36 Millimeter Preamp 50 GHz (Option 110) AT3 AT3 3 db Attenuator (Option 110) SW3 SW3 Coaxial Switch (Option 123) N SW4 W89 W93 W94 W96 W103 W104 SW4 Millimeter XFER Switch 50 GHz (top switch) (Option 110) W89, Cable, coax, Switch 3 bottom port to RHYTHM/SBTX (Option 123) W93, Cable, coax, Unpreselected mixer to Switch 3 coax switch top port (Option 123) W94, Cable, coax, SW3 coax switch center connector to 3rd Converter (Option 123) W96, Cable, ribbon, Driver board J9 to coax switch (Option 123) W103, Cable, semi-rigid, Preamp In from Switch 4 port 2 (Option 110) W104, Cable, semi-rigid, Preamp out to Switch 4 port 3 (Option 110) E E E E E E Bracket, Switch (Option 110, 123) E Bracket, Unpreselected Mixer (Option 110, 123) E Bracket, Preamp (Option 110) E Bracket, Coax Switch (Option 123) E Screw M3 X MM (Option 123) Attaches SW3 to to bracket Chapter

274 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure RF Input Connector and Attenuators E4446A, E4447A, E4448A 274 Chapter 10

275 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Reference Designator Description Agilent Part Number 1 Bracket, 2.4 mm RF Input E J1 J1 Input Connector, 2.4 mm W7 W8 W20 W7 Cable, semi-rigid, For standard 2.4mm RF Input to A14 Attenuator W8 Cable, semi-rigid (with ferrites), A14 attenuator to A15 attenuator W20 Cable (50), coax, 50 MHz Cal signal from A10 3rd Converter J7 to A14 Attenuator E E W33 W33 Cable, semi-rigid, A15 Attenuator to W34 E A14 A14 Input Attenuator (10 db)/switch) A15 A15 Input Attenuator (60 db) Chapter

276 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure RF Section Cable Locations E4446A, E4447A, E4448A - Standard 276 Chapter 10

277 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Reference Designator Description Agilent Part Number W7 W8 W7 Cable, semi-rigid, For standard 2.4mm RF Input to A14 Attenuator W8 Cable, semi-rigid (with ferrites), A14 attenuator to A15 attenuator E E W15 W15 Cable, semi-rigid, A9 2nd LO, J10 to Lowband, J5 E W18 W20 W18 Cable (7), coax (with ferrites), MHz A20 Lowband assy to A10 3rd Converter J2 W20 Cable (50), coax, 50 MHz Cal signal from A10 3rd Converter J7 to A14 Attenuator E W24 W24 Cable, semi-rigid, A21 FELOMA to A12 Synthesizer E W33 W33 Cable, semi-rigid, A15 Attenuator to W34 E W34 W34 Cable, semi-rigid, W33 to A19 SBTX/RYTHM E W35 W35 Cable, semi-rigid, YTO Output A18 YTO to A21 FELOMA E W36 W37 W38 W39 W36 Cable, semi-rigid, A19 SBTX/RYTHM to FL1 Low Pass Filter (except Option B7J) W37 Cable, semi-rigid, FL1 Low Pass Filter to A20 Lowband Assy. J1 (except Option 1DS) W38 Cable, semi-rigid, LO signal A21 FELOMA to A19 SBTX/RYTHM W39 Cable, semi-rigid, Bandpass Filter Output, 3.9 MHz Bandpass Filter to A20 Lowband J4 E E E E W41 W41 Cable, semi-rigid, A21 FELOMA to A20 Lowband Assy. E W43 W43 Cable, semi-rigid, AT1 to FELOMA J2 (SBTX) E W54 W54 Cable, semi-rigid, A20 Lowband J3 to FIFA middle connector E W55 W55 Cable, semi-rigid, A19 SBTX to FIFA rear connector E W56 W56 Cable, semi-rigid, FIFA to FL2 Band Pass filter E Chapter

278 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure SBTX Driver Board Ribbon Cable Locations E4446A, E4447A, E4448A 278 Chapter 10

279 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Reference Designator Description Agilent Part Number W68 W69 W70 W71 W68 Cable, ribbon, SBTX Tower Control, A29 SBTX Driver to A19 SBTX/RYTHM W69 Cable, ribbon, 20 pin, SBTX Digital Control, A29 SBTX Driver to A13 Front End Driver W70 Cable, ribbon, 14 pin, SBTX Power, A29 SBTX Driver to A13 Front End Driver W71 Cable, ribbon, FELOMA, A29 SBTX Driver to A21 FELOMA E E E E Chapter

280 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure RF Section Assembly and Cable Locations E4446A, E4447A, E4448A - (Options 1DS, B7J, and AYZ) 280 Chapter 10

281 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Reference Designator Description Agilent Part Number 1 1st LO OUT connector SMA (Option AYZ) IF INPUT connector SMA (Option AYZ) A22 A22 Preamp Assembly (Option 1DS) E A27 A27 Electronic Attenuator (Option B7J) E W45 W46 W48 W50 W51 W52 W45 Cable, semi-rigid, LO OUT from front-panel to W46 (Option AYZ) W46 Cable, semi-rigid, LO OUT extension cable from A21 FELOMA LO OUT to W45. (Option AYZ and 123, for PSA > 26.5 GHz) W48 Cable, semi-rigid, FL1 Low Pass Filter to A22 Preamp Assy. (Option 1DS) W50 Cable, semi-rigid, Preamp Out from A22 Preamp to Lowband (Option 1DS) W51 Cable, semi-rigid, A19 SBTX/RYTHM out to A27 Electronic Attenuator (Option B7J) W52 Cable, semi-rigid, A27 electronic attenuator to FL1, 3 GHz Low Pass Filter (Option B7J) E E E E E E Chapter

282 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure Vertical Board Assembly Cables W16 See Cable Locations Front End Driver A12W2 W21 W22 W17 W44 W24 W18 W19 W20 W11 W16 W12 W1 W10 W15 W14 W13 W11 W10 se832a 282 Chapter 10

283 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Reference Designator Description Agilent Part Number W1 W10 W11 W12 W1 Cable (5), coax, Front Panel External Trigger to A8 Analog IF Assy. P1 W10 Cable (8), coax, 7.5 MHz from A8 Analog IF P2, to A7 Digital IF, P1 W11 Cable (3), coax, 21.4 MHz from A10 3rd Converter J5 to A8 Analog IF, J13 W12 Cable (6), coax, TRIGGER IN from rear panel to A8 Analog IF, P4 E W13 W13 Cable (20), coax, TRIGGER 1 OUT to A9 2nd LO, J W14 W14 Cable (30), coax, TRIGGER 2 OUT to A9 2nd LO, J W15 W15 Cable, semi-rigid, A9 2nd LO, J10 to Lowband, J5 E W16 W17 W18 W19 W20 W21 W22 W16 Cable (4), coax, 600 MHz from A11 Reference board P3 to A9 2nd LO, J1 W17 Cable (10), coax (with ferrites), A19 RYTHM highband output to A10 3rd Converter J1 W18 Cable (7), coax (with ferrites), MHz A20 Lowband assy to A10 3rd Converter J2 W19 Cable (40), coax MHz IF OUT from A10 3rd Converter J4 to rear panel W20 Cable (50), coax, 50 MHz Cal signal from A10 3rd Converter J7 to A14 Attenuator W21 Cable (90), coax, 10 MHz Out from A11 Reference Assy P2 to rear panel W22 Cable (70), coax, Ext Ref In from rear panel to A11 Reference Assy P E E W24 W24 Cable, semi-rigid, A21 SLODA to A12 Synthesizer E W44 W44 Cable (9), coax, IF IN from front-panel to A10 3rd Converter J3 (Option AYZ) E A12W2 A12W2 Cable, MMCX coax, 600 MHz Ref (325 mm) Chapter

284 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure Option Driver Board and Cables 284 Chapter 10

285 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Reference Designator Description Agilent Part Number W91 W92 W95 W91, Cable, ribbon, Switch Control, Option Driver Assy J3 to SW4 (top switch) (Option 110) (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A) W92, Cable, ribbon, Switch Control Option Driver Assy J8 to SW5 (bottom switch) (Option 123) W95, Cable, ribbon, Mixer Bias board control. Option Driver Assy J7 to Mixer Bias Board (Option 123) E E E W96 W96, Cable, ribbon, Driver board J9 to coax switch (Option 123) E W106 W106, Wire Harness, Option Driver P1 to Preamp (Option 110) E W114 W114, Cable, ribbon, Switch Control, Option Driver Assy to SW 6 for Option 110 (Option 110, E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) E Chapter

286 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure Option 122 or 140 Assembly and Cable Locations, and Option 124 W67 Cable Location 286 Chapter 10

287 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Reference Designator Description Agilent Part Number A10 A10 3rd Converter Assembly E A31 A31 Wideband Analog IF Assembly (Option 122 or 140) E A32 A32 Wideband Digital IF Assembly (Option 122 or 140) E W60 W61 W62 W64 W65 W66 W67 W60 Cable, ribbon, ADC Data from A31 WB Analog IF to A32 WB Digital IF (Option 122 or 140) W61 Cable (65), coax, 100 MHz Ref from A11 Reference Assembly to A31 WB Analog IF (Option 122 or 140) W62 Cable (95), coax, 300 MHz Ref from A11 Reference Assembly P4 to A31 WB Analog IF (Option 122 or 140) W64 Cable (60), coax, WB IF CA:L from A31 WB Analog IF to A10 3rd Converter J6 (Option 122 or 140) W65 Cable (40), coax, MHz IF from A10 3rd Converter J4 to A31 WB Analog IF (Option 122 or 140) W66 Cable (66), coax, MHz from A31 WB Analog IF to Rear Panel (Option 122 or 140) W67 Cable, coax, Video Out from Digital IF J100 to Rear Panel (Option 124) E E Chapter

288 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure Option 107 Audio Input Assembly and Cable Locations 288 Chapter 10

289 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Reference Designator Description Agilent Part Number A8 A8 Analog IF Assembly E A37 A37 Audio Digitizer Assembly (Option 107) E A39 W108 A39 USB/Memory Board (cover plate not attached; includes memory card) (Option 111, 115, 117) W108, Cable, coax, Front Panel Audio In to Audio Board Assy (Option 107) E Chapter

290 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure Cable Locations, Front End Driver E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Reference Designator Description Agilent Part Number W23 W23 Cable, coax, 28V to rear panel from A13 Front End Driver W25 W25 Cable, ribbon, YTO Control E W26 W26 Cable, ribbon, RYTHM Control E W28 W28 Wire harness, SLODA control, from A13 Front End Driver to A21 SLODA E W29 W29 Cable, ribbon, A13 Front End Driver to A14 Attenuator A E W30 W30 Cable, ribbon, A13 Front End Driver to A15 Attenuator B E W31 W47 W49 W53 W31 Cable, ribbon, A13 Front End Driver to A20 Lowband Assy. W47 Cable (97), coax, Preselector Tune Out A13 Front End Driver to Rear Panel W49 Cable, ribbon, Preamp control from A13 Front End Driver to A22 Preamp Assy. (Option 1DS) W53 Cable ribbon, Electronic Attenuator control from A13 Front End Driver to A27 Electronic Attenuator (Option B7J) E E E Chapter 10

291 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure Cable Locations, Front End Driver E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Reference Designator Description Agilent Part Number W23 W23 Cable, coax, 28V to rear panel from A13 Front End Driver W25 W25 Cable, ribbon, YTO Control E W29 W29 Cable, ribbon, A13 Front End Driver to A14 Attenuator A E W30 W30 Cable, ribbon, A13 Front End Driver to A15 Attenuator B E W31 W47 W49 W53 W31 Cable, ribbon, A13 Front End Driver to A20 Lowband Assy. W47 Cable (97), coax, Preselector Tune Out A13 Front End Driver to Rear Panel W49 Cable, ribbon, Preamp control from A13 Front End Driver to A22 Preamp Assy. (Option 1DS) W53 Cable ribbon, Electronic Attenuator control from A13 Front End Driver to A27 Electronic Attenuator (Option B7J) E E E W58 W58 Cable, ribbon, A13 Front End Driver J10 to A30 FIFA E W69 W70 W69 Cable, ribbon, 20 pin, SBTX Digital Control, A29 SBTX Driver to A13 Front End Driver W70 Cable, ribbon, 14 pin, SBTX Power, A29 SBTX Driver to A13 Front End Driver E E Chapter

292 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure Front Panel Parts 292 Chapter 10

293 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Item Description Agilent Part Number 1 Display Assembly (see Figure and Figure 10-30) 2 Front Shield E A2 Front Panel Interface (Includes Inverter Boards + cable) E A28 Audio Out Board E W1 Cable (5), coax, Front Panel External Trigger to A8 Analog IF Assy. P1 E Front Frame Assembly E Line Key (push rod) Compression Spring Retainer Ring 8 A3 Keyboard Assembly (Key pad not included) E C E Keypad E Display Bezel Assembly (includes left overlay label, but does not include nameplate) 11 Front Dress Panel (includes keyboard overlay label) E E RPG Knob Plug, Hole 0.5D, Nylon (for BNC hole) Name Plate, E4440A E Name Plate, E4443A E Name Plate, E4445A E Name Plate, E4446A E Name Plate, E4447A E Name Plate, E4448A E Volume Knob Trim, side strips Plug, Hole 0.25D, Nylon (for SMA hole) SMA connectors (Option AYZ) Chapter

294 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure Front Panel Shield Hardware Item Description Agilent Part Number 1 Screw M3x0.5 8mm-LG (Crest Washer-Pan Head-TORX) Front Shield E Chapter 10

295 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure Front Panel Assemblies Item Description Agilent Part Number 1 A2 Front Panel Interface (Includes Inverter Boards + cable) 2 A2A1 and A2A2 Inverter Boards (under Inverter Shield) 3 W5 Cable Flat flex, Front Panel Interface to display converter board (for serial prefix US/MY/SG 4611 and above) 4 W27 Cable, backlight extension (for serial prefix US/MY/SG 4644 and above) 5 Display Mount (serial prefix US/MY/SG 4611 and above) E E Shield, Inverter Board E Screw M3x0.5 8mm-LG (Crest Washer-Pan Head-TORX) Display Pressure Plate E A1 Flat Panel Display (serial prefixes US/MY/SG 4611 and above) See Figure A1A1 Display Converter Board E Chapter

296 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure Display Parts Item Description Agilent Part Number 1 Display EMI Filter Display Mount (serial prefix US/MY/SG 4611 and above) 3 A1 Flat Panel Display (serial prefixes US/MY/SG 4611 and above) See Figure E Chapter 10

297 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure Disk Drive Parts Item Description Agilent Part Number 1 and 4 Disk Drive Mount E A23 Floppy Disk Drive Disk Drive Board E Chapter

298 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure Rear Frame Hardware 298 Chapter 10

299 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Item Description Agilent Part Number 1 Screw M3x0.5 8mm-LG (Crest Washer-Pan Head-TORX) 3 W47 Cable (97), coax, Preselector Tune Out A13 Front End Driver to Rear Panel Dress Panel, rear E W22 Cable (70), coax, Ext Ref In from rear panel to A11 Reference Assy P1 6 W21 Cable (90), coax, 10 MHz Out from A11 Reference Assy P2 to rear panel 7 W19 Cable (40), coax MHz IF OUT from A10 3rd Converter J4 to rear panel 8 W14 Cable (30), coax, TRIGGER 2 OUT to A9 2nd LO, J11 9 W13 Cable (20), coax, TRIGGER 1 OUT to A9 2nd LO, J12 10 W12 Cable (6), coax, TRIGGER IN from rear panel to A8 Analog IF, P Screwlock, SCSI Dress Panel, SCSI, shown in Figure E Cover plate, rear panel, USB/Flash Board (Option 111, 115) E Rear Frame Assy. (includes EMI gaskets) E Deck Assy. (chassis) E W75 Cable (41), coax, 70 MHz IF OUT, from A33 Option card J2 to rear panel (Option H70) 16 W23 Cable, coax, 28V to rear panel from A13 Front End Driver Chapter

300 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure Mid Web Parts Figure Fan Guard 300 Chapter 10

301 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware This table corresponds to Figure and Figure Item Description Agilent Part Number 1 Screw M3x0.5 8mm-LG (Crest Washer-Pan Head-TORX) Mid Web E B1, B2, or B3 Fan (fan, wires/connector + EMI disk) E Rivet, fan mounting Fan Guard Rivet, fan guard mounting Chapter

302 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure Cable Hold Down Item Description Agilent Part Number 1 Cable hold down (on Midweb) Screw M3x0.5 8mm-LG (Crest Washer-Pan Head-TORX) Chapter 10

303 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware Figure CPU Parts Item Description Agilent Part Number 1 A26A1 128M DRAM Assy (includes replacement standoffs) 2 A26A2 64 MB Flash Memory Replacement Kit (includes replacement standoffs) 3 A26 CPU (Processor) (includes standoffs; does not include A26A1 DRAM assy or A26A2 Flash Memory assy) E E E Standoffs, Memory boards Screwlock, GPIB.327 x CPU Plate not replaceable 7 Screwlock, x Nylon spacer.25 round (4 spacers keep the CPU from bending when vertical boards are inserted) 9 A26BTI Battery, Lithium Polycarbon Monofloride (3V, 0.16AH Panasonic BR2325) CPU shim E CPU shim E Chapter

304 Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations Hardware 304 Chapter 10

305 11 Assembly Replacement Procedures 305

306 Assembly Replacement Procedures What You Will Find in This Chapter What You Will Find in This Chapter Procedures in this chapter enable you to locate, remove, and replace the major assemblies in your instrument. Refer to Chapter 10, Replaceable Parts Lists and Locations, for part numbers, assembly descriptions, and ordering information. This chapter contains removal and replacement procedures for the following: Outer Case...page 310 Top Brace...page 312 Front Frame... page 314 RF Section and Assemblies (E4440A,E4443A,E4445A)...page 317 A18 YTO and A19 RYTHM...page 322 A21 SLODA...page 323 FL1 Low Pass Filter...page 323 FL2 Band Pass Filter...page 324 A20 Lowband...page 324 A22 Preamplifier...page 326 A27 Electronic Attenuator...page 326 A36 Preamplifier...page 329 RF Section and Assemblies (E4446A, E4447A, E4448A)..page 336 A18 YTO and A19 SBTX/RYTHM...page 341 A21 FELOMA...page 342 FL1 Low Pass Filter...page 342 FL2 Band Pass Filter...page 343 A20 Lowband...page 343 A29 LOMA/SBTX Driver...page 345 A30 FIFA...page 345 A22 Preamplifier...page 347 A27 Electronic Attenuator...page 347 SW4 Millimeter Switch...page 351 A34 Mixer...page 352 A35 Mixer Bias Board...page 353 SW3 Switch...page 353 SW5 Switch...page 355 A14 and A15 Attenuator Assembly...page 357 A5 Power Supply...page 361 A39 USB/Memory Board...page 363 A6 SCSI Board (early instruments)...page 366 Vertical Board Assemblies...page 366 Mid-Web and Fan Assemblies...page 374 A23 Disk Drive...page 378 A25 Motherboard...page Chapter 11

307 Assembly Replacement Procedures What You Will Find in This Chapter A26 CPU Assembly...page 385 A26A1 DRAM and A26A2 Flash Boards...page 388 Rear Frame...page 390 RF Input Connector...page 393 Front Frame Subassemblies...page 395 A1 LCD Display, Backlights, and Filter...page 398 A2 Front Panel Interface Board...page 402 Bezel and Keypad...page 404 RPG...page 407 External Trigger Cable...page 407 NOTE Several PSA model numbers share the same circuit assemblies but require loading different memory initialization values for proper functionality. The assemblies that require memory initialization are listed in Table 12-1 in Chapter 12. Before Starting Before starting to disassemble the instrument: Check that you are familiar with the safety symbols marked on the instrument. And, read the general safety considerations and the safety note definitions given in the front of this guide. The instrument contains static sensitive components. Read the section entitled ESD Information on page 19. Safety WARNING The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages. Disconnect the product from all voltage sources while it is being opened. WARNING The instrument contains potentially hazardous voltages. Refer to the safety symbols on the instrument and the general safety considerations at the beginning of this service guide before operating the unit with the cover removed. Failure to heed the safety precautions can result in severe or fatal injury. Chapter

308 Assembly Replacement Procedures Tools you will need Tools you will need Figure 11-1 TORX Tool Description Agilent Part Number TORX Hand Driver - Size T TORX Hand Driver - Size T Pozidriv screwdriver - # flat blade screwdriver in. thick blade /16 inch nut driver /16 inch open-end wrench /16 inch open-end wrench (for SMA cables) 1/4 inch open-end wrench (for LO Out cable) 1/4 inch deep socket nut driver (for SMA connector mounting) source locally source locally cable puller Adjustments after an instrument repair Table 12-1 on page 412. If one or more instrument assemblies have been repaired or replaced, perform the related adjustments and performance verification tests. 308 Chapter 11

309 Assembly Replacement Procedures Major Assembly Locations Major Assembly Locations Figure 11-2 Major Assemblies Item Description Item Description 1 RF Section 8 A7 Digital IF Assembly 2 A13 Front End Driver Board 9 A38 Option Driver Assembly (Option 110/123) 3 A12 LO Synthesizer Assembly 10 A26 CPU Assembly 4 A11 Reference Assembly 11 A31 Wideband Analog IF Assembly (Option 122 or 140) 5 A10 3rd Converter Assembly 12 A32 Wideband Digital IF Assembly (Option 122 or 140) 6 A9 2nd LO/ Fan Control Assembly 13 A39 USB/Memory Board 7 A8 Analog IF Assembly 14 A5 Power Supply Chapter

310 Assembly Replacement Procedures Instrument Outer Case Instrument Outer Case CAUTION If the instrument is placed on its face during any of the following procedures, be sure to use a soft surface or soft cloth to avoid damage to the front panel, keys, or input connector. Removal 1. Disconnect the instrument from ac power. 2. There are two handles on the sides of the instrument that must be taken off. Refer to Figure Using the T-20 driver, loosen the screws that attach each handle (1). Remove the handles. 3. Remove the four bottom feet (2). This is done by lifting up on the tabs on the feet, and sliding the feet in the direction indicated by the arrows. 4. Remove the four screws (3) that hold the rear feet (4) in place. 5. Pull the instrument cover (5) off towards the rear of the instrument. Figure 11-3 Instrument Outer Case Removal 310 Chapter 11

311 Assembly Replacement Procedures Instrument Outer Case Replacement 1. Disconnect the instrument from ac power. 2. Slide the instrument cover back onto the deck from the rear. The seam on the cover should be on the bottom. Be sure the cover seats into the gasket groove in the front frame. 3. Replace the four rear feet to the rear of the instrument. Torque to 21 inch pounds. 4. Using the T-20 driver, replace the handles. Torque to 21 inch pounds. 5. Replace the four bottom feet by pressing them into the holes in the case and sliding in the opposite direction of the arrows until they click into place. Note that the feet at the front have the tilt stands. Chapter

312 Assembly Replacement Procedures Top Brace Top Brace Removal 1. If you haven t already done so, remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the Instrument Outer Case removal procedure. 2. Using the T-10 driver, remove the top screws (3) (one screw is under the security label) and the side screws (2) attaching the top brace (1) to the deck. Refer to Figure The top brace can now be removed from the deck. Figure 11-4 Top Brace 312 Chapter 11

313 Assembly Replacement Procedures Top Brace Replacement 1. Carefully position the top brace on the deck. There is an alignment pin on the mid web/fan assembly that should match up with the alignment hole on the top brace. Make sure that no coaxial cables will get pinched underneath the brace. 2. Using the T-10 driver, replace the top screws first, and then the side screws after the top screws are tightened. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 3. Replace the outer case. Refer to the Instrument Outer Case replacement procedure. Chapter

314 Assembly Replacement Procedures Front Frame Front Frame For most service situations, the front frame assembly can be dropped from the deck without disconnecting any cables. Refer to the section Drop the Front Frame. To completely remove the front frame, continue with the Removal section. CAUTION Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure. Drop the Front Frame 1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the Instrument Outer Case removal procedure. 2. Refer to Figure Using the T-10 driver, remove the 7 screws (1) that attach the front frame assembly (2) to the deck. 3. Pull the front frame off of the deck until it is disengaged from the disc drive. 4. At this point, the front frame can be placed flat on the bench for service while still attached to the instrument. If you want to completely remove the front frame, continue with the Removal section. 314 Chapter 11

315 Assembly Replacement Procedures Front Frame Removal 1. Using a 9/16 socket drive, remove the nut securing the Ext Trigger Input BNC connector. Take care to not scratch the front dress panel. 2. Refer to Figure Disconnect the ribbon cable (3) from the A2 front panel interface board. Pull the coaxial cable (4) from the front frame and unclip from the two cable clamps. 3. Lift the front frame assembly away from the deck. Figure 11-5 Front Frame Assembly Removal Chapter

316 Assembly Replacement Procedures Front Frame Replacement 1. Place the front frame assembly in front of the deck. 2. Connect the ribbon cable (3) to the A2 front panel interface board. 3. Feed the coaxial cable BNC connector through the External Trigger Input hole in the front frame, matching the D slot. Secure with the nut removed earlier, using a 9/16 socket. Torque to 21 inch pounds. 4. Clip the coaxial cable into the two cable clamps positioned on the front frame shield. 5. Position the front frame on the deck using the alignment bosses on the deck (5). Remember to tuck the ribbon cable under the fans when pushing the frame onto the deck. This will insure proper airflow to cool the instrument. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 7 screws (1) that secure the front frame to the deck. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 6. Replace the instrument outer case. Refer to the Instrument Outer Case replacement procedure. 316 Chapter 11

317 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A All of the individual components of the RF section can be removed with the RF section in place in the instrument. If necessary for some service situations, the RF section can be removed as a unit to make it easier to replace an individual device. In either case, you must first remove the instrument outer case and top brace to gain access to the RF section. Refer to the Instrument Outer Case and the Top Brace removal procedures. CAUTION Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure. Complete RF Section Removal 1. Refer to Figure on page 358. Loosen, but don t remove the semi-rigid W9 cable at the attenuator. 2. Refer to Figure Remove the cable hold-down (3) by removing the one screw. 3. Remove the cables from the locations indicated (1). 4. Remove the ribbon cables from the A13 Front End Driver assembly. 5. Using the T-10 driver, remove the 4 screws (2). 6. The RF section can now be removed from the deck by sliding it up. Take care to avoid catching any cables on the assembly as you remove it. Chapter

318 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Figure 11-6 RF Section Removal Replacement 1. Position the RF section in the slots in the deck. Gently slide it down, making sure that no cables get caught. 2. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 4 screws. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 3. Replace the cables to the correct locations. Torque the semi-rigid cables to 10 inch pounds including the W9 cable at the input attenuator. 4. Replace the cable hold-down. Torque the single screw to 10 inch pounds. 5. Refer to Figure Replace the ribbon cables to the correct locations. 318 Chapter 11

319 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Figure 11-7 RF Section Ribbon Cable Locations - E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Chapter

320 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A RF Assemblies E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Figure 11-8 RF Section Assemblies - Standard Item Description Item Description 1 J1 Input Connector, Type N 7 A20 Low Band Assembly 2 A14 Attenuator/Switch 8 FL1 Low Pass Filter, 3 GHz 3 A15 Attenuator 9 A21 SLODA 4 L-bracket, RF Main 10 FL2 Band Pass Filter, GHz 5 A18 YTO 11 RF Frame 6 A19 RYTHM 320 Chapter 11

321 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Figure 11-9 RF Section Cables - Standard Chapter

322 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Figure RF Section Hardware A18 YTO and A19 RYTHM Removal 1. Refer to Figure Remove the semi-rigid cables, W9, W35, W36, and W Remove the ribbon cables attached to the YTO and RYTHM. 3. Refer to Figure Using the T-10 driver, remove the 2 screws (1). Remove the third screw that can be accessed down behind the YTO, near the Mid Web. 4. Carefully remove the bracket containing the YTO and RYTHM from the RF section. 322 Chapter 11

323 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A 5. To remove the YTO, remove the two bottom screws that attach it to the bracket. To remove the RYTHM, remove the four screws. CAUTION When you remove the two screws that attach the YTO to the bracket, the YTO will become detached from the YTO can. Take care to hold the complete YTO assembly while removing these screws. Replacement 1. Carefully place the YTO or RYTHM into the bracket. 2. Using the T-10 driver, replace the screws to attach the device to the bracket. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 3. Place the bracket into the RF section. Replace the three screws to attach the bracket to the RF section. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 4. Replace the cables to the correct locations. Torque the semi-rigid cables to 10 inch pounds. 5. Replace the ribbon cables to the YTO and RYTHM. A21 SLODA Removal 1. Refer to Figure Remove the semi-rigid cables W24, W35, W38, and W Refer to Figure Remove the two wire harnesses from the SLODA. 3. Using the T-10 driver, remove the 2 screws (2). 4. The SLODA can now be removed from the RF section. Replacement 1. Place the SLODA in place on the bracket in the RF section. 2. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 2 screws. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 3. Reattach the wire harnesses to the SLODA. 4. Replace the cables to the correct locations. Torque the semi-rigid cables to 10 inch pounds. FL1 Low Pass Filter Removal 1. Refer to Figure Hold the FL1 lowpass filter (8) with a 7/16 open-end wrench while loosening semi-rigid cables W36 and W37. Chapter

324 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A 2. Once the semi-rigid cables are loosened, FL1 can be removed from the RF section by pulling it from the clamps. Replacement 1. Snap FL1 into the clamps on the RF section. 2. Attach the semi-rigid cables to FL1. Hold FL1 with a 7/16 open-end wrench while tightening the semi-rigid cables to 10 inch pounds. FL2 Band Pass Filter Removal 1. Refer to Figure Remove the semi-rigid cables W39 and W Refer to Figure Using the T-10 driver, remove the 2 screws (3). The FL2 band pass filter and bracket can now be removed from the RF section. Replacement 1. Place FL2 and bracket into position in the RF section. 2. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 2 screws that attach the filter to the bracket. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 3. Replace the semi-rigid cables to the correct locations. Torque to 10 inch pounds. A20 Lowband Removal 1. Refer to Figure Remove the semi-rigid cables W15, W18, W37, W39, W40, and W Refer to Figure Using the T-10 driver, remove the 2 screws (4). 3. The Lowband assembly can now be removed from the RF section. Replacement 1. Place the Lowband assembly into position in the RF section. 2. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 2 screws that attach the assembly to the bracket. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 3. Replace the semi-rigid cables to the correct locations. Torque to 10 inch pounds. 324 Chapter 11

325 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A RF Section Option Assemblies E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Figure Preamplifier and Electronic Attenuator Assemblies and Cable Locations Chapter

326 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A A22 Preamplifier Removal 1. Refer to Figure Remove the semi-rigid cables W48 and W Refer to Figure Using the T-10 driver, remove the 2 screws (5). 3. The preamplifier assembly can now be removed from the RF section. Replacement 1. Place the preamplifier assembly into position in the RF section. 2. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 2 screws that attach the assembly to the bracket. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 3. Replace the semi-rigid cables to the correct locations. Torque to 10 inch pounds. A27 Electronic Attenuator Removal 1. Refer to Figure Remove the semi-rigid cables W51 and W Remove the ribbon cable from the attenuator assembly. 3. Refer to Figure Using the T-10 driver, remove the 2 screws (6). 4. The attenuator assembly can now be removed from the RF section. 5. To remove the attenuator assembly from the bracket, remove the four screws on the back. Replacement 1. If the attenuator was removed from the bracket, replace the four screws on the back. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 2. Place the attenuator assembly into position in the RF section. 3. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 2 screws that attach the assembly to the RF section. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 4. Replace the ribbon cable. 5. Replace the semi-rigid cables to the correct locations. Torque to 10 inch pounds. 326 Chapter 11

327 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Option 110 Assemblies (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) Figure Option 110 Assemblies and Cables Figure Option Driver Board Cables Chapter

328 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A A36 Preamplifier and SW6 To remove either the A36 Preamplifier or SW6 switch, it will be necessary to drop the front frame. To drop the front frame with Option 110 installed, follow these steps: 1. Refer to Figure Remove cables W109 and W Refer to Figure Remove ribbon cable W114 and wire harness W106 from the Option driver board. 3. Drop the front frame. See page 314 for instructions. Figure Option 110 A36 Preamplifier and Switch SW6 Option 110 SW6 Switch Removal and Replacement 1. Refer to Figure To remove SW6, remove cables W112 and W Remove the two screws (2). 3. To replace SW6, install it onto the bracket and secure it with the two screws (2) removed earlier. Torque to 9 inch-pounds. 4. Replace W112 and W113. Torque to 10 inch-pounds. 328 Chapter 11

329 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Option 110 A36 Preamplifier Removal and Replacement 1. Refer to Figure To remove A36, remove cables W112 and W Remove the bracket from the front panel by removing the four screws (1) and lifting the assembly from the front frame. 3. Remove all the wires from the preamplifier. The A36 Preamplifier can now be removed from the bracket by removing the four screws from the back of the bracket that attach the preamplifier. 4. To replace the preamplifier, install it on the bracket and attach it using the four screws removed earlier. Torque to 3 inch-pounds. 5. Refer to Figure Reattach the wires and ground wire to the preamplifier. Figure Preamplifier Wires 6. Replace W112 and W113. Torque to 10 inch-pounds. Chapter

330 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Option 123 Assemblies Figure Option 123 Assembly and Cable Locations Figure Option 123 Assembly and Cable Locations 330 Chapter 11

331 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Option 123 Dual Mixer Removal 1. Drop the front frame. See page 314 for instructions. 2. Refer to Figure Remove cables W82, W83, and W Refer to Figure Remove the grey and violet wires from the Dual Mixer connector pins. Figure Dual Mixer 4. Remove the two mixer screws. 5. Remove the two SMA 50 Ω loads from the Low Band In port and the GHz OUT port. Install them on the replacement mixer. Replacement 1. Attach the Dual Mixer to the end of the switch bracket using two of the screws as shown in Figure Before inserting the top screw, locate the black wire with the ground lug that is part of the switch harness. Place the ground lug between the screw head and the mixer body. Torque the mounting screws to 9 in-lbs. 2. Connect the grey wire with the push on connector to the Dual Mixer bias pin. Connect the violet wire with the push on connector to the Pin 7 SW on the Dual Mixer. 3. Replace cables W82, W83, and W84. Torque to 10 in-lbs. 4. Replace the front frame. Chapter

332 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Option 123 Switches Figure Option 123 Switch Wiring Top Switch Removal 1. Drop the front frame. See page 314 for instructions. 2. Note the locations of the soldered wires on the switch terminals, particularity the black wires. Figure shows most wire locations. 3. Unsolder and remove the wires from all top switch solder-on terminals. When removing the black wires, avoid damaging the wires since there is little service length. The colored wires usually have extra length and you may wish to just cut them off and re-strip the ends. 4. Refer to Figure Remove cables W84, W86, and W87 from the top switch. Note that two of the cables have identification bands that correspond to the connector designator 1, or 2, printed on the switch. 5. Remove the two switch mounting screws and remove the switch. Be careful that the standoffs between the two switches are not lost. 332 Chapter 11

333 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Top Switch Replacement NOTE The replacement switch will not have the metal EMI shield installed. The shield is p/n E This shield is only used on the top switch. 1. Position the standoffs over the bottom switch mounting holes. Position the replacement top switch with the label up, and install the mounting screws. 2. Reconnect W84, W86 and W87 by matching the cable information bands to the switch connector designators. Torque to 10 in-lbs. 3. Refer to Figure Re-solder the wires removed earlier. 4. Attach the adhesive EMI shield to the top of the switch. Figure shows the proper position of the shield. Assure the switch port numbers are not covered. Chapter

334 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Bottom Switch Removal 1. Drop the front frame. See page 314 for instructions. 2. Refer to Figure Remove cables W84, W86, and W87 from the top switch. Note that two of the cables have identification bands that correspond to the connector designator 1, or 2, printed on the switch. 3. Remove cable W81 at port 2 of the bottom switch. 4. Refer to Figure Remove W80 from the attenuator and from port C of the bottom switch and set the cable aside. Figure Bottom Switch Cables 5. Refer to Figure and Figure Remove cable W82 from the dual mixer and port 1 of the bottom switch. In order to completely remove the cable, you will need to position the flat sides of the SMA connector nut so it will fit between the two switches. 6. Loosen the switch mounting screw located closest to the fan. Loosen the screw just enough so the threads are clear of the mounting bracket but do not remove the screw. 7. Loosen the other switch mounting screw just enough to rotate both switches towards the front of the instrument. This allows room to unsolder the black jumper wires on the bottom switch. 8. Make note of the black jumper wire position on the bottom switch 334 Chapter 11

335 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A then unsolder the jumper wires from the bottom switch. Avoid damage to the wires since they have little service length. 9. Remove the switch mounting screws being careful to keep track of the two standoffs between the switches. Bottom Switch Replacement 1. Position the replacement bottom switch on the switch bracket. 2. Pre-form the black jumper wires on the top switch for easier installation. Also inspect all solder connections. 3. Position the standoffs over the mounting holes and insert the mounting screws. Slightly tighten the screw close to the front of the instrument. Leave the screw close to the fan resting on the switch bracket, but with no threads engaged. 4. Rotate both switches toward the front of the instrument. 5. Solder the jumper wires. 6. Rotate the switches to their normal position and tighten the mounting screws. 7. Refer to Figure Install W82 from the dual mixer to the bottom switch port 2. Torque to 10 in-lbs 8. Refer to Figure Install W80 from the attenuator to the bottom switch port C. 9. Install W81. Torque to 10 in lbs. 10.Refer to Figure Install W84, W86 and W87 on the top switch. Note that two of the cables have identification bands that correspond to the connector designator 1, or 2, printed on the switch from the top switch. 11.Replace the front panel. Chapter

336 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Most of the individual components of the RF section can be removed with the RF section in place in the instrument. If necessary for some service situations, the RF section can be removed as a unit to make it easier to replace an individual device. In either case, you must first remove the instrument outer case and top brace to gain access to the RF section. Refer to the Instrument Outer Case and the Top Brace removal procedures. CAUTION Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure. Complete RF Section Removal 1. Refer to Figure on page 358. Loosen, but don t remove the semi-rigid W9 cable at the attenuator. 2. Refer to Figure Remove the cable hold-down (3) by removing the one screw. 3. Remove the cables from the locations indicated (1). NOTE For the E4447A, it is required that the A13 Front End Driver, A12 Synthesizer assembly, A11 Reference assembly, and the A10 Lowband/A30 FIFA assemblies be removed from the instrument. This allows the cable from the A10 3rd Converter to the A20 Lowband assembly to be disconnected. See the procedure for replacing the A20 Lowband assembly. 4. Remove the ribbon cables from the A13 Front End Driver assembly. 5. Using the T-10 driver, remove the 4 screws (2). 6. The RF section can now be removed from the deck by sliding it up. Take care to avoid catching any cables on the assembly as you remove it. 336 Chapter 11

337 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Figure RF Section Removal Chapter

338 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Replacement 1. Position the RF section in the slots in the deck. Gently slide it down, making sure that no cables get caught. 2. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 4 screws. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 3. Replace the cables to the correct locations. Torque the semi-rigid cables to 10 inch pounds including the W9 cable at the input attenuator. 4. Replace the cable hold-down. Torque the single screw to 10 inch pounds. 5. Refer to Figure Replace the ribbon cables to the correct locations. Figure RF Section Ribbon Cable Locations - E4446A, E4447A, E4448A 338 Chapter 11

339 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A RF Assemblies E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Figure RF Section Assemblies - Standard Item Description Item Description 1 RF Input Connector 8 FL 1 Low Pass Filter, 3 GHz 2 A14 Attenuator/Switch 9 A21 FELOMA (Freq. Extended LO Multiplying Amp) 3 A15 Attenuator 10 FL 2 Band Pass Filter, GHz 4 L-bracket, RF Main 11 A29 SBTX Driver board 5 A18 YTO 12 A30 FIFA 6 A19 SBTX/RYTHM 7 A20 Low Band Assembly Chapter

340 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Figure RF Section Cables - Standard 340 Chapter 11

341 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Figure RF Section Hardware A18 YTO and A19 SBTX/RYTHM Removal 1. Refer to Figure Remove the semi-rigid cables, W33, W35, W36, and W Remove the ribbon cables attached to the YTO and SBTX/RYTHM. 3. Refer to Figure Using the T-10 driver, remove the 2 screws (1). Remove the third screw that can be accessed down behind the YTO, near the Mid Web. 4. Carefully remove the bracket containing the YTO and SBTX/RYTHM from the RF section. Chapter

342 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A 5. To remove the YTO, remove the two bottom screws that attach it to the bracket. Do not remove the RYTHM from the bracket. CAUTION When you remove the two screws that attach the YTO to the bracket, the YTO will become detached from the YTO can. Take care to hold the complete YTO assembly while removing these screws. Replacement 1. Carefully place the YTO into the bracket. 2. Using the T-10 driver, replace the screws to attach the device to the bracket. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 3. Place the bracket into the RF section. Replace the three screws to attach the bracket to the RF section. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 4. Replace the cables to the correct locations. Torque the semi-rigid cables to 10 inch pounds. 5. Replace the ribbon cables to the YTO and SBTX/RYTHM. A21 FELOMA Removal 1. Refer to Figure Remove the semi-rigid cables W24, W35, W38, W41, and W Refer to Figure Remove the two wire harnesses from the FELOMA (9). 3. Refer to Figure Using the T-10 driver, remove the 2 screws (2). 4. The FELOMA can now be removed from the RF section. Replacement 1. Place the FELOMA in place on the bracket in the RF section. 2. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 2 screws. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 3. Reattach the wire harnesses to the FELOMA. 4. Replace the cables to the correct locations. Torque the semi-rigid cables to 10 inch pounds. FL1 Low Pass Filter Removal 1. Refer to Figure Hold the FL1 lowpass filter (8) with a 7/16 open-end wrench while loosening semi-rigid cables W36 and W Chapter 11

343 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A 2. Once the semi-rigid cables are loosened, FL1 can be removed from the RF section by pulling it from the clamps. Replacement 1. Snap FL1 into the clamps on the RF section. 2. Attach the semi-rigid cables to FL1. Hold FL1 with a 7/16 open-end wrench while tightening the semi-rigid cables to 10 inch pounds. FL2 Band Pass Filter Removal 1. Refer to Figure Remove the semi-rigid cables W39 and W Refer to Figure Using the T-10 driver, remove the 2 screws (3). The FL2 band pass filter and bracket can now be removed from the RF section. Replacement 1. Place FL2 and bracket into position in the RF section. 2. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 2 screws that attach the filter to the bracket. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 3. Replace the semi-rigid cables to the correct locations. Torque to 10 inch pounds. A20 Lowband (E4446A, E4448A) Removal 1. Refer to Figure Remove the cables W15, W18, W37, W39, W41, W54, W55, and W Refer to Figure Using the T-10 driver, remove the 2 screws (4). 3. The Lowband and FIFA assemblies can now be removed from the RF section as a unit. To separate the two assemblies, remove the 2 screws (7) that attach the FIFA to the bracket. Replacement 1. Place the Lowband and FIFA assemblies into position in the RF section. 2. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 2 screws that attach the assembly to the bracket. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 3. Replace the cables to the correct locations. Torque the semi-rigid cables to 10 inch pounds. Chapter

344 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A A20 Lowband (E4447A only) Removal 1. Remove the A13 Front End Driver, A12 Synthesizer, and A11 Reference assemblies. The cable hold down wire will need to be removed in order to remove the Synthesizer assembly. 2. Refer to Figure Remove the semi-rigid cables W15, W37, W39, W41, W54, W55, and W56. Cable W18 will be removed when the A20 Lowband and A30 FIFA are separated. 3. Refer to Figure Using the T-10 driver, remove the 2 screws (4) that attach the Lowband assembly to the instrument. the Lowband and FIFA assemblies can now be removed from the RF section as a unit. 4. Separate the FIFA from the Lowband assembly by removing the 2 screws (7). 5. Remove the bracket from the Lowband assembly. This allows cable W18 to be removed from the Lowband assembly. Replacement 1. Assure the flexible coax cable W18 from the 3rd Converter is routed through the hole in the RF deck shield. Connect the cable to the Lowband assembly. 2. Replace the bracket on the Lowband assembly, and attach the FIFA to the bracket. Torque the screws to 9 inch pounds. 3. Place the Lowband and FIFA assemblies into position in the RF section and attach with the two screws removed in step 3 above. 4. Replace all semi-rigid cables removed from the RF section. Torque to 10 inch pounds. 5. Assure the flexible coax cable from the Lowband to the 3rd Converter is routed along the motherboard so it will not get damaged when the 3 assemblies removed earlier are replaced. Also, assure there is no slack in the cable from the Lowband connector to where the cable goes through the RF section shield. 6. Replace the 3 board assemblies, attach all cables, and the cable hold down wire. 344 Chapter 11

345 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A A29 SBTX Driver Board Removal 1. Remove the ribbon cables attached to the SBTX driver board. 2. The SBTX Driver board can now be removed from the RF section by sliding it out while pulling up on the spring tab. Replacement 1. Place the SBTX Driver board into position in the RF section and slide it into place until the spring tab clicks into position. 2. Replace the ribbon cables to the correct locations. A30 FIFA Removal 1. Refer to Figure Remove the semi-rigid cables W37, W39, W41, W54, W55, and W Refer to Figure Using the T-10 driver, remove the 2 screws (7). 3. The FIFA assembly can now be removed from the RF section. Replacement 1. Place the FIFA assembly into position in the RF section. 2. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 2 screws that attach the assembly to the bracket. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 3. Replace the semi-rigid cables to the correct locations. Torque to 10 inch pounds. Chapter

346 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A RF Section Option Assemblies E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Figure Chapter 11

347 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A A22 Preamplifier Removal 1. Refer to Figure Remove the semi-rigid cables W48 and W Refer to Figure Using the T-10 driver, remove the 2 screws (5). 3. The preamplifier assembly can now be removed from the RF section. Replacement 1. Place the preamplifier assembly into position in the RF section. 2. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 2 screws that attach the assembly to the bracket. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 3. Replace the semi-rigid cables to the correct locations. Torque to 10 inch pounds. A27 Electronic Attenuator Removal 1. Refer to Figure Remove the semi-rigid cables W51 and W Remove the ribbon cable from the attenuator assembly. 3. Refer to Figure Using the T-10 driver, remove the 2 screws (6). 4. The attenuator assembly can now be removed from the RF section. 5. To remove the attenuator assembly from the bracket, remove the four screws on the back. Replacement 1. If the attenuator was removed from the bracket, replace the four screws on the back. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 2. Place the attenuator assembly into position in the RF section. 3. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 2 screws that attach the assembly to the RF section. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 4. Replace the ribbon cable. 5. Replace the semi-rigid cables to the correct locations. Torque to 10 inch pounds. Chapter

348 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Option 110 Assemblies E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Figure Option 110 Assembly and Cable Locations 348 Chapter 11

349 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Figure Option 110 Front View Option 110 A36 Preamplifier Removal 1. Drop the front frame. See page 314 for instructions. 2. Refer to Figure Remove cables W103, and W104 with AT3. Remove all the wires from the A36 Preamplifier. 3. Refer to Figure Remove the three screws (1) and lift the preamplifier and bracket from the instrument. 4. Remove the wire from the ground lug of the preamplifier. 5. Refer to Figure To separate the preamplifier from the bracket, remove the four screws from the back of the bracket. Chapter

350 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Figure Preamplifier and Bracket Replacement 1. Attach the preamplifier to the bracket using the four screws removed earlier. Torque to 3 inch-pounds. 2. Attach the ground wire to the ground lug of the preamplifier. 3. Install the preamplifier/bracket assembly into position and attach with the three screws (1). Refer to Figure Torque to 9 inch-pounds. 4. Refer to Figure Replace cables W103, and W104 with AT3. Torque to 9 inch-pounds. 5. Refer to Figure Replace the wires onto the preamplifier in the positions shown. 350 Chapter 11

351 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Figure Preamplifier Wires 6. Replace the front frame. SW4 Millimeter Switch Removal 1. Drop the front frame. See page 314 for instructions. 2. Refer to Figure Remove cables W101, W102, W103, W104, and ribbon cable W Remove the three screws (2) that attach the switch to the bracket. Lift the switch from the bracket. Replacement 1. Attach the switch to the bracket using the three screws (2) removed earlier. Torque to 6 inch-pounds. 2. Replace cables W101, W102, W103, and W104. Torque to 9 inch-pounds. 3. Replace ribbon cable W Replace the front frame. Chapter

352 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Option 123 Assemblies E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Figure Option 123 Assembly and Cable Locations A34 Mixer Removal 1. Drop the front frame. See page 314 for instructions. 2. Refer to Figure Remove cables W93, W98, W99, and flat flex cable W Remove the three screws (1) that attach the A34 Mixer to the standoffs. 352 Chapter 11

353 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Replacement 1. Refer to Figure Attach the A34 Mixer to the standoffs using the three screws (1) removed earlier. Torque to 9 in-lbs. 2. Replace cables W93, W98, and W99. Torque to 10 in-lbs. 3. Replace flat flex cable W Replace the front frame. A35 Mixer Bias Board Removal 1. Drop the front frame. See page 314 for instructions. 2. Refer to Figure Remove flat flex cable W Remove the four screws (3) that attach the A35 Mixer Bias board to the bracket. Replacement NOTE The A35 Mixer Bias board must have a self-adhesive thermal pad attached to the voltage regulator (the square black component near the center of the board). This thermal pad transfers heat from the voltage regulator in the back side of the board to the sheet metal chassis. When replacing the mixer bias board, discard the old thermal pad and replace it. To install a replacement thermal pad, peel off the protective cover from the pink side of the pad and attach to the voltage regulator. Peel off the other protective cover on the pad and carefully align the board over the mounting holes and secure with screws. 1. Refer to Figure Attach the A35 Mixer Bias board to the bracket using the four screws (3) removed earlier. Torque to 9 in-lbs. 2. Replace flat flex cable W Replace the front frame. SW3 Switch Removal 1. Drop the front frame. See page 314 for instructions. 2. Refer to Figure Remove cables W89. W93, W94, and ribbon cable W96. Chapter

354 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Figure SW3 Removal 3. Refer to Figure Remove the two screws (4) that attach the SW3 bracket to the main bracket. Lift the switch/bracket assembly from the instrument. 4. Refer to Figure To separate the switch from the bracket, remove the two screws. 354 Chapter 11

355 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Figure SW3 and Bracket Replacement 1. Attach SW3 to the bracket using the two screws removed earlier. Torque to 9 in-lbs. 2. Place the switch/bracket assembly into place on the main bracket. Refer to Figure Replace the two screws (4) that attach the SW3 bracket to the main bracket. Torque to 9 inch-pounds. 3. Refer to Figure Replace cables W89. W93, and W94. Torque to 9 in-lbs. 4. Replace ribbon cable W Replace the front frame. SW5 Switch Removal 1. Drop the front frame. See page 314 for instructions. 2. Refer to Figure Remove cables W99, W100, W105 and ribbon cable W Remove the three screws (2) that attach SW5 to the bracket. Lift the switch/bracket assembly from the instrument. 4. Refer to Figure To separate the switch from the bracket, remove the three screws. Chapter

356 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Section E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Figure SW5 and Bracket Replacement 1. Attach SW5 to the bracket using the three screws removed earlier. Torque to 6 in-lbs. 2. Place the switch/bracket assembly into place on the main bracket. Refer to Figure Replace the two screws (2) that attach the SW5 bracket to the main bracket. Torque to 9 inch-pounds. 3. Replace cables W99, W100, and W105. Torque to 10 inch-pounds. 4. Replace ribbon cable W Replace the front frame. 356 Chapter 11

357 Assembly Replacement Procedures Attenuator Assembly E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Attenuator Assembly E4440A, E4443A, E4445A CAUTION Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure. Removal 1. If you haven t already done so, remove the instrument outer case and top brace. Refer to the Instrument Outer Case and the Top Brace removal procedures. 2. Drop the front frame. Refer to the Front Frame section. 3. Unplug the ribbon cables from the attenuators. 4. Refer to Figure Unplug the coaxial cable W20 from the locations marked (1). 5. Remove the semi-rigid cables W7 and W9. 6. Using the T-10 driver, remove the 4 screws (2). 7. The attenuator assembly can now be removed from the deck. Chapter

358 Assembly Replacement Procedures Attenuator Assembly E4440A, E4443A, E4445A Figure Attenuator Assembly Removal (E4440A, E4443A, E4445A) Replacement 1. Position the attenuator assembly in the deck. 2. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 4 screws, but do not torque. 3. Replace the semi-rigid cables to the correct locations. Torque the cables to 10 inch pounds. 4. Torque the screws to 9 inch pounds. 5. Replace the coaxial cable. 6. Dress the ribbon cables between the fan and deck and clip, and reconnect to the correct locations. 7. Replace the front frame. Refer to the Front Frame section. 8. Replace the instrument top brace and outer case. Refer to the Top Brace and the Instrument Outer Case replacement procedures. 358 Chapter 11

359 Assembly Replacement Procedures Attenuator Assembly E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Attenuator Assembly E4446A, E4447A, E4448A CAUTION Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure. Removal 1. If you haven t already done so, remove the instrument outer case and top brace. Refer to the Instrument Outer Case and the Top Brace removal procedures. 2. Drop the front frame. Refer to the Front Frame section. 3. Unplug the ribbon cables from the attenuators. 4. Refer to Figure Unplug the coaxial cable W20 from the locations marked (1). 5. Remove the semi-rigid cables W7 and W Using the T-10 driver, remove the 4 screws (2). 7. The attenuator assembly can now be removed from the deck. Chapter

360 Assembly Replacement Procedures Attenuator Assembly E4446A, E4447A, E4448A Figure Attenuator Assembly Removal (E4446A, E4448A) Replacement 1. Position the attenuator assembly in the deck. 2. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 4 screws, but do not torque. 3. Replace the semi-rigid cables to the correct locations. Torque the cables to 10 inch pounds. 4. Torque the screws to 9 inch pounds. 5. Replace the coaxial cable. 6. Dress the ribbon cables between the fan and deck and clip, and reconnect to the correct locations. 7. Replace the front frame. Refer to the Front Frame section. 8. Replace the instrument top brace and outer case. Refer to the Top Brace and the Instrument Outer Case replacement procedures. 360 Chapter 11

361 Assembly Replacement Procedures A5 Power Supply A5 Power Supply CAUTION Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure. Removal 1. Remove the instrument top brace. Refer to the Top Brace removal procedure. 2. Refer to Figure Using the T-10 driver, remove the 5 screws (1) securing the A5 power supply assembly (2) to the deck and the rear frame. 3. Carefully pull up on the power supply assembly to disengage from the motherboard connector. Figure Power Supply Removal Chapter

362 Assembly Replacement Procedures A5 Power Supply Replacement 1. Place the power supply assembly into position in the deck. Push down to mate the assembly with the motherboard connector. 2. Refer to Figure Using the T-10 driver, replace the 5 screws. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 3. Replace the instrument top brace. Refer to the Top Brace replacement procedure. 362 Chapter 11

363 Assembly Replacement Procedures A39 USB/Memory Board A39 USB/Memory Board CAUTION Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure. Removal 1. Remove the instrument top brace. Refer to the Top Brace removal procedure. 2. Remove the 9 screws attaching the rear plate in place on the PSA rear panel. Chapter

364 Assembly Replacement Procedures A39 USB/Memory Board 3. Remove the USB/Memory board. To do this, gently lift the board vertically from its socket on the PSA motherboard. 364 Chapter 11

365 Assembly Replacement Procedures A39 USB/Memory Board Replacement 1. Insert the USB/Memory board, making sure to firmly insert the connectors into the PSA motherboard sockets, but do not exert so much force as to break the connector. 2. After installation, the memory board should look like this: 3. Put the rear plate in place on the PSA rear panel, and screw it into place. 4. Replace the instrument top brace. Refer to the Top Brace replacement procedure. Chapter

366 Assembly Replacement Procedures A6 SCSI Board A6 SCSI Board CAUTION Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure. Removal 1. Refer to Figure At the rear of the instrument, use a T-10 driver to remove the 6 screws (1) securing the small panel to the frame. 2. The SCSI board can be removed through the rear panel by pulling up on the board to disengage it from the CPU board. Figure SCSI Board Removal Replacement 1. Replace the SCSI board by inserting it into the opening on the rear frame. Carefully position the board in the CPU board connector and push down to mate. 2. Replace the panel onto the frame by replacing the 6 screws using a T-10 driver. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 366 Chapter 11

367 Assembly Replacement Procedures Vertical Board Assemblies (Standard Instrument) Vertical Board Assemblies (Standard Instrument) CAUTION Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure. Figure shows the location of the vertical board assemblies. Figure Vertical Board Assembly Locations Chapter

368 Assembly Replacement Procedures Vertical Board Assemblies (Standard Instrument) Item Description Item Description 1 A5 Power Supply 6 A10 3rd Converter Assembly 2 A6 SCSI Interface Board or A39 USB/Memory Board 7 A11 Reference Assembly 3 A7 Digital IF Assembly 8 A12 LO Synthesizer Assembly 4 A8 Analog IF Assembly 9 A13 Front End Driver Board 5 A9 2nd LO/ Fan Control Assembly Figure Vertical Board Assembly Cables W16 W21 W22 W17 W44 W24 W18 W19 W20 W11 se832a W16 W12 W1 W10 W15 W14 W13 W11 W Chapter 11

369 Assembly Replacement Procedures Vertical Board Assemblies (Standard Instrument) Description W1 Cable (5), coax, Front Panel External Trigger to A8 Analog IF Assy. P1 W10 Cable (8), coax, 7.5 MHz from A8 Analog IF P2, to A7 Digital IF, P1 W11 Cable (3), coax, 21.4 MHz from A10 3rd Converter J5 to A8 Analog IF, J13 W12 Cable (6), coax, TRIGGER IN from rear panel to A8 Analog IF, P4 W13 Cable (20), coax, TRIGGER 1 OUT to A9 2nd LO, J12 W14 Cable (30), coax, TRIGGER 2 OUT to A9 2nd LO, J11 W15 Cable, semi-rigid, A9 2nd LO, J10 to Lowband, J5 W16 Cable (4), coax, 600 MHz from A11 Reference board P3 to A9 2nd LO, J1 W17 Cable (10), coax (with ferrites), A19 RYTHM highband output to A10 3rd Converter J1 W18 Cable (7), coax (with ferrites), MHz A20 Lowband assy to A10 3rd Converter J2 W18 Cable (E4447A only). This cable is permanently attached to the A10 3rd Converter W19 Cable (40), coax MHz IF OUT from A10 3rd Converter J4 to rear panel W20 Cable (50), coax, 50 MHz Cal signal from A10 3rd Converter J7 to A14 Attenuator W21 Cable (90), coax, 10 MHz Out from A11 Reference Assy P2 to rear panel W22 Cable (70), coax, Ext Ref In from rear panel to A11 Reference Assy P1 W24 Cable, semi-rigid, A21 SLODA to A12 Synthesizer (E4440A, 43A, 45A) W24 Cable, semi-rigid, A21 SLODA to A12 Synthesizer (E4446A, 47A, 48A) W44 Cable (9), coax, IF IN from front-panel to A10 3rd Converter J3 (Option AYZ) Chapter

370 Assembly Replacement Procedures Vertical Board Assemblies (Standard Instrument) Figure Option 122 or 140 Assembly and Cable Locations Reference Designator Description Agilent Part Number A10 A10 3rd Converter Assembly E A31 A31 Wideband Analog IF Assembly (Option 122 or 140) E A32 A32 Wideband Digital IF Assembly (Option 122 or 140) E W60 W61 W62 W64 W65 W66 W60 Cable, ribbon, ADC Data from A31 WB Analog IF to A32 WB Digital IF (Option 122 or 140) W61 Cable (65), coax, 100 MHz Ref from A11 Reference Assembly to A31 WB Analog IF (Option 122 or 140) W62 Cable (95), coax, 300 MHz Ref from A11 Reference Assembly P4 to A31 WB Analog IF (Option 122 or 140) W64 Cable (60), coax, WB IF CA:L from A31 WB Analog IF to A10 3rd Converter J6 (Option 122 or 140) W65 Cable (40), coax, MHz IF from A10 3rd Converter J4 to A31 WB Analog IF (Option 122 or 140) W66 Cable (66), coax, MHz from A31 WB Analog IF to Rear Panel (Option 122 or 140) E E Chapter 11

371 Assembly Replacement Procedures Vertical Board Assemblies (Standard Instrument) Figure Option 122 or 140 Cable Routing Removal If you haven t already done so, remove the instrument outer case and top brace. Refer to the Instrument Outer Case and the Top Brace removal procedures. To remove any of the vertical board assemblies, it will be necessary to remove the cables attached to that assembly. After the cables are removed, pull up on the ejector tabs to unseat the board from the motherboard connector, then slide the board up to remove it from the deck. NOTE For E4447A A10 3rd Converter assembly, the cable on J2 cannot be removed! See below for the 3rd Converter removal procedure. For Option 122 or 140 assemblies and cables, see Figure Remove W60 ribbon cable before removing either A31 or A32 assemblies. To remove the A12 LO Synthesizer assembly, it will also be necessary to remove the cable hold down wire (single screw), and the two screws attaching the assembly to the midweb and deck. Chapter

372 Assembly Replacement Procedures Vertical Board Assemblies (Standard Instrument) A10 Third Converter Removal Procedure (E4447A only) Removal 1. Remove the A13 Front End Driver, A12 Synthesizer, and A11 Reference assemblies. The cable hold down wire will need to be removed in order to remove the Synthesizer assembly. 2. Refer to Figure Remove the semi-rigid cables W15, W37, W39, W41, W54, W55, and W56. Cable W18 will be removed when the A20 Lowband and A30 FIFA are separated. 3. Refer to Figure Using the T-10 driver, remove the 2 screws (4) that attach the Lowband assembly to the instrument. the Lowband and FIFA assemblies can now be removed from the RF section as a unit. 4. Separate the FIFA from the Lowband assembly by removing the 2 screws (7). 5. Remove the bracket from the Lowband assembly. This allows cable W18 to be removed from the Lowband assembly. 6. Carefully pull the W18 cable through the hole in the RF deck shield. Remove the 3rd Converter assembly from the instrument. Replacement 1. Install the 3rd Converter assembly and assure the flexible coax cable W18 from the 3rd Converter is routed through the hole in the RF deck shield. Connect the cable to the Lowband assembly. 2. Replace the bracket on the Lowband assembly, and attach the FIFA to the bracket. Torque the screws to 9 inch pounds. 3. Place the Lowband and FIFA assemblies into position in the RF section and attach with the two screws removed in step 4 above. 4. Replace all semi-rigid cables removed from the RF section. Torque to 10 inch pounds. 5. Assure the flexible coax cable from the Lowband to the 3rd Converter is routed along the motherboard so it will not get damaged when the 3 assemblies removed earlier are replaced. Also, assure there is no slack in the cable from the Lowband connector to where the cable goes through the RF section shield. 6. Replace the 3 board assemblies, attach all cables, and the cable hold down wire. Replacement 1. Slide the assembly down in the correct front and rear guide slots. 372 Chapter 11

373 Assembly Replacement Procedures Vertical Board Assemblies (Standard Instrument) Refer to the silkscreened locations on the motherboard or the top brace to ensure correct placement of the assemblies. Hook the ejectors under the tabs on the rear frame and mid web. Carefully push down on the ejectors to mate the assembly with the motherboard connectors. If the A7 Digital IF ejector handles do not lay flat against the assembly casting, the assembly my not be inserted fully and may cause EEPROM self-test failures. 2. Reconnect the cables that were removed. Refer to the silk-screen on the instrument top brace, along with the matching numbers on the cables and near the connectors on the boards, for correct placement of cables. Torque any semi-rigid cables to 10 inch pounds. Take care to dress the cables correctly so they aren t pinched when the top brace is replaced. For correct routing of Option 122 or 140 cables, refer to Figure on page If the A12 LO Synthesizer assembly was removed, replace the two screws and torque to 9 inch pounds. Replace the cable hold down by inserting the end into the hole in the Midweb and secure it with the single screw. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 4. Replace the instrument top brace and outer case. Refer to the Top Brace and the Instrument Outer Case replacement procedures. Chapter

374 Assembly Replacement Procedures Fans/Mid Web Fans/Mid Web NOTE The fans are attached to a part of the instrument known as the mid web. It is possible to remove a fan without removing the mid web from the instrument. The 3 fans in the instrument can be replaced individually. It will be necessary to remove other assemblies located near the fan to be replaced. CAUTION Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure. Fans Fan Removal 1. Remove the instrument top brace. Refer to the Top Brace removal procedure. 2. Drop the front frame. Refer to the Drop the Front Frame procedure. 3. Remove any assemblies necessary to access the rear of the midweb where the defective fan is located. You will need to access the rivets as shown in Figure Refer to the removal procedures for the power supply, the vertical board assemblies, or the RF section as needed. 4. Unplug the appropriate fan cable from the motherboard. 5. Refer to Figure To remove a fan, it is necessary to remove the 4 plastic rivets (1) that attach it to the mid-web (2). To do this use a small tool such as a punch or screwdriver to push the rivet out. 6. Once the rivets are removed, the fan can be lifted from the mid web. 7. Remove the fan guard if available. 374 Chapter 11

375 Assembly Replacement Procedures Fans/Mid Web Figure Fan Removal Fan Replacement 1. Place the new fan on the mid-web, assuring the arrow on the fan is pointing toward the mid-web and the fan cables are positioned so they won t interfere with the fan operation or airflow. 2. Install the 4 plastic rivets that secure the fan to the mid-web. With the rivets center posts raised, press the rivets through the mid web and into the fan. Press down on the center post to snap the rivets into place. 3. Replace the fan guard. 4. Replace any assemblies that were removed for access to the fan. 5. Plug the fan cables into the motherboard. 6. Replace the front frame assembly. Refer to the Front Frame replacement procedure. 7. Replace the instrument top brace. Refer to the Top Brace replacement procedure. Chapter

376 Assembly Replacement Procedures Fans/Mid Web Mid Web To completely remove the mid web, perform the following steps: Removal 1. Remove the instrument top brace. Refer to the Top Brace removal procedure. 2. Drop the front frame. Refer to the Drop the Front Frame procedure. 3. Remove the attenuator assembly. Refer to the Attenuator Assembly E4440A, E4443A, E4445A removal procedure. 4. Remove the A5 power supply. Refer to the A5 Power Supply removal procedure. 5. Remove the vertical board assemblies. Refer to the Vertical Board Assemblies (Standard Instrument) removal procedure. 6. Refer to Figure Undress the coaxial cables from the cable guide in the mid-web. 7. Using the T-10 driver, remove the 9 screws (1) that secure the mid-web/fan assembly (2) to the deck. Note this includes 5 screws on the bottom of the instrument. Refer to Figure on page 383 and remove the screws (1). 8. Unplug the 3 fan connectors from the motherboard. 9. Lift the mid-web/fan assembly from the deck. Figure Mid-Web/Fan Assembly Removal 376 Chapter 11

377 Assembly Replacement Procedures Fans/Mid Web Replacement 1. Place the mid-web into position in the deck with the fans on the front side of the instrument. Take care to avoid pinching any cables or wires underneath the mid web. 2. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 9 screws that secure the mid-web/fan assembly to the deck. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 3. Plug the 3 fan connectors into the motherboard. 4. Replace the cables that were removed. Torque any semi-rigid cables to 10 inch pounds. 5. Replace the power supply. Refer to the A5 Power Supply replacement procedure. 6. Replace the vertical board assemblies. Refer to the Vertical Board Assemblies (Standard Instrument) replacement procedure. 7. Replace the attenuator assembly. Refer to the Attenuator Assembly E4440A, E4443A, E4445A replacement procedure. 8. Redress the cables in the mid-web so they will not be pinched under the top brace or interfere with any fan operation. 9. Replace the front frame assembly. Refer to the Front Frame replacement procedure. 10.Replace the instrument top brace. Refer to the Top Brace replacement procedure. Chapter

378 Assembly Replacement Procedures A23 Disk Drive A23 Disk Drive CAUTION Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure. NOTE The A23 disk drive assembly consists of the disk drive, disk drive board, and disk drive mount. These are removed from the instrument as a unit, but they can be replaced separately. Removal 1. Remove the instrument top brace. Refer to the Top Brace removal procedure. 2. Remove the front frame. Refer to the Front Frame removal procedure. 3. Remove the RF section. Refer to the RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A removal procedure. 4. Unplug the front frame ribbon cable from the motherboard. 5. Refer to Figure Using the T-10 driver, remove the 2 screws (1) that attach the disk drive cover to the deck. 6. Unplug the flat flex cable from the motherboard connector. It is necessary to unlock this connector before removing the cable. 7. Remove the ferrite block from the cable. 8. The disk drive assembly can now be pulled out of the chassis. 9. To separate the disk drive board from the disk drive, refer to Figure Remove the top part of the disk drive mount (1). The disk drive (2) and the disk drive board (3) can now be lifted out of the bottom part of the mount (4). 10.Remove the flat flex cable from the disk drive by unlocking the connector on the drive. 378 Chapter 11

379 Assembly Replacement Procedures A23 Disk Drive Figure Disk Drive and Motherboard Removal Chapter

380 Assembly Replacement Procedures A23 Disk Drive Figure Disk Drive Board Removal 380 Chapter 11

381 Assembly Replacement Procedures A23 Disk Drive Replacement 1. To install the disk drive board (3) into the mount, align the pins on the mount with the hole and the slot on the board. Refer to Figure Install the disk drive (2) into the mount over the pc board. Ensure the drive is located over the pin at the rear of the mount. Place the top cover of the disk mount over the 4 pins. 3. Replace the flat flex cable to the disk drive and lock the connector to secure the cable. 4. Refer to Figure Slide the disk drive assembly into the disk shield. 5. Replace the ferrite block around the flat flex cable. 6. Plug in the flat flex cable to the motherboard. 7. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 2 screws that attach the disk drive cover to the deck. Torque to 9 inch-pounds. 8. Plug the front frame ribbon cable onto the motherboard. 9. Replace the RF section. Refer to the RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A replacement procedure. 10.Replace the front frame. Refer to the Front Frame replacement procedure. 11.Replace the instrument top brace. Refer to the Top Brace replacement procedure. Chapter

382 Assembly Replacement Procedures A25 Motherboard A25 Motherboard Removing the motherboard requires the removal of all the other assemblies in the instrument. Take care to note the locations of cables and screws for correct placement during reassembly. CAUTION Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure. NOTE The motherboard assembly consists of the A25 motherboard and the MP35 motherboard shield. A replacement motherboard does not include the shield, so when you change a faulty motherboard you must transfer the shield to the new motherboard. Removal 1. Remove the instrument top brace. Refer to the Top Brace removal procedure. 2. Remove the front frame. Refer to the Front Frame removal procedure. 3. Remove the vertical assemblies. Refer to the Vertical Board Assemblies (Standard Instrument) removal procedure. 4. Remove the A5 assembly. Refer to the A5 Power Supply removal procedure. 5. Remove the A26 assembly. Refer to the A26 CPU Assembly removal procedure. 6. Remove the RF section. Refer to the RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A removal procedure. 7. Remove the mid-web/fan assembly. Refer to the Fans/Mid Web removal procedure. 8. Remove the attenuator assembly. Refer to the Attenuator Assembly E4440A, E4443A, E4445A removal procedure. 9. Remove the W8 front panel ribbon cable from the motherboard. Detach the disk drive cover (refer to Figure on page 379) and remove the W10 disk drive flat flex cable from the motherboard. 10.Using the T-10 driver, remove the 6 screws (2) from the bottom of the instrument as indicated in Figure Refer to Figure on page 379. Remove the 7 screws (2) securing the A21 motherboard to the deck. Lift the motherboard out of the deck. 382 Chapter 11

383 Assembly Replacement Procedures A25 Motherboard Figure Bottom Screws Chapter

384 Assembly Replacement Procedures A25 Motherboard Replacement 1. Refer to Figure on page 379. Place the motherboard into position in the deck. Using the T-10 driver, replace the screws that secure the mother board to the deck. For alignment purposes, tighten the screws in the order marked on the motherboard #1 and #2 first, then tighten the #3, #4, and #5 screws. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 2. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 6 screws on the bottom of the instrument as indicated in Figure Torque to 9 inch pounds. 3. Reattach the W10 flat flex cable and W8 ribbon cable to the motherboard. 4. Replace the mid-web/fan assembly. Refer to the Fans/Mid Web replacement procedure. 5. Replace the A5 assembly. Refer to the A5 Power Supply replacement procedure. 6. Replace the A26 assembly. Refer to the A26 CPU Assembly replacement procedure. 7. Replace the RF section. Refer to the RF Section E4440A, E4443A, E4445A replacement procedure. 8. Replace the vertical assemblies. Refer to the Vertical Board Assemblies (Standard Instrument) replacement procedure. 9. Replace the attenuator assembly. Refer to the Attenuator Assembly E4440A, E4443A, E4445A replacement procedure. 10.Replace the front frame assembly. Refer to the Front Frame replacement procedure. 11.Replace the instrument top brace. Refer to the Top Brace replacement procedure. 384 Chapter 11

385 Assembly Replacement Procedures A26 CPU Assembly A26 CPU Assembly CAUTION Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure. NOTE The CPU assembly consists of three separate boards: the A26 CPU (processor) board, the A26A1 DRAM board, and the A26A2 Flash board. The Flash memory board contains data that is pertinent to your particular instrument. If you are changing a faulty CPU board, you must transfer the three smaller boards over to the new CPU board. Refer to the A26A1 DRAM and A26A2 Flash Boards removal and replacement procedure. After the boards are installed on the new processor board, refer to the procedure in Chapter 12 for information on transferring data to the new processor. Removal 1. Remove the instrument top brace. Refer to the Top Brace removal procedure. 2. Remove the A7 Digital IF assembly. Refer to the Vertical Board Assemblies (Standard Instrument) removal procedure. 3. Remove the A6 SCSI board. Refer to the A6 SCSI Board removal procedure. 4. Using the T-10 driver, remove the 14 screws (1) from the rear panel as shown in Figure Read the Warning on the rear dress panel before removing the CPU assembly from the deck. 6. Refer to Figure Use the handle (2) to slide the A26 assembly (3) out of the deck by pulling towards the rear of the instrument. 7. If you need to replace the battery, go to Battery Replacement on page 387. Chapter

386 Assembly Replacement Procedures A26 CPU Assembly Figure CPU Screw Locations Figure CPU Assembly Removal 386 Chapter 11

387 Assembly Replacement Procedures A26 CPU Assembly Replacement 1. Secure the A26A1 DRAM and the A26A2 Flash boards onto the new processor board. Refer to the A26A1 DRAM and A26A2 Flash Boards replacement procedure. 2. Slide the CPU assembly into the deck. Keep the assembly flat as you slide it into the deck to avoid damage. Use caution not to pop off the plastic stand-offs on the bottom of the board. Fully engage the connectors by pushing on the CPU dress panel. 3. Refer to Figure Using the T-10 driver, secure the assembly to the rear frame with the 14 screws (1). Torque to 9 inch pounds. 4. Replace the A6 SCSI board. Refer to the A6 SCSI Board replacement procedure. 5. Replace the A7 Digital IF assembly. Refer to the Vertical Board Assemblies (Standard Instrument) replacement procedure. 6. Replace the instrument top brace. Refer to the Top Brace replacement procedure. Battery Replacement The battery is easily replaced by unclipping it from the board. Take care to install the new battery correctly to ensure proper polarity. WARNING Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended. Discard used batteries according to manufacturer s instructions. Chapter

388 Assembly Replacement Procedures A26A1 DRAM and A26A2 Flash Boards A26A1 DRAM and A26A2 Flash Boards CAUTION Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure. Removal 1. Remove the instrument top brace. Refer to the Top Brace removal procedure. 2. Remove the A26 assembly. Refer to the A26 CPU Assembly removal procedure. 3. Refer to Figure Cut the standoffs flush with the top of the memory board, and carefully pull up on either the A26A1 DRAM board (1), or the A26A2 Flash board (2) to disengage it from the CPU assembly. Figure A26A1 and A26A2 Board Removal 388 Chapter 11

389 Assembly Replacement Procedures A26A1 DRAM and A26A2 Flash Boards Replacement NOTE Replacement DRAM and Flash boards are packaged with replacement standoffs. 1. Install the new standoffs. 2. To replace the DRAM or Flash boards, align the connectors and pins of the board over the holes and press down to seat the board. 3. Replace the A26 assembly. Refer to the A26 CPU Assembly replacement procedure. 4. Replace the instrument top brace. Refer to the Top Brace replacement procedure. Chapter

390 Assembly Replacement Procedures Rear Frame Rear Frame CAUTION Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure. Removal 1. Remove the instrument top brace. Refer to the Top Brace removal procedure. 2. Refer to Figure Unplug the W12, W13, W14, W19, W21, and W22 cables from the boards. If the instrument has optional hardware, there will be additional cables to remove. 3. Remove the vertical board assemblies. Refer to the Vertical Board Assemblies (Standard Instrument) removal procedure. 4. Remove the A6 SCSI board. Refer to the A6 SCSI Board removal procedure. 5. Remove the A26 CPU assembly. Refer to the A26 CPU Assembly removal procedure. 6. Refer to Figure Remove the rear dress panel, which includes numerous cables. Using the T-10 driver, remove the 13 screws (1). 7. Refer to Figure Using a T-10 driver, remove the 11 screws (1) that secure the rear frame to the deck. Remove the rear frame from the deck. 390 Chapter 11

391 Assembly Replacement Procedures Rear Frame Figure Rear Panel Cables Figure Rear Dress Panel Removal Chapter

392 Assembly Replacement Procedures Rear Frame Figure Rear Frame Removal Replacement 1. Place the rear frame in position on the deck. 2. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 11 screws to secure the rear frame to the deck. For alignment purposes, tighten the screws marked with a #1 and a #2 in Figure Torque to 9 inch pounds. 3. Replace the rear dress panel and reroute the cables. Refer to Figure to reconnect the cables to the correct locations. 4. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 13 screws that secure the dress panel to the rear frame. For alignment purposes, tighten the screws marked with a #1 and a #2 (silkscreened on the dress panel) first. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 5. Replace the A26 CPU assembly. Refer to the A26 CPU Assembly replacement procedure. 6. Replace the A6 SCSI board. Refer to the A6 SCSI Board replacement procedure. 7. Replace the vertical board assemblies and reattach the cables. Refer to the Vertical Board Assemblies (Standard Instrument) replacement procedure. Refer to Figure for the proper dressing of the cables. 8. Replace the instrument top brace. Refer to the Top Brace replacement procedure. 392 Chapter 11

393 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Input Connector RF Input Connector Removal 1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the Instrument Outer Case removal procedure. 2. Remove the instrument top brace. Refer to the Top Brace removal procedure. 3. Remove the front frame. Refer to the Front Frame removal procedure. 4. Refer to Figure Using a 5/16 inch wrench, disconnect the semi-rigid cable (2) from the connector. 5. Using the T-10 driver, remove the 2 screws (3) that secure the input connector bracket to the deck. 6. Remove the connector and bracket from the instrument. 7. Remove the connector from the bracket (4) using a 9/16 inch wrench. Figure RF Input Connector Chapter

394 Assembly Replacement Procedures RF Input Connector Replacement 1. Attach the new connector to the bracket. Torque to 80 inch pounds. 2. Replace the connector and bracket into the instrument. 3. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 2 screws that secure the input connector bracket to the deck. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 4. Using a 5/16 inch wrench, reconnect the semi-rigid cable to the connector. To avoid twisting the cable, hold onto it during tightening. Torque to 10 inch pounds. 5. Replace the front frame. Refer to the Front Frame replacement procedure. 6. Replace the instrument top brace. Refer to the Top Brace replacement procedure. 7. Replace the instrument outer case. Refer to the Instrument Outer Case removal procedure. 394 Chapter 11

395 Assembly Replacement Procedures Front Frame Subassemblies Front Frame Subassemblies In order to remove any of the following subassemblies, it is necessary to drop the front frame assembly from the main deck. Refer to the Drop the Front Frame procedure. It will also be necessary to remove the front shield from the front frame assembly. Refer to Figure Remove the cables from the cable clamps. Using the T-10 driver, remove the 11 screws (1) securing the front shield (2) to the front frame. Lift the shield from the front frame. After the subassembly is changed, replace the front shield using the 11 screws removed earlier. For alignment purposes, tighten the screws marked with #1 and #2 first (silkscreened on the shield), then tighten the remaining screws. Torque to 9 inch pounds. Reconnect the front frame to the deck. Refer to the Front Frame replacement procedure. CAUTION Use ESD precautions when performing the following replacement procedures. Figure Front Frame Shield Chapter

396 Assembly Replacement Procedures Front Frame Subassemblies Figure Front Frame Subassemblies The front frame assembly consists of the following sub-assemblies: Front Panel Interface Board (1) Inverter Boards (2) W5 Flat Flex cable (3) Backlight extension cable (4) Display Mount (5) Inverter Shield (6) Pressure Plate(8) Flat Panel Display (9) Display Converter Board (10) 396 Chapter 11

397 Assembly Replacement Procedures Front Frame Subassemblies Front Frame Exploded View Figure Front Frame Exploded View Item Description Item Description 1 Display Assembly 9 Keypad 2 Front Shield 10 Display Bezel Assembly 3 A2 Front Panel Interface Assembly 11 Dress Panel Assembly 4 A28 Audio Out Board 12 RPG Knob 5 W1 Ext Trigger Input Cable 13 Hole Plug, Nylon 6 Front Frame Assembly 14 Name Plate overlay label 7 Line Key (push rod) 15 Volume Knob 8 A3 Keyboard 16 Side Trim 17 Hole plugs or SMA adapters (Option AYZ) Chapter

398 Assembly Replacement Procedures Front Frame Subassemblies A1 Display and Filter Figure Display Parts The display assembly consists of: EMI filter (1) display mount (2) flat panel display (3) 398 Chapter 11

399 Assembly Replacement Procedures Front Frame Subassemblies Display Removal CAUTION Work in a clean environment to avoid getting dust on the display. The new flat panel display comes with a protective plastic sheet over the glass. Remove this plastic very slowly to avoid damage due to ESD. CAUTION The surface of the display is very easily scratched. Avoid touching it with your bare hands or other objects. Use a blower to remove any dust from the display surface. 1. Refer to Figure Unplug the Display Converter Board (10) from the Flat Panel Display. Peel back the attached flat flex cable (3) with the tape still attached until the ferrite block is free of the rubber mount. 2. Unplug the inverter backlight cable from the top inverter board and pull cable free of the rubber display mount (5). 3. Unplug the bottom backlight cable at the backlight extension cable (4) and pull the backlight extension cable free of the rubber display mount. 4. Remove the display mount / display from the front frame. 5. Remove the pressure plate (8) from between the display mount at the top of the display. 6. Peel back the rubber tabs on the display mount and carefully remove the display. Chapter

400 Assembly Replacement Procedures Front Frame Subassemblies Figure Front Frame Subassemblies Display Replacement 1. Carefully place the display into the rubber display mount. Flex the display mount rubber tabs until they are in place over the edges of the display. 2. Refer to Figure Install the pressure plate (8) between the display mount and the top of the display. 3. Place the display mount / display into the front frame. 4. Route the bottom display backlight cable from the display under the rubber tab of the display mount. 5. Plug the bottom backlight cable from the display into the backlight extension cable (4). Press the backlight extension cable into the grooves of the display mount. 6. Plug the top backlight cable from the display into the top inverter board. Press the backlight extension cable into the grooves of the display mount. 7. Plug the Display Converter board/flat flex cable into the flat panel display connector. 8. Place the ferrite block (on the flat flex cable) into the rubber display mount. 9. Press the tape down on the flat flex cable to secure the cable to the display. 400 Chapter 11

401 Assembly Replacement Procedures Front Frame Subassemblies Display Filter Removal/Replacement 1. Remove the rubber mount containing the display assembly from the front frame. Refer to the Display Removal procedure on page 399. CAUTION Be careful when handling the display/mount assembly outside of the front frame. The individual components are not secured in the mount and could possibly fall out of the mount unless it is held together. 2. Flip the display/mount assembly over and place it filter-side up on a flat surface. 3. The display filter can now be removed by pulling back on one of the corner supports (2) and lifting the filter (1) out of the mount as shown in Figure When you install a new filter, take care to touch only the outside edges. Install the filter into the mount by sliding under the corner supports. NOTE Make sure the side of the filter with the silver edge is facing up, away from the display. 5. The display/mount assembly can now be reinstalled into the front frame. Refer to the Display Replacement procedure on page 400. Figure Display Filter Replacement Chapter

402 Assembly Replacement Procedures Front Frame Subassemblies A2 Front Panel Interface Board Removal 1. Remove the RPG knob and volume knob by pulling straight off of the control shafts. 2. Refer to Figure Unplug both of the 2-wire backlight cables (2) from the inverter boards. 3. Unplug the Audio Out (3) cable from the interface board. 4. Unplug the display flat flex cable (4) from the front panel interface board. To do this, you must first pull up on both sides of the locking mechanism of the ribbon cable connector. 5. Using the T-10 driver, remove the 7 screws (1) that secure the front panel interface board (5) to the front frame assembly. 6. Lift the front panel interface board from the front frame assembly. Figure A2 Front Panel Interface Board Removal 402 Chapter 11

403 Assembly Replacement Procedures Front Frame Subassemblies Replacement 1. Place the front panel interface board into position in the front frame assembly. Mate the connector with the connector in the keyboard. 2. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 7 screws that secure the board to the front frame. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 3. Plug the display flat flex cable into the front panel interface board connector. Push down on both sides of the locking mechanism. 4. Reconnect the Audio Out cable. 5. Reconnect both of the 2-wire backlight cables. 6. Press the RPG knob and volume knob onto the control shafts. Chapter

404 Assembly Replacement Procedures Front Frame Subassemblies Bezel and Keypad Removal 1. Remove the display/rubber mount assembly. Refer to the first section of the Display Removal procedure. 2. Remove the RPG knob and volume knob by pulling straight off of the control shafts. 3. Refer to Figure Using the T-10 driver, remove the 10 screws (1) that secure the bezel and keyboard assembly to the front frame. 4. Refer to Figure The 10 screws also attach the dress panel, bezel, subpanel, keypad, and keyboard to the front frame. Take care to keep these parts in the correct order and aligned properly. 5. Lift the front frame off of the keypad/keyboard assembly. 6. The bezel and keyboard can now be separated by pressing on the pin just above the On/Standby LEDs on the bezel and sliding apart to unlock the tabs. The flexible keypads can be separated from the keyboard and the bezel by pulling them apart. NOTE Figure Take care to not touch the contacts on the keypads. Contaminants on the contacts might interfere with the performance of the key. Keypad Removal 404 Chapter 11

405 Assembly Replacement Procedures Front Frame Subassemblies Figure Keypad Parts Chapter

406 Assembly Replacement Procedures Front Frame Subassemblies Replacement 1. Place the keypad into position in the bezel. Press on the keypad to engage the alignment pins and to seat the keys. 2. Place the keyboard over the bezel alignment pins and carefully slide to lock into place. 3. Refer to Figure Place the keyboard/bezel assembly face down on top of the dress panel and subpanel on a flat surface. Install the front frame over the keyboard/bezel assembly. Using the T-10 driver, replace the 10 screws (1) that secure the bezel and keypad to the front frame. Torque to 9 inch pounds. 4. Press the RPG knob and volume knob onto the control shafts. 5. Replace the display/rubber mount assembly. Refer to the last section of the Display Replacement procedure. 406 Chapter 11

407 Assembly Replacement Procedures Front Frame Subassemblies RPG Removal/Replacement 1. Remove the front panel interface board. Refer to the A2 Front Panel Interface Board removal procedure. 2. Unsolder the RPG, remove the nut and washer, and remove it from the front panel interface board. 3. Place the new RPG in the correct position, tighten the nut and washer, and resolder the leads. 4. Replace the front panel interface board. Refer to the A2 Front Panel Interface Board replacement procedure. External Trigger Cable Removal/Replacement NOTE The front panel External Trigger connector/cable must be replaced as an assembly. CAUTION Be careful to not scratch the dress panel when removing or replacing this part. 1. Remove the front frame assembly. Refer to the Front Frame removal procedure on page Refer to Figure Using the 9/16 socket, remove the nut (1) that secures the connector to the front frame. 3. Disconnect the cable from the A8 analog IF assembly. 4. For replacement, position the connector/cable through the front frame, matching the D slot. 5. Using the 9/16 socket, replace the nut to secure the connector to the front frame. Torque to 21 inch pounds. 6. Clip the cable into the cable clamps on the shield. 7. Re-route the cable to avoid interference with the fans or the airflow, and reconnect to the A8 analog IF assembly. 8. Replace the front frame. Refer to the Front Frame replacement procedure. Chapter

408 Assembly Replacement Procedures Front Frame Subassemblies Figure Front Panel External Trigger Input Connector Removal 408 Chapter 11